2015 Dodge Dart Owner's Manual

User Manual: 2015-dart

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 664

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

Dart

2015
OWNER’S MANUAL
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name
Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the
name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated nondrinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.

This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes
in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or
improvements to its products without imposing any
obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.

WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.
Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are
slower, and your judgment is impaired when you
have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

SECTION

TABLE OF CONTENTS

PAGE

INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 621

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629

INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 639

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS
! INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 ! VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER . . . . . . . .6
! HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 ! VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS . . . .7
! WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

4 INTRODUCTION

When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained techCongratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group
nicians and genuine parts, and cares about your satisfacLLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision
tion.
workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all
essentials that are traditional to our vehicles.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
INTRODUCTION

This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to
read these publications carefully. Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.

Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.

NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it Consult the following table for a description of the
should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc- symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
ing and remain with the vehicle when sold.
this Owner’s Manual:

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

INTRODUCTION 5

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

6 INTRODUCTION

WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owners Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in a collision or
bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you
do not read this entire Owners Manual, you may miss
important information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the
left front corner of the instrument panel, visible through
the windshield. This number also is stamped into the
right front body, on the right front seat crossmember
under the carpet and the vehicle registration and title.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

VIN Location

INTRODUCTION 7

VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS

WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or
death.

Right Front Body VIN Location

NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2

CONTENTS
! A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 ! VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED . . .20
▫ Ignition Node Module (IGNM) — If Equipped. .12

▫ Rearming Of The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20

▫ Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) — If Equipped . . .13

▫ To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20

▫ Standard Blade Ignition Key — If Equipped . . .14

▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21

▫ Key Fob — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15

▫ Tamper Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22

▫ Ignition Or Accessory On Message . . . . . . . . . .16

▫ To Use The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22

! SENTRY KEY® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17

▫ Security System Manual Override . . . . . . . . . . .23

▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 ! ILLUMINATED ENTRY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
▫ Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 ! REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . .23
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19

▫ To Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

▫ To Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 ! KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
▫ To Unlatch The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 ! WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26

▫ Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43

▫ Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . .27

▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47

▫ Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . .27 ! TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30 ! TRUNK SAFETY WARNING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
! REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . .30

▫ Trunk Emergency Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48

▫ How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 ! OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . .49
! DOOR LOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34

▫ Important Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49

▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34

▫ Seat Belt Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51

▫ Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35

▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) . . . . . . . .62

▫ Child-Protection Door Lock System —
Rear Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37

▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
▫ Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11

! ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . .109
! SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
▫ Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111

▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
Your vehicle uses either a key start ignition system or
keyless ignition system. The key start ignition system
consists of a either a bladed key with an immobilizer chip
in it, or a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter and an Ignition Node Module (IGNM). The
keyless ignition system consists of a Key Fob with
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and a Keyless
Ignition Node (KIN).
Ignition Node Module (IGNM) — If Equipped
The Ignition Node Module (IGNM) operates similar to an
ignition switch. It has four operating positions, three with
detents and one that is spring-loaded. The detent positions are OFF, ACC, and ON/RUN. The START position
is a spring-loaded momentary contact position. When
released from the START position, the switch automatically returns to the ON/RUN position.

Ignition Node Module (IGNM)
1
2
3
4

— OFF
— ACC (ACCESSORY)
— ON/RUN
— START

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13

Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) — If Equipped
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition
switch with the push of a button, as long as the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is in the passenger
compartment.
The Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) has four operating
positions, three of which are labeled and will illuminate
when in position. The three positions are OFF, ACC, and
ON/RUN. The fourth position is START, during start
RUN will illuminate.
NOTE: In case the ignition switch does not change with
Keyless Ignition Node (KIN)
the push of a button, the RKE transmitter (Key Fob) may
have a low or dead battery. In this situation a back up 1 — OFF
method can be used to operate the ignition switch. Put 2 — ACC (ACCESSORY)
3 — ON/RUN
the nose side (side opposite of the emergency key) of the
Key Fob against the ENGINE START/STOP button and
push to operate the ignition switch.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Feature
If your vehicle is equipped with the Keyless Enter-NGo™ feature, refer to “Starting Procedure” in “Starting
And Operating” for further information.
Standard Blade Ignition Key — If Equipped
Your vehicle may use a standard blade key ignition
system. The authorized dealer that sold you your vehicle
has the key code numbers for your vehicle locks. These
numbers can be used to order duplicate keys from your
authorized dealer. Ask your authorized dealer for these
numbers and keep them in a safe place. You can insert the
double-sided standard blade key into the ignition switch
or lock cylinders with either side up.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Standard Blade Ignition Key

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15

Key Fob — If Equipped
The Key Fob also contains the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter and an emergency key, which stores in
the rear of the Key Fob.

The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle
should the battery in the vehicle or the Key Fob go dead.
You can keep the emergency key with you when valet
parking.
To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch
on the face of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb and
then pull the key out with your other hand.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Emergency Key Removal (IGNM)

16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Ignition Or Accessory On Message
Opening the driver’s door when the ignition is in ACC or
ON (engine not running), a chime will sound to remind
you to place the ignition in the OFF position. In addition
to the chime, the ignition or accessory on message will
display in the cluster.
NOTE: With the Uconnect® system, the power window
switches, radio, power sunroof (if equipped), and power
outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the
ignition is cycled to the OFF position. Opening either
front door will cancel this feature. The time for this
Emergency Key Removal (KIN)
feature is programmable. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings”
NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
into the lock cylinders with either side up.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17

WARNING!

WARNING! (Continued)

• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.

• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.

CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove key from the ignition and lock all doors
when leaving the vehicle unattended.
SENTRY KEY®
The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system prevents unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
or unlocked.

(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

The system uses a Key or Key Fob with Remote Keyless seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronEntry (RKE) transmitter, an RF receiver, and either an ics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon
Ignition Node Module (IGNM) or a Keyless Ignition as possible by an authorized dealer.
Node (KIN) to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation.
Therefore, only Keys or Key Fobs that are programmed to
CAUTION!
the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle.
The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system is not compatAfter placing the ignition in the ON/RUN position, the ible with some aftermarket remote starting systems.
Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting
bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it problems and loss of security protection.
indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. In
addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check, All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have
it indicates that someone used an invalid Key Fob to start been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
the engine. Either of these conditions will result in the
Replacement Keys
engine being shut off after two seconds.
NOTE: Only Keys or Key Fobs that are programmed to
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10
the vehicle. Once a Key or Key Fob is programmed to a
vehicle, it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19

Customer Key Programming

CAUTION!
Always remove the keys from the vehicle and lock all
doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN).
Keep the PIN in a secure location. This number is
required for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs.
Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an authorized dealer, this procedure consists of programming a
blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank Key Fob
is one that has never been programmed.

Programming Keys or Key Fobs with RKE transmitters
may be performed at an authorized dealer.
General Information
The Sentry Key® system complies with FCC rules part 15
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.

• This device must accept any interference that may be
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

NOTE: When having the Sentry Key® Immobilizer sysNOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
tem serviced, bring all vehicle Key Fobs with you to an
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
authorized dealer.
user’s authority to operate the equipment.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED

To Arm The System

The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Alarm:
for unauthorized entry and the ignition switch for unau1. Make sure the vehicles ignition is cycled to the “OFF”
thorized operation. This system may also incorporate a
position (refer to #Starting Procedures# in #Starting
ultrasonic intrusion sensor that monitors for motion in
And Operating# for further information).
the vehicle. If something triggers the alarm, the Vehicle
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™,
Security Alarm will provide the following audible and
make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF.
visible signals: the horn will pulse, the headlights, park
lamps and/or turn signals will flash, and the Vehicle
• For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-NSecurity Light in the instrument cluster will flash.
Go™, make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF
and the key is physically removed from the ignition.
Rearming Of The System
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to 2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the
vehicle:
disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn the horn
off after three minutes, turn all of the visual signals off
• Push LOCK on the interior power door lock switch
after 15 minutes, and then the Vehicle Security Alarm will
with the driver and/or passenger door open.
rearm itself.
• Push the LOCK button on the exterior Passive Entry
Door Handle with a valid Key Fob available in the
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21

same exterior zone (refer to #Keyless Enter-N-Go™# • Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF
position.
in #Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle# for
further information).
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™,
push the Keyless Enter-N-Go™ START/STOP but• Push the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry
ton (requires at least one valid Key Fob in the
(RKE) transmitter.
vehicle).
3. If any doors are open, close them.
• For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-NGo™, insert a valid key into the ignition switch and
To Disarm The System
turn the key to the ON position.
The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any of
the following methods:
NOTE:
• Push the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless • The driver’s door key cylinder and the trunk button on
Entry (RKE) transmitter.
the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle
Security Alarm.
• Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle if
equipped, refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in “Things • When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
information.
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your
vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previously described arming sequences has occurred, the
Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether
you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle
and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs,
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.

To Use The Panic Alarm

To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, push and hold
the PANIC button on the Key Fob/Remote for at least
one second and release. When the Panic Alarm is on, the
headlights will turn on, the park lights and turn signals
will flash, the horn will pulse on and off, and the interior
If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery lights will turn on.
becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security Alarm will The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the you turn it off by either pushing the PANIC button a
exterior lights will flash, the horn will sound. If this second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
(24 km/h) or greater.
Tamper Alert

NOTE:
If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in
• The interior lights will turn off if you cycle the ignition
your absence, the horn will sound three times and the
switch to the ACC or ON/RUN position while the
exterior lights blink three times when you unlock the
Panic Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lights
doors. Check the vehicle for tampering.
and horn will remain on.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23

• You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from the The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds
vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition is
Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted cycled to the ON/RUN position from the OFF position.
by the system.
NOTE:
Security System Manual Override
• The front courtesy overhead console and door courThe Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the
tesy lights will turn on if the dimmer control is in the
doors using the manual door lock plunger.
#Dome ON# position (extreme top position).
• The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the
dimmer control is in the “Dome defeat” position
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the
(extreme bottom position).
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to unlock the
doors or open any door.
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)
ILLUMINATED ENTRY

This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the
outside mirrors (if equipped). Refer to “Mirrors” in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.

The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock the doors,
open the trunk, or activate the Panic Alarm from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a hand-held
Key Fob with RKE transmitter. The RKE transmitter does
not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the
system.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: Driving at speeds 5 mph (8 km/h) and above
disables the system from responding to all RKE transmitter buttons for all RKE transmitters.

Key Fob With RKE Transmitter

Key Fob With Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter
(IGNM)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25

To Unlock The Doors

Flash Lights With Lock

Push and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE
transmitter once to unlock the driver’s door or twice
within five seconds to unlock all doors. The turn signal
lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal. The
illuminated entry system will also turn on.

This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when
the doors are locked with the RKE transmitter. This
feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the
current setting, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to Headlight Illumination On Approach
“Keyless Enter-N-Go™” under “Things To Know Before
This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter.
1st Push Of Key Fob Unlocks
The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either equipped through Uconnect®. To change the current
the driver’s door or all doors on the first push of the setting, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change the Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
current setting, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Under- To Lock The Doors
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Push and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter to lock all doors. The turn signal lights will flash and
the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to Using The Panic Alarm
“Keyless Enter-N-Go™” under “Things To Know Before To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, push and hold
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one
second and release. When the Panic Alarm is activated,
Sound Horn With Lock
the turn signals will flash, the horn will pulse on and off,
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors
and the interior lights will turn on.
are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be
turned on or turned off. To change the current setting, The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless
refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your you turn it off by either pushing the PANIC button a
second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 MPH
Instrument Panel” for further information.
(24 km/h) or greater.
To Unlatch The Trunk
NOTE:
Push the TRUNK button on the RKE transmitter two
times within five seconds to unlatch the trunk.
• The interior lights will turn off if you cycle the ignition
switch to the ACC or ON/RUN position while the
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
Panic Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lights
“Keyless Enter-N-Go™” under “Things To Know Before
and horn will remain on.
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27

• You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from the 1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical
latch on the back of the RKE transmitter sideways
vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the
with your thumb and then pull the key out with your
Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted
other hand.
by the system.
Programming Additional Transmitters
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be
performed at an authorized dealer.
Transmitter Battery Replacement
The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
battery.
NOTE:
• Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
• Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
housing or the printed circuit board.

Ignition Node Module (IGNM) Emergency Key Removal

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) Emergency Key Removal

2. Separating RKE halves requires screw removal – if
equipped, and gently prying the two halves of the
RKE transmitter apart. Make sure not to damage the
seal during removal.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Remove Screw From Transmitter Case

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29

Separating Ignition Node Module (IGNM) Transmitter
Case

Separating Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) Transmitter
Case

3. Remove the battery by turning the back cover over
(battery facing downward) and tapping it lightly on a
solid surface such as a table or similar, then replace the
battery. When replacing the battery, match the + sign
on the battery to the + sign on the inside of the battery
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

clip, located on the back cover. Avoid touching the
new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it
with rubbing alcohol.

NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:

tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB
radios.

If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal
4. To assemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two distance, check for these two conditions:
halves together, reposition and secure the screw as 1. A weak battery in the transmitter. The expected life of
shown in step #2 for removal.
the battery is a minimum of three years.
General Information
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station

• This device may not cause harmful interference.

• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.

REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
This system uses the Key Fob with Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to start the
engine conveniently from outside the vehicle
while still maintaining security. The system has
a range of approximately 300 ft (91 m).

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31

• Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pushed)

NOTE:

• The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic •
transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
•
• Low fuel indicator must not be illuminated.
•
• Obstructions between the vehicle and the Key Fob may
•
reduce this range.
•
How To Use Remote Start
All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will remote start:
• Shift lever in PARK
• Doors closed
• Hood closed

Battery at an acceptable charge level
RKE panic button not pushed

System not disabled from previous remote start event
Vehicle security alarm not active
Ignition in OFF position

WARNING!
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury or death when inhaled.

• Trunk closed

(Continued)

• Hazard switch off
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

• Remote Start Aborted — Too Cold

WARNING! (Continued)
• Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters
away from children. Operation of the Remote Start
System, windows, door locks or other controls
could cause serious injury or death.

• Remote Start Aborted — Time Expired

The EVIC/DID message stays active until the ignition is
cycled to the ON/RUN position.
To Enter Remote Start Mode

Remote Start Abort Message
The following messages will display in the EVIC/DID (if
equipped) if the vehicle fails to remote start or exits
remote start prematurely:
• Remote Start Aborted — Door Open

• Remote Start Aborted — Hood Open

• Remote Start Aborted — Trunk Open
• Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low

• Remote Start Disabled — Start To Reset

Push and release the REMOTE START button
on the RKE transmitter twice within five seconds. The vehicle doors will lock, parking
lights will flash and the horn will chirp twice (if
programmed). Then, the engine will start and the vehicle
will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15-minute
cycle.
NOTE:
• If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the
vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33

• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle
Remote Start mode.
Before the end of 15-minute cycle, push and release the
• For security, power window and power sunroof op- UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the
eration (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if
equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15-minute cycle,
in the Remote Start mode.
push and release the START/STOP button (vehicles
• The engine can be started two consecutive times (two equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™) or insert the key
15-minute cycles) with the RKE transmitter. However, and turn it to the RUN position (vehicles not equipped
the ignition must be cycled to the RUN position before with Keyless Enter-N-Go™).
you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle.
NOTE: The message #Remote Start Active Push Start
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
Button# (vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™)
Vehicle
or #Remote Start Active Key to Run# (vehicles not
Push and release the REMOTE START button one time or equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™) will display in the
allow the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle.
EVIC/DID until you push the START button or turn the
key to the RUN position.
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system
will disable the one time push of the REMOTE START
button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote
Start request.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

DOOR LOCKS
Manual Door Locks
To lock each door, rotate the door lock knob on each door
trim panel forward. To unlock the front doors, pull the
inside door handle to the first detent or rotate the door
lock button until the red indicator is visible. To unlock the
rear doors, rotate the door lock button until the red
indicator is visible.

Door Lock Knob

If the door lock button is locked (no red indicator visible)
when you shut the door, the door will lock. Therefore,
make sure the Key Fob is not inside the vehicle before
closing the door.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35

Power Door Locks

WARNING!
• For personal security and safety in the event of an
collision, lock the vehicle doors as you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the transmission gear selector.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.

A power door lock switch is on each front door trim
panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Power Door Lock Switch

36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ (Passive Entry) system. For further
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with
information, refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in “Things
power door locks if:
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”.
If you push the power door lock switch while the key is 1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is enabled.
in the ignition, and any front door is open, the power

locks will not operate. This prevents you from acciden- 2. The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed
tally locking the Key Fob in the vehicle. Removing the
returned to 0 mph (0 km/h).
key from the ignition or closing the door will allow the
locks to operate. If a door is open, and the ignition is in 3. The transmission is in PARK when the door is opened
(automatic transmission vehicles).
the OFF or ACC position, a chime will sound as a
reminder to remove the Key Fob.
4. The clutch pedal is not pushed when the door is
opened (manual transmission vehicles).
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped
The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled. 5. Any door is opened.
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically
6. The doors were not previously unlocked.
when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The
auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your
authorized dealer per written request of the customer.
Please see your authorized dealer for service.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37

Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit Programming
To change the current setting, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.

NOTE: Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature
in accordance with local laws.
Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear Doors
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with
Child-Protection Door Lock system.
Child-Protection Door Lock Function

To Engage Or Disengage The Child-Protection
Door Lock System

WARNING!

1. Open the rear door.
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key or a small coin into
the lock and rotate to the LOCK or UNLOCK position.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door.

Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the Child-Protection locks are
engaged (locked).

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: For emergency exit from the rear seats when the • If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been
raining on the Passive Entry door handle, the unlock
Child-Protection Door Lock System is engaged, manually
sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower rerotate the door lock button to the unlocked position, roll
sponse time.
down the window, and open the door using the outside
door handle.
• If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and no door
goes ajar within 60 seconds, the vehicle will re-lock
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™
and if equipped will arm the security alarm.
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the
vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system and a To Unlock From The Driver’s Side:
feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go™. This feature allows you With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to (1.5 m) of the driver’s door handle, grab the front driver
push the RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons.
door handle to unlock the driver’s door automatically.
NOTE:
• Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF; refer to
“Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the
door is unlocked.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39

To Unlock From The Passenger Side:
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the passenger door handle, grab the front
passenger door handle to unlock all four doors automatically. The interior door panel lock knob will raise when
the door is unlocked.
NOTE: All doors will unlock when the front passenger
door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door
unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st
Push” or “Unlock All Doors 1st Push”).
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock

NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Push” is programmed
all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the front
driver’s door handle. To select between “Unlock Driver
Door 1st Push” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Push”, refer to
“Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry RKE
Transmitter In Vehicle
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a
Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside your vehicle, the
Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door
unlock feature which will function if the ignition switch
is in the OFF position.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

If one of the vehicle doors is open and the door panel
switch is used to lock the vehicle, once all open doors
have been closed the vehicle checks the inside and
outside of the vehicle for any valid Passive Entry RKE
transmitters. If one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE
transmitters is detected inside the vehicle, and no other
valid Passive Entry RKE transmitters are detected outside the vehicle, the Passive Entry System automatically
unlocks all vehicle doors and chirps the horn three times
(on the third attempt ALL doors will lock and the Passive
Entry RKE transmitter can be locked in the vehicle).
NOTE: The vehicle will only unlock the doors when the
doors are locked using the door panel switch, a valid
Passive Entry RKE transmitter is detected inside the
vehicle, and no valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter is
detected outside the vehicle. The vehicle will not unlock
the doors when any of the following conditions are true:

• The doors are locked using the LOCK button on the
Passive Entry door handles.
• The doors are manually locked using the door lock
knobs.
• There is a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter outside
the vehicle and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of either Passive
Entry door handle.
• Three attempts are made to lock the doors using the
door panel switch and then close the doors.
To Enter The Trunk
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 3 ft
(1.0 m) of the deck lid, push the button on the right side
of CHMSL, (Center High Mounted Stop Light) which is
located on the deck lid.

• The doors are locked using the RKE transmitter.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41

To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmitters
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door
handles, push the door handle LOCK button to lock all
four doors.
Do NOT grab the door handle, when pushing the door
handle button. This could unlock the door(s).

Trunk Unlock Button

NOTE: If you inadvertently leave your vehicle’s Passive
Entry RKE transmitter in the trunk and try to close the
trunk lid, the trunk lid will automatically unlatch, unless
another one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmitters is outside the vehicle and within 3 ft (1.0 m) of the
deck lid.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Push The Door Handle Button To Lock

Do NOT Grab The Handle When Locking

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43

NOTE:
• After pushing the door handle button, you must wait
two seconds before you can lock or unlock the doors,
using either Passive Entry door handle. This is done to
allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling
the door handle, without the vehicle reacting and
unlocking.

• The Passive Entry system will not operate if the RKE
transmitter battery is dead.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the RKE
transmitter lock button or the lock button located on the
vehicle’s interior door panel.
WINDOWS
Power Windows

Power Window Switches

There are single window controls on each passenger door
trim panel, which operate the passenger door windows.
The window controls will operate only when the ignition
is in the ACC or ON/RUN position.

The window controls on the driver’s door control all the
door windows.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: For vehicles equipped with the Uconnect®, the
power window switches will remain active for up to 10
minutes after the ignition is cycled to the OFF position.
Opening either front door will cancel this feature. The time
is programmable. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do
not let children play with power windows. Do not
leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a
location accessible to children, and do not leave the
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-NGo™ in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants,
particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the windows while operating the power
window switches. Such entrapment may result in
serious injury or death.

Driver One Touch Down
The driver door power window switch has an auto down
feature. Push the window switch to the second detent
and release, and the window will go down automatically.
To open the window part way, push the window switch
to the first detent and release it when you want the
window to stop.
To stop the window from going all the way down during
the Auto Down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.
Front Windows Express Up And Down — If
Equipped
Express Down
Push the switch for less than a half a second and release.
The window will go down automatically.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45

• Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger
the auto-reverse function unexpectedly during autoPush the switch for more than a half a second and release
closure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the
when you want the window to stop.
first detent and hold to close the window manually.
Express Up
Manual Down

Lift the switch for less than a half a second and release.
The window will go up automatically.
Manual Up

WARNING!

There is no anti-pinch protection when the window
is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the
window before closing.

Lift the switch for more than a half a second and release
Reset Auto-Up
when you want the window to stop.
NOTE:

Should the Auto Up feature stop working, the window
may need to be reset. To reset Auto Up:

• If the window runs into any obstacle during autoclosure, it will reverse direction and then go back 1. Make sure the door is fully closed.
down. Remove the obstacle and use the window 2. Pull the window switch up to close the window
switch again to close the window.
completely and continue to hold the switch up for an
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

3. Push the window switch down firmly to the second
detent to open the window completely and continue
to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds
after the window is fully open.
Window Lockout Switch
The window lockout switch on the driver’s door trim
panel allows you to disable the window controls on the
rear passenger doors. To disable the window controls,
push and release the window lockout button (setting it in
the DOWN position). To enable the window controls,
push and release the window lockout button again
(setting it in the UP position).

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Window Lockout Switch

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47

Wind Buffeting

TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE

Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
The trunk lid can be released from
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
inside the vehicle by pushing the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
TRUNK RELEASE button located
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
on the instrument panel to the left
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurof the steering wheel.
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, then open the front and rear
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting.
NOTE: The transmission must be in PARK before the
button will operate.
The trunk lid can be released from outside the vehicle by
pushing the TRUNK button on the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter twice within five seconds or by using
the external release switch located on the underside of
the decklid overhang. The release feature will function
only when the vehicle is in the unlock condition.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

With the ignition in the ON/RUN position, the Trunk
Open symbol will display in the instrument cluster
indicating that the trunk is open. The odometer display
will reappear once the trunk is closed.
With the ignition in the OFF position, the Trunk Open
symbol will display until the trunk is closed.

WARNING! (Continued)
trunk lid when your vehicle is unattended. Once in
the trunk, young children may not be able to escape,
even if they entered through the rear seat. If trapped
in the trunk, children can die from suffocation or
heat stroke.

Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in “Things To Know
Trunk Emergency Release
Before Starting Your Vehicle” for more information on
As a security measure, a trunk internal emergency release
trunk operation with the Passive Entry feature.
lever is built into the trunk latching mechanism. In the
TRUNK SAFETY WARNING
event of an individual being locked inside the trunk, the
trunk can be simply opened by pulling on the glow-inWARNING!
the-dark handle attached to the trunk latching mechanism.
Do not allow children to have access to the trunk,
either by climbing into the trunk from outside, or
through the inside of the vehicle. Always close the
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49

OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems:
• Seat Belt Systems

• Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
• Child Restraints

Important Safety Precautions

Trunk Emergency Release

Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing 6. All occupants should always wear their lap and
child restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat,
shoulder belts properly.
move the seat as far back as possible and use the
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
proper child restraint. (Refer to “Child Restraints”)
back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front
3. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle
Air Bags room to inflate.
seat belt properly (Refer to #Child Restraints#) should
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
be secured in a vehicle with a rear seat in child
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the
restraints or belt-positioning booster seats. Older chilside air bags will inflate forcefully into the space
dren who do not use child restraints or beltbetween you and the door and you could be injured.
positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled
up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind
the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided
them or under their arm.
under #If You Need Assistance.#
5. You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it
properly.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51

ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert)

BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver
and outboard front passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger BeltAlert) to buckle their seat
belts. The feature is active whenever the ignition
Seat Belt Systems
switch is in the START or ON/RUN position. If the
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even driver or outboard front seat passenger is unbelted,
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain
and could cause a collision that includes you. This can on until both outboard front seat belts are buckled.
happen far away from home or on your own street.
The BeltAlert warning sequence begins after the vehicle
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they speed is over 5 MPH (8 km/h) by blinking the Seat Belt
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime.
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown Once the sequence starts, it will continue for the entire
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of duration or until the respective seat belts are buckled.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

After the sequence completes, the Seat Belt Reminder
Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts
are buckled. The driver should instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts. If an outboard front seat
belt is unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5
MPH (8 km/h), BeltAlert will provide both audio and
visual notification.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active
when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or heavy
object is on the outboard front passenger seat or when the
seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that
pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet
harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts,
and cargo is properly stowed.

NOTE: If BeltAlert has been deactivated, the Seat Belt
Reminder Light will continue to illuminate while the
driver’s or outboard front passenger’s (if equipped with
BeltAlert) seat belt remains unbuckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very
sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely with you under
normal conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt
will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the
vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.

BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by your authorized dealer. Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend
deactivating BeltAlert.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53

WARNING!

WARNING! (Continued)

• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belt even though you have
air bags.
• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.

• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of the seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear
your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.

(Continued)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)

• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at
the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat
belt as low as possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In
a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the
seat belt is flat against your body, without twists. If
you can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take
it to your authorized dealer immediately and have
it fixed.
• A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle
will not protect you properly. The lap portion could
ride too high on your body, possibly causing internal injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the
buckle nearest you.

• A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
• A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of
the vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a collision.

(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

(Continued)

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55

WARNING! (Continued)
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
• A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect
the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify
the seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies must be
replaced after a collision.

2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles
equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and
pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go
around your lap.

Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”

plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces
the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a collision.

Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle

Positioning The Lap Belt

4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low 5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and
across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove
chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor will
slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57

6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the 3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of
buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its
the latch plate.
stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate
down the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
fully.
folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
In the driver and front passenger seats, the top of the
shoulder belt.
shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the position the seat belt away from your neck. Push or
squeeze the anchorage button to release the anchorage,
anchor point.
and move it up or down to the position that serves you
2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate,
best.
grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180° to create a
fold that begins immediately above the latch plate.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows
the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward
position without pushing or squeezing the release button. To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull
downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is
locked into position.
Seat Belt Extender

Adjustable Anchorage

As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position,
and if you are taller than average, you will prefer the
shoulder belt anchorage in a higher position. After you
release the anchorage button, try to move it up or down
to make sure that it is locked in position.

If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when
the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper
shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest
position, your authorized dealer can provide you with a
Seat Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be used
only if the existing seat belt is not long enough. When the
Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different occupant, it must be removed.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59

WARNING!
• ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically
required in order to properly fit the original seat
belt system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender
if, when worn, the distance between the front edge
of the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of
the occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
• Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can
increase the risk of serious injury or death in a
collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the
lap belt is not long enough and only use in the
recommended seating positions. Remove and store
the Seat Belt Extender when not needed.

Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the seat belt
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
Keep the seat belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is a collision.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning
devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat
belt in the event of a collision. These devices may
improve the performance of the seat belt by removing
slack from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners
work for all size occupants, including those in child
restraints.

NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts worn snugly and positioned properly.
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
the best way to keep the baby safe.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re- Restraints” section of this manual. The table below
straint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the preten- defines the type of feature for each seating position.
sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or
a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
This vehicle has a seat belt system with an Energy
Management feature in the front seating positions that
may help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of
a collision. This seat belt system has a retractor assembly
that is designed to release webbing in a controlled
manner.
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) — If Equipped
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions may be
equipped with Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors
(ALR) which are used to secure a child restraint system. • ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
For additional information, refer to “Installing Child
Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61

If the passenger seating position is equipped with an feature. Children 12 years old and under should always
be properly restrained in a vehicle with a rear seat.
ALR and is being used for normal usage:
Only pull the seat belt webbing out far enough to
comfortably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section so
as to not activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you
will hear a clicking sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow
the webbing to retract completely in this case and then
carefully pull out only the amount of webbing necessary
to comfortably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section.
Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
#click.#

In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is autoHow To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
matically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to
remove any slack in the shoulder belt. The Automatic 1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
Locking Mode is available on all passenger-seating posi2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
tions with a combination lap/shoulder belt. Use the
the entire seat belt is extracted.
Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is
installed in a seating position that has a seat belt with this
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts,
you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat
belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.

WARNING!

WARNING! (Continued)
• Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could
increase the risk of injury in collisions.
• Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain
occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children
who are using booster seats. The locked mode is
only used to install rear-facing or forward-facing
child restraints that have a harness for restraining
the child.
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)

• The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not working
properly when checked according to the procedures in the Service Manual.
(Continued)

Air Bag System Components
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag
system components:
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63

• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel

• Knee Impact Bolsters

• Advanced Front Air Bags

• Supplemental Side Air Bags

• Supplemental Knee Air Bags

• Front and Side Impact Sensors

Advanced Front Air Bags
This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the
driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat
belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air
Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The
passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed on
the air bag covers.

• Seat Belt Pretenioners

• Seat Belt Buckle Switch

• Seat Track Position Sensors

• Occupant Classification System

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags
2 — Supplemental Driver And Passenger Knee Air Bags/Driver
And Passenger Knee Impact Bolsters

• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65

the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat
belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
Advanced Front Air Bags.
driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides
output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
WARNING!
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the front impact • No objects should be placed over or near the air
sensors or other system components.
bag on the instrument panel or steering wheel,
Advanced Front Air Bag Features

The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy
output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy
output is used for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon
seat position.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether

because any such objects could cause harm if the
vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the
air bags to inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may
damage the air bags and you could be injured
because the air bags may no longer be functional.
The protective covers for the air bag cushions are
designed to open only when the air bags are
inflating.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

(Continued)

66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)

WARNING!

• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts even though you have air
bags.

• No objects should be placed over or near the air
bag on the instrument panel or steering wheel,
because any such objects could cause harm if the
vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the
air bags to inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may
damage the air bags and you could be injured
because the air bags may no longer be functional.
The protective covers for the air bag cushions are
designed to open only when the air bags are
inflating.

Advanced Front Air Bag Features
This vehicle is equipped with a right front passenger
Occupant Classification System (“OCS”) that is designed
to provide Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag output
appropriate to the occupant’s seated weight input, as
determined by the OCS.

(Continued)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67

WARNING! (Continued)
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts even though you have air
bags.
Advanced Front Air Bag Operation
Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional protection by supplementing the seat belts. Advanced Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk
of injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The Advanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all frontal
collisions, including some that may produce substantial
vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions,
truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.

On the other hand, depending on the type and location of
impact, Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes
with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a
severe initial deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should
have deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in position,
away from an inflating air bag.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Advanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large
quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
Advanced Front Air Bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right
side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The Advanced
Front Air Bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly deflate while
helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.
Occupant Classification System (OCS) — Front
Passenger Seat
The OCS is part of a Federally regulated safety system for
this vehicle. It is designed to provide Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag output appropriate to the occupant’s seated weight, as determined by the OCS.
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) consists of the
following:

Occupant Classification Module (OCM) and Sensor
The Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is located
underneath the front passenger seat. The Sensor is located beneath the passenger seat cushion foam. Any
weight on the seat will be sensed by the Sensor. The OCM
uses input from the Sensor to determine the front passenger’s most probable classification. The OCM communicates this information to the ORC. The ORC may
reduce the inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag deployment based on occupant classification. In
order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is important
for the front passenger to be seated properly and properly wearing the seat belt.

• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)

• Occupant Classification Module (OCM) and Sensor
located in the front passenger seat
• Air Bag Warning Light
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69

The OCS will NOT prevent deployment of the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag. The OCS may reduce the
inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag if
the OCS estimates that:

Front Passenger Seat Occupant Status
Rear-facing child restraint

• The front passenger seat is unoccupied or has very
light objects on it; or

Child, including a child in
a forward-facing child restraint or booster seat*
Properly seated adult

• The front passenger seat is occupied by a small passenger, including a child; or
• The front passenger seat is occupied by a rear-facing
child restraint; or
• The front passenger is not properly seated or his or her
weight is taken off of the seat for a period of time.

Unoccupied seat

Front Passenger Air
Bag Output
Reduced-power deployment
Reduced-power deployment OR Fullpower deployment
Full-power deployment
OR reduced-power deployment
Reduced-power deployment

* It is possible for a child to be classified as an adult,
allowing a full-power Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
deployment. Never allow children to ride in the front
passenger seat and never install a child restraint system,
including a rear-facing child restraint, in the front passenger seat.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
• Only use rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
• Children 12 years or younger should always ride
buckled up in a rear seat.
The OCS determines the front passenger’s most probable
classification. The OCS estimates the seated weight on
the front passenger seat and where that weight is located.
The OCS communicates the classification status to the
ORC. The ORC uses the classification to determine
whether the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag inflation
rate should be adjusted.

In order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is
important for the front passenger to be seated properly
and properly wearing the seat belt. Properly seated
passengers are:
• Sitting upright

• Facing forward

• Sitting in the center of the seat with their feet comfortably on or near the floor
• Sitting with their back against the seatback and the
seatback in an upright position

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71

Lighter Weight Passengers (Including Small
Adults)
When a lighter weight passenger, including a small adult,
occupies the front passenger seat, the OCS may reduce
the inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag. This does not mean that the OCS is working
improperly.
Do not decrease OR increase the front passenger’s
seated weight on the front passenger seat
Seated Properly

The front passenger’s seated weight must be properly
positioned on the front passenger seat. Failure to do so
may result in serious injury or death. The OCS determines the most probable classification of the occupant
that it detects.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

The OCS will detect the front passenger’s decreased or • The front passenger leans forward, sideways, or turns
increased seated weight, which may result in an adjusted
to face the rear of the vehicle.
inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag in
• The front passenger’s seatback is not in the full upright
a collision. This does not mean that the OCS is working
position.
improperly.
• The front passenger carries or holds an object while
Decreasing the front passenger’s seated weight on the
seated (e.g., backpack, box, etc.)
front passenger seat may result in a reduced-power
deployment of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. • Objects are lodged under the front passenger seat.
Increasing the front passenger’s seated weight on the
• Objects are lodged between the front passenger seat
front passenger seat may result in a full-power deployand center console.
ment of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag.
• Accessories that may change the seated weight on the
Examples of improper front passenger seating include:
front passenger seat are attached to the front passenger
seat.
• The front passenger’s weight is transferred to another
part of the vehicle (like the door, arm rest or instru• Anything that may decrease or increase the front
ment panel).
passenger’s seated weight.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73

The OCS determines the front passenger’s most probable
classification. If an occupant in the front passenger seat is
seated improperly, the occupant may provide an output
signal to the OCS that is different from the occupant’s
properly seated weight input, for example:

Not Seated Properly

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Not Seated Properly

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75

WARNING!

WARNING! (Continued)

• If an occupant in the front passenger seat is seated
improperly, the occupant may provide an output
signal to the OCS that is different from the occupant’s properly seated weight input. This may
result in serious injury or death in a collision.
• Always wear your seat belt and sit properly, with
the seatback in an upright position, your back
against the seatback, sitting upright, facing forward, in the center of the seat, with your feet
comfortably on or near the floor.
• Do not carry or hold any objects (e.g., backpacks,
boxes, etc.) while seated in the front passenger seat.
Holding an object may provide an output signal to
the OCS that is different than the occupant’s properly seated weight input, which may result in
serious injury or death in a collision.

• Placing an object on the floor under the front
passenger seat may prevent the OCS from working
properly, which may result in serious injury or
death in a collision. Do not place any objects on the
floor under the front passenger seat.

(Continued)

in the instrument panel
The Air Bag Warning Light
will turn on whenever the OCS is unable to classify the
front passenger seat status. A malfunction in the OCS
may affect the operation of the air bag system.
If the Air Bag Warning Light
does not come on, or
stays on after you start the vehicle, or it comes on as
you drive, take the vehicle to an authorized dealer for
service immediately.
The passenger seat assembly contains critical OCS components that may affect the Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag inflation. In order for the OCS to properly

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

classify the seated weight of a front seat passenger, the •
OCS components must function as designed.
•
Do not make any modifications to the front passenger
seat components, assembly, or to the seat cover. If the
seat, trim cover, or cushion needs service for any reason,
take the vehicle to your authorized dealer. Only Chrysler
Group LLC approved seat accessories may be used.
The following requirements must be strictly followed:
• Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or
components in any way.
• Do not use prior or future model year seat covers or
cushions not designated by Chrysler Group LLC for
the specific model being repaired. Always use the
correct seat cover and cushion specified for the vehicle.
• Do not replace the seat cover or cushion with an
aftermarket seat cover or cushion.

Do not add a secondary seat cover or mat.
At no time should any Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) component or SRS related component or fastener
be modified or replaced with any part except those
which are approved by Chrysler Group LLC.

WARNING!

Unapproved modifications or service procedures to
the passenger seat assembly, its related components,
seat cover or cushion may inadvertently change the
air bag deployment in case of a frontal collision. This
could result in death or serious injury to the front
passenger if the vehicle is involved in a collision. A
modified vehicle may not comply with required
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS)
and/or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
(CMVSS).

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77

Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the glove
compartment. The Supplemental Knee Air Bags provide
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
enhanced protection during a frontal impact by working
driver and front passenger, and position the front occutogether with the seat belts, pretensioners, and Advanced
pants for improved interaction with the Advanced Front
Front Air Bags.
Air Bags.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Knee Impact Bolsters

WARNING!

• Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact
bolsters in any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact
bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band
radios, etc.
Supplemental Driver And Front Passenger Knee
Air Bags

Your vehicle is equipped with two types of supplemental
Side Air Bags:
1. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs):
Located in the outboard side of the front and rear (in
vehicles equipped with outboard rear seat SABs) seats.
The SABs are marked with a “SRS AIRBAG” or
“AIRBAG ” label sewn into the outboard side of the
seats.

This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver
Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the
steering column and a Supplemental Passenger Knee Air
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label

Rear Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label

The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury
during certain side impacts, in addition to the injury
reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body
structure.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79

When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the out- 2. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
board side of the seatback’s trim cover (front seats) and
(SABICs): Located above the side windows. The trim
the seam on the outboard side of the seat cushion’s trim
covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or
cover (outboard rear seats — if equipped with rear SABs).
“AIRBAG.”
The inflating SAB deploys through the seat seam into the
space between the occupant and the door. The SAB
moves at a very high speed and with such a high force
that it could injure you if you are not seated properly, or
if items are positioned in the area where the SAB inflates.
Children are at an even greater risk of injury from a
deploying air bag.

WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.

Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Label Location

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

SABICs may help reduce the risk of head injury to front
and rear seat outboard occupants in certain side impacts.
SABICs may reduce the risk of injuries in certain side
impacts, in addition to the injury reduction potential
provided by the seat belts and body structure.
The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the
headliner out of the way and covers the window. The
SABICs inflate with enough force to injure you if you are
not belted and seated properly, or if items are positioned
in the area where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an
even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side
windows in certain side impact events.

WARNING!
• Your vehicle is equipped with left and right
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs). Do not stack luggage or other cargo up
high enough to block the deployment of the
SABICs. The trim covering above the side windows where the SABIC and its deployment path
are located should remain free from any obstructions.
• Your vehicle is equipped with SABICs. In order for
the SABICs to work as intended, do not install any
accessory items in your vehicle which could alter
the roof. Do not add an aftermarket sunroof to your
vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation
on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the
vehicle for any reason.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81

The SABICs and SABs (“Side Air Bags”) are designed to
activate in certain side impacts. The Occupant Restraint
Controller (“ORC”) determines whether the deployment
of the Side Air Bags in a particular impact event is
appropriate, based on the severity and type of collision.
The side impact sensors aid the ORC in determining the
appropriate response to impact events. The system is
calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on the impact side
of the vehicle during impacts that require Side Air Bag
occupant protection. In side impacts, the Side Air Bags
deploy independently; a left side impact deploys the left
Side Air Bags only and a right-side impact deploys the
right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle damage by itself is not a
good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags should
have deployed.

compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during
angled or offset frontal collisions where the Advanced
Front Air Bags deploy.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint
system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes. Occupants, including children, who are
up against or very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously
injured or killed. Occupants, including children, should
never lean on or sleep against the door, side windows, or
area where the Side Air Bags inflate, even if they are in an
infant or child restraint.

Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate) are
necessary for your protection in all collisions. They also
help keep you in position, away from inflating Side Air
Bags. To get the best protection from the Side Air Bags,
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions,
occupants must wear their seat belts properly and sit
including some collisions at certain angles, or some side
upright with their backs against the seats. Children must
collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

be properly restrained in a child restraint or booster seat If A Deployment Occurs
that is appropriate for the size of the child.
The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate
immediately after deployment.

WARNING!

• Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the
center of the seat.
• Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deployment could cause you to be severely injured or
killed.
• Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air
Bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
properly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even
though you have Side Air Bags.

NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
the air bag system.
If you do have a collision, which deploys the air bags, any
or all of the following may occur:

• The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions
and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags
deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a
carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by
contact with chemicals. They are not permanent and
normally heal quickly. However, if you haven’t healed
significantly within a few days, or if you have any
NOTE: Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
blistering, see your doctor immediately.
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83

• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
WARNING! (Continued)
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor
bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer immeskin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye diately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or System serviced as well.
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
NOTE:
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s in- • Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
structions for cleaning.
but they will open during air bag deployment.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have de- • After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air
authorized dealer immediately.
bags will not be in place to protect you.
Enhanced Accident Response System

WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags,
(Continued)

In the event of an impact, if the communication network
remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending
on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine
whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform the following functions:

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

• Cut off fuel to the engine.

Air Bag Warning Light

• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or The air bags must be ready to inflate for your protection
in a collision. The Occupant Restraint Controluntil the ignition switch is turned to the “OFF” posiler (ORC) monitors the internal circuits and
tion.
interconnecting wiring associated with air bag
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
system electrical components.
the battery has power or until the ignition switch is
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
turned to the “OFF” position.
the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the
• Unlock the doors automatically.
START or ON/RUN position. If the ignition switch is in
the OFF position or in the ACC position, the air bag
System Reset Procedure
system is not on and the air bags will not inflate.
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System
functions after an event, the ignition switch must be The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
changed from ignition START or ON/RUN to ignition may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
OFF.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the
instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds
for a self-check when the ignition switch is first turned to
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85

the ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag
Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag
Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously. A
single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes on
again after initial startup.

• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.

NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition
the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protecThe ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate tion. Have an authorized dealer service the air bag
the instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunc- system immediately.
tion is detected that could affect the air bag system. The
diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction.
WARNING!
While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance
free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won’t have the air bags
dealer service the air bag system immediately.
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned
the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
first turned to the ON/RUN position.
on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to air bag system immediately.
eight-second interval.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Maintaining Your Air Bag System

WARNING! (Continued)

WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the air bag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or
add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.

• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any
air bag system service. If your seat, including your
trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any
way (including removal or loosening/tightening of
seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your
authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved
seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to
modify the air bag system for persons with disabilities, contact your authorized dealer.

(Continued)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87

These data can help provide a better understanding of
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will the EDR under normal driving conditions and no perassist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems per- sonal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location)
formed. The EDR is designed to record data related to are recorded. However, other parties, such as law envehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of forcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle personally identifying data routinely acquired during a
is designed to record such data as:
crash investigation.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)

• How various systems in your vehicle were operating. To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
were buckled/fastened.
such as law enforcement, that have the special equip• How far (if at all) the driver was pushing the accelera- ment, can read the information if they have access to the
tor and/or brake pedal.
vehicle or the EDR.
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times, including babies and children.

WARNING! (Continued)
great that you could not hold the child, no matter
how strong you are. The child and others could be
badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle
should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.

Every state in the United States, and every Canadian
province, requires that small children ride in proper
restraint systems. This is the law, and you can be prosThere are different sizes and types of restraints for
ecuted for ignoring it.
children from newborn size to the child almost large
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly enough for an adult seat belt. Always check the child seat
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct seat
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in for your child. Carefully read and follow all the instructhe rear seats rather than in the front.
tions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s Manual
and on all the labels attached to the child restraint.

WARNING!

In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to
hold even an infant on your lap could become so

Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has
a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. You should also make sure that you can install
it in the vehicle where you will use it.

(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89

• www.tc.gc.ca/eng/roadsafety/safedriverschildsafety-index-53.htm

NOTE:

• For additional information, refer to www.seatcheck.org
or call 1–866–SEATCHECK (732–8243). Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s website for
additional information:
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age
Infants and Toddlers

Small Children

Children who are two years old or
younger and who have not reached
the height or weight limits of their
child restraint
Children who are at least two years
old or who have out-grown the
height or weight limit of their rearfacing child restraint

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Recommended Type Of Child
Restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child Restraint, facing rearward
in the rear seat of the vehicle
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with
a five-point Harness, facing forward
in the rear seat of the vehicle

90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age
Larger Children

Children Too Large for Child
Restraints

Children who have out-grown their
forward-facing child restraint, but
are too small to properly fit the vehicle’s seat belt
Children 12 years old or younger,
who have out-grown the height or
weight limit of their booster seat

Infants And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing
in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they
reach either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing
child restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used
rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle. It
is recommended for children from birth until they reach the

Recommended Type Of Child
Restraint
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the
vehicle seat belt, seated in the rear
seat of the vehicle
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear
seat of the vehicle

weight or height limit of the infant carrier. Convertible
child seats can be used either rear-facing or forward-facing
in the vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher
weight limit in the rear-facing direction than infant carriers
do, so they can be used rear-facing by children who have
outgrown their infant carrier but are still less than at least
two years old. Children should remain rear-facing until
they reach the highest weight or height allowed by their
convertible child seat.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91

Older Children And Child Restraints

WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.

Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forwardfacing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and
convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children who are over two years old or who
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should
remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for
as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height
allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts
fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over
the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held
in the vehicle by the seat belt.

WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
• After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do
not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward
because it can loosen the child restraint attachments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting
the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has
been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it
loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it
could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause
serious personal injury.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this
simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the
vehicle’s seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of
the vehicle seat?

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 93

2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front
of the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the
way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder
between their neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the seat belt as low as possible,
touching the child’s thighs and not their stomach?

WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt
will not protect a child properly, which may result in
serious injury or death. A child must always wear
both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt
correctly.

5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit
periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.
A child’s squirming or slouching can move the seat belt
out of position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or
neck, move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or
use a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child
correctly.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

94 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type

Combined
Weight of the
Child + Child
Restraint

Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint

Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)

Use any attachment method shown with an “X” Below
LATCH –
Seat Belt Only
LATCH –
Seat Belt + Top
Lower Anchors
Lower Anchors
Tether Anchor
Only
+ Top Tether
Anchor
X
X
X
X

X
X

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 95

Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children (LATCH)
Restraint System

Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system
has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCHequipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages
located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the
seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the
seating position. These anchorages are used to install
LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle’s
seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether
anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating
positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether
anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the
following table for more information.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

96 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In
This Vehicle

•
•

Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per
seating position
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 97

What is the weight limit (child’s weight +
weight of the child restraint) for using the
LATCH anchorage system to attach the child
restraint?

65 lbs (29.5 kg)

Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat
belt be used together to attach a rearfacing or forward-facing child restraint?
Can a child seat be installed in the center
position using the inner LATCH lower anchorages?

Yes

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Use the LATCH anchorage system until
the combined weight of the child and the
child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the
seat belt and tether anchor instead of the
LATCH anchorage system once the combined weight is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Do not use the seat belt when you use the
LATCH anchorage system to attach a rearfacing or forward-facing child restraint.
You can install child restraints with flexible
lower anchors in the center position. The
inner anchorages are 17 inches (440 mm)
apart. Do not install child restraints with
rigid lower anchors in the center position.

98 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Can two child restraints be attached using
a common lower LATCH anchorage?

Can the rear-facing child restraint touch
the back of the front passenger seat?

Yes

Can the head restraints be removed?

Yes

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with
two or more child restraints. If the center
position does not have dedicated LATCH
lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install a child seat in the center position next
to a child seat using the LATCH anchorages in an outboard position.
The child seat may touch the back of the
front passenger seat if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact. See your
child restraint owner’s manual for more
information.
All head restraints may be removed.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 99

Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are
found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback, below the anchorage symbols on the seatback. They are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint.
You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the
gap between the seatback and seat cushion.

LATCH Anchorage Locations

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

100 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Locating The Tether Anchorages
There are tether strap anchorages behind each
rear seating position located in the panel between the rear seatback and the rear window.
They are found under a plastic cover with the
tether anchorage symbol on it.

Tether Strap Anchorages

LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side.
Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower
anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some
rear-facing child restraints will also be equipped with a
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 101

tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end
to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten
the strap after it is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH

WARNING! (Continued)
seat belt for installing child seats in the outboard
positions. Please refer to “Installing The LATCHCompatible Child Restraint System” for typical installation instructions.

Do not install child restraints with rigid lower attachments in the center seating position. Only install this type
of child restraint in the outboard seating positions. Child Always follow the directions of the child restraint manurestraints with flexible, webbing mounted lower attach- facturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child
restraint systems will be installed as described here.
ments can be installed in any rear seating position.
To Install A LATCH - Compatible Child Restraint:

WARNING!

Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
than one child restraint. If you are installing LATCHcompatible child restraints next to each other, you
must use the seat belt for the center position. You can
then use either the LATCH anchors or the vehicle’s

If the selected seating position has a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat
belt, following the instructions below. See the section
“Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt”
to check what type of seat belt each seating position has.

(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

102 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether 5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack
strap of the child seat so that you can more easily attach
in the straps according to the child restraint manufacthe hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages.
turer’s instructions.
2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for
that seating position. For some second row seats, you 6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
may need to recline the seat and / or raise the head
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to
in any direction.
move it to its rear-most position to make room for the
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt:
child seat. You may also move the front seat forward
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a
to allow more room for the child seat.
child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child used by other occupants or being used to secure child
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seat- restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play
ing position.
with it and accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the installing a child restraint using the LATCH system,
top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of
Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for direc- the child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with
the child restraint installation, instead of buckling it
tions to attach a tether anchor.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 103

behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the
child restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock
the seat belt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the
seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with
them.

WARNING!
• Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted
child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to
be used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for
attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle.

Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat
belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be
“switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing
retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will
make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
into the retractor. For additional information on ALR,
refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode” description under “Occupant Restraints.”

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

104 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 105

What is the weight limit (child’s
weight + weight of the child restraint) for using the Tether Anchor
with the seat belt to attach a forward
facing child restraint?
Can the rear-facing child restraint
touch the back of the front passenger seat?

Weight limit of the Child Restraint

Can the head restraints be removed?
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to
tighten the seat belt against the belt
path of the child restraint?

Yes

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Always use the tether anchor when
using the seat belt to install a forward facing child restraint, up to
the recommended weight limit of
the child restraint.
Contact between the front passenger seat and the child restraint is
allowed, if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact.
All head restraints may be removed.
Do not twist the buckle stalk in a
seating position with an ALR retractor.

106 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
the seat belt until you have pulled all the seat belt
webbing out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating
to retract back into the retractor. As the webbing
position. For some second row seats, you may need to
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This means the
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a
seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode.
better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its 6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
locked, you should not be able to pull out any webrear-most position to make room for the child seat.
bing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
You may also move the front seat forward to allow
more room for the child seat.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
to pass it through the seat belt path of the child restraint.
vehicle seat.
Do not twist the belt webbing in the seat belt path.
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a 8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect
“click”.
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 107

strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints
Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to
attach a tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the seat belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.

WARNING! (Continued)
tether strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether
anchorage that is approved for that seating position,
located behind the top of the vehicle seat. See the
section “Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System” for the location of approved tether anchorages in your vehicle.

Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
seat belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether
Anchorage

WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat
to any location in front of the car seat, including the
seat frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

108 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

1. Look behind the seating position where you
plan to install the child restraint to find the
tether anchorage. You may need to move the
seat forward to provide better access to the
tether anchorage. If there is no top tether
anchorage for that seating position, move
the child restraint to another position in the
vehicle if one is available.
2. Rotate or lift the cover to access the anchor directly
behind the seat where you are placing the child restraint.
3. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
Tether Strap Mounting
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If
A — Tether Strap Hook
your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head 1 — Cover
B — Tether Anchor
restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible, 3 — Attaching Strap
route the tether strap under the head restraint and
4. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to
between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head
the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard
side of the head restraint.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 109

5. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child Transporting Pets
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
WARNING!
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to a collision.
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchorage position directly
behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top
tether strap.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove
slack in the strap.

Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS

A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

110 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and should be avoided.

NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
should be considered a normal part of the break-in and
not interpreted as a problem.

The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For
the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to
“Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle”.

SAFETY TIPS

CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil
in the engine or damage may result.

Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.

WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
(Continued)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 111

WARNING! (Continued)

• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.

eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO),
follow these safety tips:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move
your vehicle in or out of the area.
• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/
rear doors open, make sure that all windows are
closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is
set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation
mode.
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling
controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.

Exhaust Gas

WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
(Continued)

The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

112 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Seat Belts

Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat
belt or retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
Air Bag Warning Light
The light should come on and remain on for
four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the
ignition switch is first turned ON. If the light is
not lit during starting, see your authorized
dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes on while
driving, have the system checked by an authorized
dealer.

Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for
cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be Defroster
replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
system.
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 113

feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your
vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area
unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals
or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.

WARNING!
Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of
vehicle control and increase the risk of serious personal injury.
• Always make sure that floor mats are properly
attached to the floor mat fasteners.

WARNING! (Continued)
• Never place or install floor mats or other floor
coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly
secured to prevent them from moving and interfering with the pedals or the ability to control the
vehicle.
• Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top
of already installed floor mats. Additional floor
mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the
pedal area and interfere with the pedals.
• Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always
properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have
been removed for cleaning.

(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

(Continued)

114 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)
• Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the
driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Objects can become trapped under the brake pedal
and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle
control.
• If required, mounting posts must be properly installed, if not equipped from the factory.
Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or
mounting can cause interference with the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of
control of the vehicle.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle

lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires
(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
Door Latches
Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks

Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
Tires
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid (if
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear equipped), or brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects should be located and corrected immediately.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
! MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121

▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped . . .125

▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped . . . .121 ! BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . .122
▫ Rear Cross Path. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
▫ Modes Of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Outside Mirrors Folding Feature —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Outside Mirrors With Turn Signal And Approach
! Uconnect® PHONE (Uconnect® 200)
Lighting — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
▫ Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .124
▫ Uconnect® Phone Features . . . . .
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

. . . . .125
. . . . .132
. . . . .133
. . . . .135

. . . . . . . . .135
. . . . . . . . .137
. . . . . . . . .145
. . . . . . . . .148

116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . .153

▫ Voice Command System Operation . . . . . . . . .205

▫ Things You Should Know About Your
Uconnect® Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155

▫ Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207

▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
! Uconnect® PHONE (8.4/8.4N) . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
▫ Uconnect® 8.4/8.4Nav . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
▫ Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
▫ Uconnect® Phone Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . .192
▫ Things You Should Know About Your
Uconnect® Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192

▫ Voice Training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
! VOICE COMMAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
▫ Uconnect® 8.4/8.4 Nav . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
▫ Uconnect® Voice Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
! SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
▫ Power Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
▫ Manual Front Seat Forward/Rearward
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
▫ Manual Front Seat Recline Adjustment . . . . . .227

▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205

▫ Manual Seat Height Adjustment — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228

! VOICE COMMAND (Uconnect® 200) . . . . . . . .205

▫ Front Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . .228

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117

▫ Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230

▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241

▫ Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232

▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242

! TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD . . . . . . . . .234

▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242

! LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236

▫ Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243

▫ Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236

▫ High/Low Beam Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243

▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped . . . . . . .237

▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243

▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . .238

▫ Front Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243

▫ Headlight Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238
▫ Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239
▫ Daytime Running Lights (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . .240
▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240

▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244
! WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS . . . . . .246
▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247
▫ Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247
▫ Mist Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248
▫ Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

! PARKSENSE® REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258
Automatic Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . .249
▫ Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped . . . . . . . .249

▫ ParkSense® Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258

! TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN . . .251

▫ ParkSense® Warning Display . . . . . . . . . . . . .258

! HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED . .252

▫ ParkSense® Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259

! ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253

▫ Enabling And Disabling ParkSense® . . . . . . . .266

▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254

▫ Service The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266

▫ To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254

▫ Cleaning The ParkSense® System . . . . . . . . . .268

▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255

▫ ParkSense® System Usage Precautions. . . . . . .268

▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255 ! PARKVIEW® REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
! OVERHEAD CONSOLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257
▫ Front Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119

▫ Sunglass Bin Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274

▫ Closing Sunroof — Express. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285

! GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED . . .275

▫ Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . .285

▫ Before You Begin Programming HomeLink® . .276

▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286

▫ Programming A Rolling Code . . . . . . . . . . . . .276

▫ Pinch Protect Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286

▫ Programming A Non-Rolling Code . . . . . . . . .278

▫ Venting Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286

▫ Canadian/Gate Operator Programming . . . . . .280

▫ Sunshade Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286

▫ Using HomeLink® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281

▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286

▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281

▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287

▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282 ! ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283
! CUPHOLDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
! POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .284
▫ Front Seat Cupholders . . . . . . . . .
▫ Opening Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
▫ Rear Seat Cupholders . . . . . . . . .
▫ Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . .285
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

. . . . . . . . .287
. . . . . . . . .291
. . . . . . . . .291
. . . . . . . . .291

120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

! STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
▫ Glove Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
▫ Console Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
▫ Door Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294
▫ Rear Seat Armrest Storage — If Equipped . . . .295

▫ Cargo Area — 60/40 Split-Folding Rear Seat — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295
▫ Ski Pass-Through. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298
! REAR WINDOW FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298
▫ Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298

! CARGO AREA FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121

MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped
A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle. It is
a twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the windshield. The mirror installs on the windshield button with
a counterclockwise rotation and requires no tools for
mounting. The mirror head can be adjusted up, down,
left, and right for various drivers. The mirror should be
adjusted to center on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced
by moving the small control under the mirror to the night
position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror
should be adjusted while the small control under the
mirror is set in the day position (toward the windshield).

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Adjusting Rearview Mirror

122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you. This feature will be defaulted
on, and only be disabled when the vehicle is moving in
reverse.

CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s)
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight
overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror.
NOTE: The passenger side convex outside mirror will
give a much wider view to the rear, and especially of the
lane next to your vehicle.

Automatic Dimming Mirror
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123

Outside Mirrors With Turn Signal And Approach
Lighting — If Equipped

WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side convex mirror could cause you to
collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your
inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a
vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror.

Driver and passenger outside mirrors with turn signal
and puddle lamp contain three LEDs.
Two of the LED’s are used as turn signal indicators,
which flash with the corresponding turn signal lights in
the front and rear of the vehicle. Turning on the Hazard
Warning flashers will also activate these LEDs.

The third LED supplies illuminated entry lighting, which
turns on in both mirrors when you use the Remote
Some models have outside mirrors that are hinged. The Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or open any door. This
hinge allows the mirror to pivot forward and rearward to LED shines downward to illuminate the ground adjacent
resist damage. The hinge has three detent positions: full to the Front and Rear Doors.
forward, full rearward and normal.
The Illuminated Entry lighting fades to off after about 30
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature — If Equipped

seconds or it will fade to off immediately once the
ignition is placed into the RUN position.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: The approach lighting will not function when the The power mirror controls consist of mirror select buttons and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a
shift lever is moved out of the PARK position.
mirror, press either the L (left) or R (right) button to select
Power Mirrors
the mirror that you want to adjust.
The power mirror controls are located on the drivers door
Using the mirror control switch, press on any of the four
trim panel.
arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to
move.
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature can be activated whenever you turn on the
rear window defroster (if equipped). Refer to “Rear
Window Features” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle” for further information.

Power Mirror Control
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125

Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped

Sun Visor “Slide-On Rod” Feature — If Equipped

An illuminated vanity mirror is on each sun visor. To use This feature allows for additional flexibility in positionthe mirror, rotate the sun visor downward and swing the ing the visor to block out the sun.
mirror cover upward. The light will turn on automati1. Fold down the sun visor.
cally. Closing the mirror cover will turn off the light.
2. Unclip the visor from the center clip.
3. Pull the sun visor toward the inside rearview mirror to
extend it.
BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) — IF
EQUIPPED
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two radarbased sensors, located inside the rear bumper fascia, to
detect highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks,
motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the
rear/front/side of the vehicle.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Automatic Transmission Vehicles
The BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in
any forward gear or REVERSE and enters stand-by mode
when the vehicle is in PARK.
Manual Transmission Vehicles
The BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in
any gear and enters stand-by mode when the Park Brake
is engaged, the vehicle is not in REVERSE, and the
vehicle is stationary.
Rear Detection Zones

When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light will
momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors
to let the driver know that the system is operational.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127

both sides of the vehicle when the vehicle speed reaches
approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert
the driver of vehicles in these areas.
NOTE:
• The BSM system does NOT alert the driver about
rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the detection zones.
• The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if
your vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visually
verify the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle
and trailer before making a lane change. If the trailer or
BSM Warning Light
other object (i.e., bicycle, sports equipment) extends
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane
beyond the side of your vehicle, this may result in the
width on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft (3.8 m). The zone
BSM warning light remaining illuminated the entire
length starts at the outside rear view mirror and extends
time the vehicle is in a forward gear.
approximately 10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear bumper of the
vehicle. The BSM system monitors the detection zones on The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are
located must remain free of snow, ice, and dirt/road
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

contamination so that the BSM system can function Entering From The Side
properly. Do not block the area of the rear fascia where
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either
the radar sensors are located with foreign objects (bumside of the vehicle.
per stickers, bicycle racks, etc.).
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the
detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light
located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding an
audible (chime) alert and reducing the radio volume.
Refer to “Modes Of Operation” for further information.
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three
different entry points (side, rear, front) while driving to
see if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an
alert during these types of zone entries.
Side Monitoring

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129

Entering From The Rear

Overtaking Traffic

Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either If you pass another vehicle slowly (with a relative speed
side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative of less than 15 mph (24 km/h) and the vehicle remains in
speed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
the blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning
light will be illuminated. If the difference in speed
between the two vehicles is greater than 15 mph
(24 km/h), the warning light will not illuminate.

Rear Monitoring

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Overtaking/Approaching

Overtaking/Passing

The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are
stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage, traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in
berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert adjacent lanes.
on such objects. This is normal operation and your
vehicle does not require service.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131

Stationary Objects

Opposing Traffic

WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to
help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)
system is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped
with the BSM system, always check your vehicle’s
mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use your turn
signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
Rear Cross Path
The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the
drivers when backing out of parking spaces where their
vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed
slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the
rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will
then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an
oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver.

RCP Detection Zones

RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of
the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of
the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately
3 mph (5 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of
approximately 20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot
situations.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133

NOTE: In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can Modes Of Operation
be obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the Modes Of Operation With Uconnect® System — If
sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the Equipped
system will not be able to alert the driver.
Three selectable modes of operation are available in the
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the Uconnect® system screen. Refer to “Customer Programdriver is alerted using both the visual and audible mable Features — Uconnect® Access settings ” in “Unalarms, including reducing the radio volume.
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

WARNING!

RCP is not a Back Up Aid system. It is intended to be
used to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a
parking lot situation. Drivers must be careful when
backing up, even when using RCP. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and
be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or
death.

Blind Spot Alert Lights Only
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM
system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side
view mirror based on a detected object. However, when
the system is operating in Rear Cross Path mode, the
system will respond with both visual and audible alerts
when a detected object is present. Whenever an audible
alert is requested, the radio volume is reduced.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond with
both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode,
present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio
the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the approvolume is reduced. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored;
priate side view mirror based on a detected object. If the
the RCP state always requests the chime.
turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an
alert present on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime Blind Spot Alert Off
will also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and de- When the BSM system is turned off there will be no
tected object are present on the same side at the same visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP
time, both the visual and audio alerts will be issued. In systems.
addition to the audible alert the radio (if on) volume will
NOTE: The BSM system will store the current operating
be muted.
mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle
NOTE:
is started the previously stored mode will be recalled and
• Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM used.
system, the radio volume is muted.
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime

• If the hazard flashers are on, the system will request
the appropriate visual alert only.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135

General Information

Uconnect® PHONE (Uconnect® 200)

This vehicle has systems that operate on radio frequency
that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) rules and with Industry Canada
Standards RSS- GEN/210/220/310.

Uconnect® Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, invehicle communications system. Uconnect® Phone allows you to dial a phone number with your mobile
phone using simple voice commands (e.g., “Call” $
“Mike” $ “Work” or “Dial” $ “248-555-1212”). Your
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
mobile phone’s audio is transmitted through your vehi1. The device may not cause harmful interference.
cle’s audio system; the system will automatically mute
2. The device must accept any interference received, your radio when using the Uconnect® Phone.
including interference that may cause undesired op- NOTE: The Uconnect® Phone requires a mobile phone
eration of the device.
equipped with the Bluetooth® “Hands-Free Profile”,
Changes or modifications to any of these systems by Version 0.96 or higher. See the Uconnect® website for
other than an authorized service facility could void supported phones.
authorization to use this equipment.

For Uconnect® phone compatibility - visit UconnectPhone.com or call 1–877–855–8400. Canadian Residents – UconnectPhone.com or call, 1-800-465–2001
(English) or 1-800-387-9983 (French).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

system. Only one linked (or paired) mobile phone can be
used with the system at a time. The system is available in
• U.S. residents - visit DriveUconnect.com or call
English, Spanish, or French languages.
1-877-855-8400.
For additional information on Uconnect®:

• Canadian Residents - visit DriveUconnect.ca or call,
1-800-465-2001 (English) or 1-800-387-9983 (French).
Uconnect® Phone allows you to transfer calls between
the system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit
your vehicle and enables you to mute the system’s
microphone for private conversation.

WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following all applicable
laws, including laws regarding phone use. Your attention should be focused on safely operating the
vehicle. Failure to do so may result in a collision
causing serious injury or death.

Uconnect® features Bluetooth® technology - the global
standard that enables different electronic devices to con- Uconnect® Phone Button
nect to each other without wires or a docking station, so
The steering wheel controls will contain the two
Uconnect® Phone works no matter where you stow your
control buttons (Uconnect® Phone
button
mobile phone (be it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as
and Voice Command
button) that will
long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to
enable you to access the system. When you
the vehicle’s Uconnect® Phone. The Uconnect® Phone
push
the
Uconnect® Phone
button you will hear a
allows up to seven mobile phones to be linked to the
BEEP. The beep is your signal to give a command.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137

Voice Command Button

Operation

but- Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect®
When you push the Voice Command
ton you will hear a BEEP. The beep is your Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect® Phone
menu structure. Voice commands are required after most
signal to give a command.
Uconnect® Phone prompts. You will be prompted for a
The Uconnect® Phone can be used with any Hands-Free specific command and then guided through the available
Profile certified Bluetooth® mobile phone. See the options.
Uconnect® website for supported phones. Refer to your
mobile service provider or the phone manufacturer for • Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for the
beep.
details.
The Uconnect® Phone is fully integrated with the vehi- • For certain operations, compound commands can be
used. For example, instead of saying “Setup”, “Device
cle’s audio system. The volume of the Uconnect® Phone
Pairing” and then “Pair a Device”, the following
can be adjusted either from the radio volume control
compound command can be said: “Setup”, “Device
knob or from the steering wheel radio control (right
Pairing” and “Pair a Bluetooth® Device”.
switch), if so equipped.
The radio display will be used for visual prompts from • For each feature explanation in this section, only the
compound form of the voice command is given. You
the Uconnect® Phone such as “Phone” or caller ID.
can also break the commands into parts and say each
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

part of the command when you are asked for it. For
example, you can use the compound form voice command “Phonebook New Entry”, or you can break the
compound form command into two voice commands:
“Phonebook” and “New Entry”. Please remember, the
Uconnect® Phone works best when you talk in a
normal conversational tone, as if speaking to someone
sitting a few feet/meters away from you.
Voice Command Tree
Refer to “Voice Tree” in this section.

To activate the Uconnect® Phone, simply push the
button and follow the audible prompts for directions. Uconnect® Phone sessions begin with a push of
button on the steering wheel.
the
Cancel Command
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say #Cancel# and
you will be returned to the main menu. However, in a
few instances the system will take you back to the
previous menu.
Pair (Link) Uconnect® Phone To A Mobile Phone

Help Command

To begin using your Uconnect® Phone, you must pair
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to your compatible Bluetooth® enabled mobile phone.
know your options at any prompt, say “Help” following
To complete the pairing process, you will need to referthe beep. The Uconnect® Phone will then play some of
ence your mobile phone Owner’s Manual. The
the options.
Uconnect® website may also provide detailed instructions for pairing.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139

NOTE: If other phones are present during the pairing • You will then be asked “Should paired device be set as
Favorite?” If yes this phone will become the highest
process make sure they are switched to off or the
priority. You can pair up to seven mobile phones to
bluetooth is disabled before proceeding.
your Uconnect® Phone. However, at any given time,
The following are general phone to Uconnect® Phone
only one mobile phone can be in use, connected to
pairing instructions:
your Uconnect® System. The priority allows the
Uconnect® Phone to know which mobile phone to use
button to begin.
• Push the Phone
if multiple mobile phones are in the vehicle at the same
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
time.
“Device Pairing”.
• Start paring procedure on device. See device manual
• When prompted, after the beep, say “Pair a Device”
for instructions.
and follow the audible prompts.
• Select Uconnect® on the device and enter the four• For identification purposes, you will be prompted to
digit Personal Identification Number (PIN) displayed
give the Uconnect® Phone a name for your mobile
on radio into your mobile phone.
phone. Each mobile phone that is paired should be
given a unique phone name.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

• The system will prompt you to say the name of the
person you want to call.

Dial By Saying A Number
• Push the Phone

button to begin.

• Push the Phone

button to begin.

• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the person you want to call. For example,
you can say “john doe” or “john doe, mobile,” where
John Doe is a previously stored name entry in the
• The system will prompt you to say the number you
Uconnect® phonebook or downloaded phonebook. To
want to call.
learn how to store a name in the phonebook, refer to
• For example, you can say “234-567-8901.”
“Add Names to Your Uconnect® Phonebook,” in the
phonebook.
• The Uconnect® Phone will confirm the phone number
and then dial. The number will appear in the display
• The Uconnect® system will confirm the name and then
of certain radios.
dial the corresponding phone number, which may
appear in the display of certain radios.
Call By Saying A Name
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Dial.”

• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Call.”
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141

• Depending on the maximum number of entries downloaded, there may be a short delay before the latest
downloaded names can be used. Until then, if availIf equipped and specifically supported by your phone,
able, the previously downloaded phonebook is availUconnect® Phone automatically downloads names (text
able for use.
names) and number entries from your mobile phone’s
phonebook. Specific Bluetooth® Phones with Phone • Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile
Book Access Profile may support this feature. See
phone is accessible.
Uconnect® website for supported phones.
• Only the mobile phone’s phonebook is downloaded.
• To call a name from the Uconnect® Phonebook or
SIM card phonebook is not part of the Mobile phonedownloaded Phonebook, follow the procedure in “Call
book. However, if there is less than 10 contacts in the
by Saying a Name” section.
mobile phone, the SIM contacts may also download.
Phonebook Download — Automatic Phonebook
Transfer From Mobile Phone

• Automatic download and update, if supported, begins • This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or
as soon as the Bluetooth® wireless phone connection is
deleted on the Uconnect® Phone. These can only be
made to the Uconnect® Phone, for example, after you
edited on the mobile phone. The changes are transstart the vehicle.
ferred and updated to Uconnect® Phone on the next
phone connection.
• A maximum of 2,000 entries per phone will be downloaded and updated every time a phone is connected
to the Uconnect® Phone.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Add Names To Your Uconnect® Phonebook

5. When prompted, recite the phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are adding.

NOTE: Adding names to the Uconnect® Phonebook is
After you are finished adding an entry into the phonerecommended when the vehicle is not in motion.
book, you will be given the opportunity to add more
To add names to the Uconnect® phonebook using Voice
phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the
Commands:
main menu.
button to begin.
1. Push the Phone
The Uconnect® Phone will allow you to enter up to 32
2. After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say names in the phonebook with each name having up to
“Phonebook New Entry.”
four associated phone numbers and designations. Each
3. When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use language has a separate 32-name phonebook accessible
only in that language. In addition, if equipped and
of long names helps the Voice Command and it is
recommended. For example, say “Robert Smith” or supported by your phone, Uconnect® Phone automatically downloads your mobile phone’s phonebook.
“Robert” instead of “Bob.”
Edit Uconnect® Phonebook Entries
4. When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g.,
“Home,” “Work,” “Mobile,” or “Other”). This will NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended
allow you to store multiple numbers for each phone- when the vehicle is not in motion. Automatic downbook entry, if desired.
loaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143

mobile and a home number, but you can add “John
Doe’s” work number later using the “Phonebook Edit”
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
feature.
“Phonebook Edit.”
Delete Uconnect® Phonebook Entry
You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook
NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended
entry that you wish to edit.
when the vehicle is not in motion.
Next, choose the number designation (home, work,
To delete a Uconnect® phonebook entry using Voice
mobile, or other) that you wish to edit.
Commands:
When prompted, recite the new phone number for the
button to begin.
1. Push the Phone
phonebook entry that you are editing.

• Push the Phone
•
•
•
•

button to begin.

After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook, 2. After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Phonebook Delete.”
you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in
the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or return
3. After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will
to the main menu.
then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish
to delete. You can either say the name of a phonebook
“Phonebook Edit” can be used to add another phone
entry that you wish to delete or you can say “List
number to a name entry that already exists in the
Names” to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook
phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

from which you choose. To select one of the entries 2. After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
button
from the list, push the Voice Command
“Phonebook List Names.”
while the Uconnect® Phone is playing the desired
• The Uconnect® Phone will play the names of all the
entry and say “Delete.”
phonebook entries, including the downloaded
phonebook entries, if available.
4. After you enter the name, the Uconnect® Phone will
ask you which designation you wish to delete: home, 3. To call one of the names in the list, push the Voice
work, mobile, other, or all. Say the designation you
button during the playing of the
Command
wish to delete.
desired name, and say “Call.”
• Note that only the phonebook entry in the current
NOTE: The user can also exercise “Edit” or “Delete”
language is deleted.
operations at this point.
NOTE: Automatic downloaded phonebook entries can4. The Uconnect® Phone will then prompt you as to the
not be deleted or edited.
number designation you wish to call.
List All Uconnect® Phonebook Names
5. The selected number will be dialed.
To list all Uconnect phonebook names using Voice Command:
1. Push the Phone

button to begin.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145

button to accept the call. To reject the call, push and
button until you hear a single beep,
hold
the Phone
The following features can be accessed through the
indicating
that
the
incoming call was rejected.
Uconnect® Phone if the feature(s) are available on your
cellular service plan. For example, if your cellular service Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call — Call
plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be Currently In Progress
accessed through the Uconnect® Phone. Check with your
If a call is currently in progress and you have another
cellular service provider for the features that you have.
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call — No Call
call waiting that you normally hear when using your
Currently In Progress
mobile phone.
Phone Call Features

When you receive a call on your cellular phone, you will
have the option of Answer, Ignore, or Transfer. The cursor
will begin on Answer. Rotating the scroll knob will move
between the options, pushing Enter will select the current
item. After accepting the call, the options on the screen
will be End, Transfer, Hold, and Mute. The top line will
display the contact, if the contact is not in the phonebook
or the phonebook has not been downloaded the phone
number will be displayed on the screen. Push the Phone

button to place the current call on
• Push the Phone
hold and answer the incoming call.
NOTE: The Uconnect® Phone compatible phones in the
market today do not support rejecting an incoming call
when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can
only answer an incoming call or ignore it.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In
Progress
To make a second call while you are currently on a call,
button and say “Dial” or
push the Voice Command
“Call” followed by the phone number or phonebook
entry you wish to call. The first call will be on hold
while the second call is in progress. To go back to the
first call, refer to “Toggling Between Calls” in this
section. To combine two calls, refer to “Conference
Call” in this section.

Toggling Between Calls
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
button until you hear a single beep,
push the Phone
indicating that the active and hold status of the two
calls have switched. Only one call can be placed on
hold at a time.
Conference Call
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
hold):

button until you hear a
1. Push and hold the Phone
double beep, indicating that the two calls have been
To put a call on hold, push the Phone
button until
joined into one conference call.
you hear a single beep. This indicates that the call is on
hold. To bring the call back from hold, push and hold Three-Way Calling
button until you hear a single beep.
the Phone
To initiate three-way calling, push the Voice Command

Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold

button while a call is in progress, and make a
second phone call, as described under “Making a
Second Call While Current Call is in Progress.” After

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147

the second call has established, push and hold the Redial
button until you hear a double beep, indi- To redial the last number called from your mobile phone
Phone
cating that the two calls have been joined into one using Voice Command:
conference call.
button to begin.
1. Push the Phone
Call Termination
2. After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
To end a call in progress:
“Redial.”
button.
1. Momentarily push the Phone
• The Uconnect® Phone will call the last number that
• Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if there
was dialed from your mobile phone.
is a call on hold, it will become the new active call. If
NOTE: This may not be the last number dialed from the
the active call is terminated by the phone far end, a
Uconnect® Phone.
call on hold may not become active automatically.
This is cell phone-dependent.
2. To bring the call back from hold, push and hold the
button until you hear a single beep.
Phone

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Call Continuation

Uconnect® Phone Features

Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the Language Selection
Uconnect® Phone after the vehicle ignition key has been
To change the language that the Uconnect® Phone is
switched to OFF. Call continuation functionality availusing:
able on the vehicle can be any one of three types:
button to begin.
1. Push the Phone
• After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can
continue on the Uconnect® Phone either until the call 2. After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the language you wish to switch to
ends, or until the vehicle battery condition dictates
English, Espanol, or Francais.
cancellation of the call on the Uconnect® Phone and
transfer of the call to the mobile phone.
3. Continue to follow the system prompts to complete
the language selection.
• After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can
continue on the Uconnect® Phone for a certain duraAfter selecting one of the languages, all prompts and
tion, after which the call is automatically transferred
voice commands will be in that language.
from the Uconnect® Phone to the mobile phone.
NOTE: After every Uconnect® Phone language change
operation, only the language-specific 32-name phonebook is usable. The paired phone name is not languagespecific and is usable across all languages.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149

Emergency Assistance

NOTE:

If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is • The emergency number dialed is based on the country
reachable:
where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S.,
Canada, and Mexico). The number dialed may not be
• Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
applicable with the available mobile service and area.
number for your area.
• If supported, this number may be programmable on
If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect® Phone is
some systems. To do this, push the
button and say
operational, you may reach the emergency number as
“Setup,” followed by “Emergency.”
follows:
• The Uconnect® Phone does slightly lower your
button to begin.
• Push the Phone
chances of successfully making a phone call as com• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
pared to using the mobile phone directly.
“Emergency” and the Uconnect® Phone will instruct
the paired mobile phone to call the emergency number.
This feature is supported in the U.S., Canada, and
Mexico.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE:

WARNING!
To use your Uconnect® Phone System in an emergency, your mobile phone must be:
• turned on,
• paired to the Uconnect® System,
• and have network coverage.
Roadside Assistance
If you need roadside assistance:

• The roadside assistance number dialed is based on the
country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800-521-2779
for the U.S./Canada, 55-14-3454 for Mexico City and
1-800-712-3040 for outside Mexico City in Mexico).
Please refer to the Chrysler Group LLC 24-Hour “Roadside Assistance” coverage details in the Warranty Information Booklet and in the Owner’s Information Manual
on the DVD under “Other References.”

• If supported, this number may be programmable on
button
some systems. To do this, push the Phone
and
say
“Setup,”
followed
by
“Roadside
Assis• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
tance.”
“Roadside Assistance.”
• Push the Phone

button to begin.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151

Paging
To learn how to page, refer to #Working with Automated
Systems.# Paging works properly except for pagers of
certain companies, which time out a little too soon to
work properly with the Uconnect® Phone.
Voice Mail Calling
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to #Working
with Automated Systems.#
Working With Automated Systems

When calling a number with your Uconnect® Phone that
normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequence
on your mobile phone keypad, you can push the Voice
Command
button and say the sequence you wish
to enter, followed by the word “Send”. For example, if
required to enter your PIN followed with a pound, (3
button
7 4 6 #), you can push the Voice Command
and say, “3 7 4 6 # Send”. Saying a number, or
sequence of numbers, followed by “Send”, is also to be
used for navigating through an automated customer
service center menu structure, and to leave a number
on a pager.

This method is used in instances where one generally has
to press numbers on the mobile phone keypad while You can also send stored Uconnect® phonebook entries
navigating through an automated telephone system.
as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager
You can use your Uconnect® Phone to access a voice mail entries. To use this feature, dial the number you wish to
button and
system or an automated service, such as a paging service call and then push the Voice Command
or automated customer service line. Some services re- say, “Send.” The system will prompt you to say the
quire immediate response selection. In some instances, “number.” If you wish to send the name say “Send
that may be too quick for use of the Uconnect® Phone. Name” followed by a valid name from the phonebook.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Uconnect® Phone will then send the corresponding Turning Confirmation Prompts ON/OFF
phone number associated with the phonebook entry, Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system
as tones over the phone.
from confirming your choices (e.g., the Uconnect® Phone
will not repeat a phone number before you dial it).
NOTE:
button to begin.
• You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone 1. Push the Phone
network configurations. This is normal.
2. After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
one of the following:
• Some paging and voice mail systems have system time
out settings that are too short and may not allow the
• “Setup Confirmation Prompts On”
use of this feature.
• “Setup Confirmation Prompts Off”
Barge In — Overriding Prompts
Phone And Network Status Indicators
The “Voice Command” button can be used when you
wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice If available on the radio and/or on a premium display
such as the instrument panel cluster, and supported by
command immediately. For example, if a prompt is
your mobile phone, the Uconnect® Phone will provide
asking “Would you like to pair a phone, clear a...,” you
notification to inform you of your phone and network
button and say,
could push the Voice Command
status when you are attempting to make a phone call
“Pair a Phone” to select that option without having to
using Uconnect® Phone. The status is given for network
listen to the rest of the voice prompt.
signal strength, phone battery strength, etc.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153

Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad

Mute/Un-Mute (Mute ON/OFF)

When you mute the Uconnect® Phone, you will still be
able to hear the conversation coming from the other
party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. To
mute the Uconnect® Phone:

NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the
dial ring to the Uconnect® Phone to play it on the vehicle
audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this situation, after successfully dialing a number the user may feel
that the call did not go through even though the call is in
progress. Once your call is answered, you will hear the
audio.

• Push the Voice Command

button.

• Following the beep, say “Mute.”
To un-mute the Uconnect® Phone:
• Push the Voice Command

button.

• Following the beep, say “Mute off.”
Advanced Phone Connectivity
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone
The Uconnect® Phone allows ongoing calls to be transferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect® Phone
without terminating the call.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

To transfer an ongoing call from your Uconnect® Phone List Paired Mobile Phone Names
paired mobile phone to the Uconnect® Phone or vice
• Push the Phone
button to begin.
versa using Voice Command:
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
button and say
1. Push the Voice Command
“Setup Phone Pairing.”
“Transfer Call.”
• When prompted, say “List Phones.”
Connect Or Disconnect Link Between The
Uconnect® Phone And Mobile Phone
• The Uconnect® Phone will play the phone names of all
paired mobile phones in order from the highest to the
Your mobile phone can be paired with many different
lowest priority. To “Select” or “Delete” a paired phone
electronic devices, but can only be actively “connected”
butbeing announced, push the Voice Command
with one electronic device at a time.
ton and say “Select” or “Delete.” Also, see the next
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth®
two sections for an alternate way to “Select” or
connection between your mobile phone and the
“Delete” a paired phone.
Uconnect® Phone System, follow the instructions described in your mobile phone User’s Manual.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155

Select Another Mobile Phone

Delete Uconnect® Phone Paired Mobile Phones

This feature allows you to select and start using another • Push the Phone
button to begin.
phone paired with the Uconnect® Phone.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
button to begin.
• Push the Phone
“Setup Phone Pairing.”

• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say • At the next prompt, say “Delete” and follow the
“Setup Select Phone” and follow the prompts.
prompts.
button at any time • You can also push the Voice Command
• You can also push the Phone
button at
while the list is being played, and then choose the
any time while the list is being played, and then
phone that you wish to select.
choose the phone you wish to delete.
• The selected phone will be used for the next phone
call. If the selected phone is not available, the
Uconnect® Phone will return to using the highest
priority phone present in or near (approximately
within 30 ft. [9 m]) the vehicle.

Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect®
Phone
Uconnect® Phone Tutorial
To hear a brief tutorial of the system features, push the
button and say “Uconnect® Tutorial.”
Phone

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recogniz- system will adapt to the last trained voice only.
ing their voice commands or numbers, the Uconnect® Reset
Phone Voice Training feature may be used. To enter this
To Reset all settings using Voice Command:
training mode, follow one of the two following procedures:
button.
1. Push the Phone
• From outside the Uconnect® Phone mode (e.g., from
radio mode), push and hold the Voice Command 2. After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
button for five seconds until the session begins,
“Setup,” then “Reset.”
or,
• This will delete all phone pairing, phone book entries, and other settings in all language modes. The
• Push the Voice Command
button and say the
System will prompt you before resetting to factory
“Voice Training,” “System Training,” or “Start Voice
settings.
Training” command.
Voice Training

You can either push the Uconnect® Phone button to restore
the factory setting or repeat the words and phrases when
prompted by the Uconnect® Phone. For best results, the
Voice Training session should be completed when the
vehicle is parked with the engine running, all windows
closed, and the blower fan switched off.

Voice Command
Uconnect® Voice Command Tutorial
To hear a brief tutorial of the Voice Command features,
button and say “Voice
push the Voice Command
Command Tutorial.”

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157

For best performance:

• Fully Closed Windows.

• Adjust the rearview mirror to provide at least ½ inch (1 • Dry Weather Condition.
cm) gap between the overhead console (if equipped)
Even though the system is designed for users speaking in
and the mirror.
North American English, French, and Spanish accents,
• Always wait for the beep before speaking.
the system may not always work for some. When navigating through an automated system such as voice mail,
• Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would
or when sending a page, at the end of speaking the digit
speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from
string, make sure to say “Send.”
you.
NOTE:
• Make sure that no one other than you is speaking
during a Voice Command period.
• Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is in
motion is not recommended.
Performance is maximized under:
• It is not recommended to store similar sounding names
• Low-To-Medium Blower Setting.
in the Uconnect® Phonebook.
• Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed.
Phonebook (Downloaded and Uconnect® Phone Local)
• Low Road Noise.
name recognition rate is optimized when the entries are
not similar. Numbers must be spoken in single digits.
• Smooth Road Surface.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

“800” must be spoken “eight-zero-zero” not “eight hun- •
dred.” You can say “O” (letter “O”) for “0” (zero).
•
Even though international dialing for most number com•
binations is supported, some shortcut dialing number
combinations may not be supported.

Dry Weather Conditions
Operation From The Driver’s Seat
Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness
to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and
not the Uconnect® Phone

In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
• Echo at the phone far end can sometimes be reduced
compromised with the convertible top down.
by lowering the in-vehicle audio volume
Far End Audio Performance
Power-Up
Audio quality is maximized under:
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the
• Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
ON or ACC position, or after a language change, you
must wait at least 15 seconds prior to using the system.
• Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
• Low Road Noise

• Smooth Road Surface

• Fully Closed Windows
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Voice Commands
Primary
zero
one
two
three
four
five
six
seven
eight
nine
star (*)
plus (+)
pound (#)
add location

Alternate (s)

Primary
all
call
cancel
confirmation prompts
continue
delete
dial
download
edit
emergency
English
erase all
Espanol
Francais
help
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Alternate (s)

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163

Primary
home
language
list names
list phones
mobile
mute
mute off
new entry
no
other
pair a phone
phone pairing
phonebook
previous
record again

Alternate (s)

pairing
phone book

Primary
redial
return to main menu
select phone
send
set up
towing assistance
transfer call
Uconnect® Tutorial
voice training
work
yes

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Alternate (s)
return or main menu
select
phone settings or phone
set up

164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Send Messages:

Voice Text Reply

Uconnect® Phone can read or send new messages on You can send messages using Uconnect® Phone, if your
your phone.
mobile phone is supported. To send a new message:
Read Messages:

• Push the Phone

button.

If you receive a new text message while your phone is • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
connected to Uconnect® Phone and your phone is sup“SMS Send” or “Send Message.”
ported, an announcement will be made to notify you that
• You can either say the message you wish to send or say
you have a new text message. If you wish to hear the new
“List Messages.” There are 20 preset messages.
message:
butTo send a message, push the Voice Command
button.
• Push the Phone
ton while the system is listing the message and say
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say “Send.”
“SMS Read” or “Read Messages.”
Uconnect® Phone will prompt you to say the name or
• Uconnect® Phone will play the new text message for number of the person you wish to send the message to.
you.
After reading a message, you can “Reply” or “Forward”
the message using Uconnect® Phone.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165

List of Preset Messages:

11. See You in 15 minutes

1. Yes

12. I am on my way

2. No

13. I’ll be late

3. Where are you?

14. Are you there yet?

4. I need more direction.

15. Where are we meeting?

5. L O L

16. Can this wait?

6. Why

17. Bye for now

7. I love you

18. When can we meet

8. Call me

19. Send number to call

9. Call me later

20. Start without me

10. Thanks

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Turn SMS Incoming Announcement ON/OFF

General Information

Turning the SMS Incoming Announcement OFF will stop This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
the system from announcing the new incoming mes- RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
sages.
• Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
the party responsible for compliance could void the
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
“Setup, SMS Incoming Message Announcement,” you
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
will then be given a choice to change it.
• Push the Phone

button.

• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired opMobile phones have been found to lose connection to the
eration.
Uconnect® Phone. When this happens, the connection
can generally be reestablished by switching the phone
off/on. Your mobile phone is recommended to remain in
Bluetooth® ON mode.
Bluetooth® Communication Link

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167

Uconnect® PHONE (8.4/8.4N)
Uconnect® 8.4/8.4Nav

• Calling Back the last incoming call number (“Call
Back”).

Uconnect® Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, in- • View Call logs on screen (“Show incoming calls,”
“Show Outgoing calls,” “Show missed Calls,” “Show
vehicle communications system. Uconnect® Phone alRecent Calls”).
lows you to dial a phone number with your mobile
phone.
• Searching Contacts phone number (“Search for John
Smith Mobile”).
Uconnect® Phone supports the following features:
Voice Activated Features:

Screen Activated Features

• Hands Free dialing via Voice (“Call John Smith Mo- • Dialing via Keypad using touchscreen.
bile” or, “Dial 248 555 1212”).
• Viewing and Calling contacts from Phonebooks displayed on the touchscreen.
• Hands Free text to speech listening of your incoming
SMS messages.

• Setting Favorite Contact Phone numbers so they are
easily accessible on the Main Phone screen.
• Hands Free text messaging (“Send a message to John
Smith Mobile”).
• Viewing and Calling contacts from Recent Call logs.
• Redialing last dialed numbers (“Redial”).

• Reviewing your recent Incoming SMS.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

• Sending a text message via the touchscreen.

Uconnect® Phone allows you to transfer calls between
the system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit
• Listen to Music on your Bluetooth® Device via the
your vehicle and enables you to mute the system’s
touchscreen.
microphone for private conversation.
• Pairing up to 10 phones/audio devices for easy access
to connect to them quickly.
WARNING!
NOTE: Your phone must be capable of SMS messaging
via Bluetooth® for messaging features to work properly.
Your mobile phone’s audio is transmitted through your
vehicles audio system; the system will automatically
mute your radio when using the Uconnect® Phone. For
Uconnect® customer support, visit the following website:

Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following all applicable
laws, including laws regarding phone use. Your attention should be focused on safely operating the
vehicle. Failure to do so may result in an accident
causing serious injury or death.

The Uconnect® Phone is driven through your
• U.S. residents - visit UconnectPhone.com or call Bluetooth® “Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone.
1-877-855-8400.
Uconnect® features Bluetooth® technology - the global
• Canadian residents - visit UconnectPhone.com or call standard that enables different electronic devices to con1-800-465-2001 (English) or 1-800-387-9983 (French). nect to each other without wires or a docking station, so
Uconnect® Phone works no matter where you stow your
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169

mobile phone (be it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as Uconnect® Voice Command Button
long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to
button
The Uconnect® Voice Command
the vehicle’s Uconnect® Phone. The Uconnect® Phone
is only used for “barge in” and when you are
allows up to ten mobile phones or audio devices to be
already in a call and you want to send Tones
linked to the system. Only one linked (or paired) mobile
or make another call.
phone and one audio device can be used with the system
button is also used to access
at a time. The system is available in English, Spanish, or The Voice Command
the Voice Commands for the Uconnect® Voice ComFrench languages.
mand features if your vehicle is equipped. Please see
Uconnect® Phone Button
the Uconnect® Voice Command section for direction
button.
button is used to on how to use the Voice Command
The Uconnect® Phone
enter the phone mode and make calls, show The Uconnect® Phone is fully integrated with the verecent, incoming, outgoing calls, view hicles audio system. The volume of the Uconnect® Phone
phonebook etc., When you push the button can be adjusted either from the radio volume control
you will hear a BEEP. The beep is your signal to give knob or from the steering wheel radio control (right
a command.
switch), if so equipped.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

• For certain operations, compound commands can be
used. For example, instead of saying “Call” and then
Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect®
“John Smith” and then “mobile”, the following comPhone and to navigate through the Uconnect® Phone
pound command can be said: “Call John Smith momenu structure. Voice commands are required after most
bile.”
Uconnect® Phone prompts. There are two general methods for how Voice Command works:
• For each feature explanation in this section, only the
compound command form of the voice command is
1. Say compound commands like “Call John Smith mogiven. You can also break the commands into parts and
bile.”
say each part of the command when you are asked for
2. Say the individual commands and allow the system to
it. For example, you can use the compound command
guide you to complete the task.
form voice command “Search for John Smith,” or you
can break the compound command form into two
You will be prompted for a specific command and then
voice commands: “Search Contact” and when asked
guided through the available options.
“John Smith.” Please remember, the Uconnect® Phone
• Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for the
works best when you talk in a normal conversational
beep, which follows the “Listen” prompt or another
tone, as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet/
prompt.
meters away from you.
Operation

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171

The system utilizes continuous dialog; when the system
requires more information from the user it will ask a
Your Uconnect® Phone Voice system uses a Natural
question to which the user can respond without pushing
Language Voice Recognition (VR) engine.
button on your steering
the “Voice Command”
Natural speech allows the user to speak commands in wheel.
phrases or complete sentences. The system filters out
Voice Command Tree
certain non-word utterances and sounds such as “ah”
and “eh.” The system handles fill-in words such as “I Refer to “Voice Tree” in this section.
would like to.”
Help Command
The system handles multiple inputs in the same phrase If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to
or sentence such as “make a phone call” and “to Kelly know your options at any prompt, say “Help” following
Smith.” For multiple inputs in the same phrase or sen- the beep.
tence, the system identifies the topic or context and
provides the associated follow-up prompt such as “Who To activate the Uconnect® Phone from idle, simply push
button on your steering wheel and say a
do you want to call?” in the case where a phone call was the Phone
command or say “help.” All Uconnect® Phone sesrequested but the specific name was not recognized.
button on the
sions begin with a push of the Phone
radio control head.
Natural Speech

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

To complete the pairing process, you will need to reference your mobile phone Owner’s Manual. The
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say “Cancel” and
Uconnect® website may also provide detailed instrucyou will be returned to the main menu.
tions for pairing.
or Voice Command
You can also push the Phone
1. Press the “Phone” button on the touchscreen to begin.
button on your steering wheel when the system is
listening for a command and be returned to the main 2. If there is no phone currently connected with the
or previous menu.
system, a pop-up will appear.
Cancel Command

Pair (Link) Uconnect® Phone To A Mobile Phone
To begin using your Uconnect® Phone, you must pair
your compatible Bluetooth® enabled mobile phone.
NOTE:
• You must have Bluetooth® enabled on your mobile
phone to complete this procedure.
• The vehicle must be in PARK.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173

• Press the “Add Device” button on the touchscreen.
• Search for available devices on your Bluetooth®
enabled mobile phone. When prompted on the
phone, enter the name and PIN shown on the
Uconnect® screen.
• See step 4 to complete the process.

4. Uconnect® Phone will display an in progress screen
while the system is connecting.

Mobile Phone Pairing

3. Select “Yes” to begin the pairing process. Then, search
for available devices on your Bluetooth® enabled
mobile phone. When prompted on the phone, enter
the name and PIN shown on the Uconnect® screen.
• If “No” is selected, press the “Settings” button from
the Uconnect® Phone main screen.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Pair Additional Mobile Phones
1. Press the “Settings” button from the Phone main
screen.
2. Press the “Add Device” button on the touchscreen.
3. Search for available devices on your Bluetooth® enabled mobile phone. When prompted on the phone,
enter the name and PIN shown on the Uconnect®
screen.
4. Uconnect® Phone will display an in process screen
while the system is connecting.

Mobile Phone Pairing Progress

5. When the pairing process has successfully completed,
the system will prompt you to choose whether or not
this is your favorite phone. Selecting “Yes” will make
this phone the highest priority. This phone will take
precedence over other paired phones within range.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175

NOTE: For phones which are not made a favorite, the NOTE: If there is no device currently connected with the
phone priority is determined by the order in which it was system, a pop-up will appear.
paired. The latest phone paired will have the higher
5. Search for available devices on your Bluetooth® enpriority.
abled audio device. When prompted on the device,
You can also use the following VR commands to bring up
enter the PIN shown on the Uconnect® screen.
the Paired Phone screen from any screen on the radio:
6. Uconnect® Phone will display an in process screen
• “Show Paired Phones”
while the system is connecting.
• “Connect My Phone”

7. When the pairing process has successfully completed,
the system will prompt you to choose whether or not
Pair A Bluetooth® Streaming Audio Device
this is your favorite device. Selecting “Yes” will make
1. Press the “Player” button on the touchscreen to begin.
this device the highest priority. This device will take
precedence over other paired devices within range.
2. Change the Source to Bluetooth®.
NOTE: For devices which are not made a favorite, the
3. Press the “Bluetooth®” button on the touchscreen to
device priority is determined by the order in which it was
display the Paired Audio Devices screen.
paired. The latest device paired will have the higher
4. Press the “Add Device” button on the touchscreen.
priority.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

You can also use the following VR command to bring up Disconnecting A Phone Or Audio Device
a list of paired audio devices:
1. Press the “Settings” button on the touchscreen.
• “Show Paired Phones”
2. Press the “Paired Phones” or “Paired Audio Devices”
button on the touchscreen.
• “Connect My Phone”
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or
Audio Device After Pairing

3. Press the settings icon button located to the right of the
device name.

Uconnect® Phone will automatically connect to the high- 4. The options pop-up will be displayed.
est priority paired phone and/or Audio Device within
range. If you need to choose a particular phone or Audio 5. Press the “Disconnect Device” button on the touchscreen.
Device follow these steps:
6. Press the “X” to exit out of the Settings screen.
1. Press the “Settings” button on the touchscreen.
2. Press the “Paired Phones” or “Paired Audio Sources” Deleting A Phone Or Audio Device
button on the touchscreen.
1. Press the “Settings” button on the touchscreen.
3. Press to select the particular Phone or the particular 2. Press the “Pair Phones” or “Paired Audio Devices”
Audio Device.
button on the touchscreen.
4. Press the “X” to exit out of the Settings screen.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177

3. Press the settings icon button located to the right of the 6. Press the “X” to exit out of the Settings screen.
device name for a different Phone or Audio Device
Phonebook Download (Automatic Phonebook
than the currently connected device.
Transfer From Mobile Phone) — If Equipped
4. The options pop-up will be displayed.
If equipped and specifically supported by your phone,
5. Press the “Delete Device” button on the touchscreen.
6. Press the “X” to exit out of the Settings screen.
Making A Phone Or Audio Device A Favorite
1. Press the “Settings” button on the touchscreen.

Uconnect® Phone automatically downloads names (text
names) and number entries from the mobile phone’s
phonebook. Specific Bluetooth® Phones with Phone
Book Access Profile may support this feature. See
Uconnect® website, UconnectPhone.com, for supported phones.

2. Press the “Paired Phones” or “Paired Audio Devices” • To call a name from a downloaded mobile phone book,
button on the touchscreen.
follow the procedure in the Voice Recognition Quick
Reference section.
3. Press the settings icon button located to the right of the
device name.
• Automatic download and update of a phone book, if
4. The options pop-up will be displayed.

5. Press the “Make Favorite” button on the touchscreen;
you will see the chosen device move to the top of the list.

supported, begins as soon as the Bluetooth® wireless
phone connection is made to the Uconnect® Phone, for
example, after you start the vehicle.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

• A maximum of 2,000 entries per phone will be down- Managing Your Favorite Phonebook
loaded and updated every time a phone is connected There are three ways you can add an entry to your
to the Uconnect® Phone.
Favorite Phonebook.
• Depending on the maximum number of entries down- 1. During an active call of a number to make a favorite,
loaded, there may be a short delay before the latest
press and hold a favorite button on the top of the
downloaded names can be used. Until then, if availphone main screen.
able, the previously downloaded phonebook is avail2. After loading the mobile phonebook, select Phoneable for use.
book from the Phone main screen, then select the
• Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile
appropriate number. Press the “+” next to the selected
phone is accessible.
number to display the options pop-up. In the pop-up
select “Add to Favorites.”
• This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or
deleted on the Uconnect® Phone. These can only be
edited on the mobile phone. The changes are transferred and updated to Uconnect® Phone on the next
phone connection.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179

record. Select an empty entry and press the “+” on that
selected entry. When the Options pop-up appears,
press “Add from Mobile.” You will then be asked
which contact and number to choose from your mobile phonebook. When complete the new favorite will
be shown.

Phonebook Favorites

NOTE: If the Favorites list is full, you will be asked to
remove an existing favorite.
3. From the Phone main screen, select Phonebook. From
the Phonebook screen, select the “Favorites” button on
the touchscreen and then select the “+” button on the
touchscreen located to the right of the phonebook
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Add From Mobile

180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

To Remove A Favorite
1. To remove a Favorite, select phonebook from the
Phone main screen.
2. Next select Favorites on the left side of the screen and
then press the “+” Options button on the touchscreen.
3. Press the “+” next to the Favorite you would like to
remove.

Remove From Favorites

4. The Options pop-up will display, press “Remove from
Favs.”

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181

Emergency And Towing Assistance
The Emergency and Towing Assistance Favorite numbers
can only be altered. These cannot be deleted and the
names cannot be changed.
To change the Emergency or Towing Assistance numbers
follow these steps.

1. Press the “Phonebook” button from the Phone main
screen.
2. Press the “Favorites” button on the touchscreen. Scroll
to the bottom of the list to locate the Emergency and
Towing Assistance Favorites.

Emergency And Breakdown Assistance

5. The Options pop-up will appear and you can choose
3. Press the “+” Options button on the touchscreen.
between Editing the number or resetting the number
4. Press the “+” next to appropriate Favorite that is to be
to default.
altered.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through the
Uconnect® Phone if the feature(s) are available and
supported by Bluetooth® on your mobile service plan.
For example, if your mobile service plan provides threeway calling, this feature can be accessed through the
Uconnect® Phone. Check with your mobile service provider for the features that you have.
Ways To Initiate A Phone Call

• Mobile Phonebook
• Recent Call Log

• SMS Message Viewer

Dial By Saying A Number
1. Push the Phone

button to begin,

2. After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
say “Dial 151 1234 5555,”

Listed below are all the ways you can initiate a phone call 3. The Uconnect® Phone will dial the number 1511234-5555.
with Uconnect® Phone.
Call By Saying A Phonebook Name
• Redial
• Dial by pressing in the number

1. Push the Phone
begin.

button on your steering wheel to

• Voice Commands (Dial by Saying a Name, Call by
2. After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
Saying a Phonebook Name, Redial or Call Back)
say “Call John Doe Mobile.”
• Favorites
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183

3. The Uconnect® Phone will dial the number associated Touch-Tone Number Entry
with John Doe, or if there are multiple numbers it will
1. Press the “Phone” button on the touchscreen.
ask which number you want to call for John Doe.
2. Press the “Dial” button on the touchscreen.
Call Controls
The touchscreen allows you to control the following call 3. The Touch-Tone screen will be displayed.
features:

• Answer
• End

• Ignore

• Hold/unhold

• Mute/unmute

4. Use the numbered buttons on the touchscreens to
enter the number and press “Call.”
To send a touch-tone using Voice Recognition (VR), push
button on your steering wheel while in
the “VR”
a call and say “Send 1234#” or you can say “Send
Voicemail Password” if Voicemail password is stored
in your mobile phonebook.

• Transfer the call to/from the phone
• Swap two active calls

• Join two active calls together
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

• Missed Calls

Recent Calls

You may browse up to 34 of the most recent of each of the • All Calls
following call types:
These can be accessed by pressing the “recent calls”
button on the touchscreen on the Phone main screen.
button and say “Show
You can also push the Phone
my incoming calls” from any screen and the Incoming
calls will be displayed.
You can also push the Phone
button and say “Show
my recent calls” from any screen and the All calls
screen will be displayed.
NOTE: Incoming can also be replaced with “Outgoing,”
“Recent” or “Missed.”
Recent Calls

• Incoming Calls

• Outgoing Calls
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185

NOTE: The Uconnect® Phone compatible phones in the
market today do not support rejecting an incoming call
When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can
Uconnect® Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio sys- only answer an incoming call or ignore it.
button on the steering wheel Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In
tem. Push the “Phone”
to accept the call. You can also press the “answer” Progress
button on the touchscreen or press the caller ID box.
You can place a call on hold by pressing the “Hold”
button on the Phone main screen, then dial a number
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — Call
from the dialpad, recent calls, SMS Inbox or from the
Currently In Progress
If a call is currently in progress and you have another phonebooks. To go back to the first call, refer to “Toggling
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for Between Calls” in this section. To combine two calls, refer
call waiting that you normally hear when using your to “Join Calls” in this section.
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — No Call
Currently In Progress

button on the Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold
mobile phone. Push the “Phone”
steering wheel, or press the “answer” button on the
During an active call, press the “Hold” button on the
touchscreen, or caller ID box, to place the current call
Phone main screen.
on hold and answer the incoming call.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Redial

Toggling Between Calls

If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold), Press the “Redial” button on the touchscreen, or push the
and after the “Listening” prompt
press the “Swap” button on the Phone main screen. Only “Phone” button
and the following beep, say “Redial.”
one call can be placed on hold at a time.
button to toggle The Uconnect® Phone will call the last number that was
You can also push the “Phone”
between the active and held phone call.
dialed from your mobile phone.
Call Continuation

Join Calls

When two calls are in progress (one active and one on Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the
hold), press the “Join Calls” button on the Phone main Uconnect® Phone after the vehicle ignition key has been
screen to combine all calls into a Conference Call.
switched to OFF.
Call Termination
To end a call in progress, momentarily push the “Phone”
button or press the “end” button on the touchscreen. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if
there is a call on hold, it will become the new active
call.

NOTE: The call will remain within the vehicle audio
system until the phone becomes out of range for the
Bluetooth® connection. It is recommended to press the
“transfer” button on the touchscreen when leaving the
vehicle.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187

Uconnect® Phone Features

NOTE:

Emergency Assistance

• The Emergency call may also be initiated by using the
touchscreen.

If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is
reachable:
• The emergency number dialed is based on the country
where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S. and
• Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may not
number for your area.
be applicable with the available mobile service and area.
If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect® Phone is
• The Uconnect® Phone does slightly lower your
operational, you may reach the emergency number as
chances of successfully making a phone call as to that
follows:
for the mobile phone directly.
button to begin.
1. Push the Phone
2. After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
say “Dial Emergency” and the Uconnect® Phone will
instruct the paired mobile phone to call the emergency
number. This feature is supported in the U.S., Canada,
and Mexico.

WARNING!
Your phone must be turned on and connected to the
Uconnect® Phone to allow use of this vehicle feature
in emergency situations, when the mobile phone has
network coverage and stays connected to the
Uconnect® Phone.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Roadside Assistance/Towing Assistance

Working With Automated Systems

If you need roadside/towing assistance:

This method is used in instances where one generally has
to push numbers on the mobile phone keypad while
navigating through an automated telephone system.

1. Push the Phone

button to begin.

2. After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
You can use your Uconnect® Phone to access a voice mail
say “Roadside Assistance” or say “Towing Assissystem or an automated service, such as a paging service
tance.”
or automated customer service line. Some services reNOTE: The roadside/towing assistance number dialed is quire immediate response selection. In some instances,
based on the country where the vehicle is purchased that may be too quick for use of the Uconnect® Phone.
(1-800-521-2779 for the U.S./Canada, 55-14-3454 for
When calling a number with your Uconnect® Phone that
Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for outside Mexico City
normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequence
in Mexico). Please refer to the Chrysler Group LLC
on your mobile phone keypad, you can utilize the
24-Hour “Roadside Assistance” coverage details in the
button
touchscreen or push the Voice Command
Warranty Information Booklet and in the Owner’s Inforand say the word “Send” then the sequence you wish
mation Manual on the DVD under “Other References.”
to enter. For example, if required to enter your PIN
Voice Mail Calling
followed with a pound, (3 7 4 6 #), you can push the
button and say, “Send 3 7 4 6 #.”
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to “Working Voice Command
Saying
“Send”
followed
by a number, or sequence of
with Automated Systems.”
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189

numbers, is also to be used for navigating through an NOTE:
automated customer service center menu structure,
• The first number encountered for that contact will be
and to leave a number on a pager.
sent. All other numbers entered for that contact will be
You can also send stored mobile phonebook entries as
ignored.
tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager
• You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone
entries. For example, if you previously created a Phonenetwork configurations. This is normal.
book entry with First and/or Last Name as “Voicemail
Password”, then if you push the Voice Command • Some paging and voice mail systems have system time
button and say “Send Voicemail Password” the
out settings that are too short and may not allow the
Uconnect® Phone will then send the corresponding
use of this feature.
phone number associated with the phonebook entry,
• Pauses, wait or other characters that are supported by
as tones over the phone.
some phones are not supported over Bluetooth®.
These additional symbols will be ignored in the dialing
a numbered sequence.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Barge In — Overriding Prompts
The Voice Command
button can be used when
you wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice
command immediately. For example, if a prompt is
asking “There are two numbers with the name John.
Say the full name” you could push the Voice Combutton and say, “John Smith” to select that
mand
option without having to listen to the rest of the voice
prompt.

2. Press the “Display” button on the touchscreen, then
scroll down to Voice Response Length.
3. Select either “Brief” or “Detailed” by pressing the box
next to the selection. A check-mark will appear to
indicate your selection.
Phone And Network Status Indicators

Uconnect® Phone will provide notification to inform you
of your phone and network status when you are attempting to make a phone call using Uconnect® Phone. The
Voice Response Length
status is given for network signal strength and phone
It is possible for you to choose between Brief and battery strength.
Detailed Voice Response Length.
1. Press the “More” button on the touchscreen (where
available), then press the “Settings” button on the
touchscreen.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191

Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad

WARNING!
Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, accident and injury. It is strongly recommended that you use extreme caution when using
any device or feature that may take your focus off the
road or your hands off the steering wheel. Your
primary responsibility is the safe operation of your
vehicle. We recommend against the use of any handheld device while driving, encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible and that you
become aware of applicable laws that may affect the
use of electronic devices while driving.

You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone
keypad and still use the Uconnect® Phone (while dialing
via the mobile phone keypad, the user must exercise
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By
dialing a number with your connected Bluetooth® mobile phone, the audio will be played through your
vehicle’s audio system. The Uconnect® Phone will work
the same as if you dial the number using voice a
command.
NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the
dial ring to the Uconnect® Phone to play it on the vehicle
audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this situation, after successfully dialing a number the user may feel
that the call did not go through even though the call is in
progress. Once your call is answered, you will hear the
audio.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Mute/Un-Mute (Mute ON/OFF)

Connect Or Disconnect Link Between The
When you mute the Uconnect® Phone, you will still be Uconnect® Phone And Mobile Phone
able to hear the conversation coming from the other If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth®
party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. To connection between a Uconnect® Phone paired mobile
mute the Uconnect® Phone simply press the “Mute” phone and the Uconnect® Phone, follow the instructions
described in your mobile phone User’s Manual.
button on the Phone main screen.
Advanced Phone Connectivity
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone

Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect®
Phone

The Uconnect® Phone allows ongoing calls to be trans- Voice Command
ferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect® Phone For the best performance:
without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call
• Adjust the rearview mirror to provide at least ½ inch
from your connected mobile phone to the Uconnect®
(1 cm) gap between the overhead console (if equipped)
Phone or vice versa, press the “Transfer” button on the
and the mirror.
Phone main screen.
• Always wait for the beep before speaking.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193

• Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would Even though the system is designed for many languages
speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from and accents, the system may not always work for some.
you.
When navigating through an automated system such as
voice mail, or when sending a page, before speaking the
• Ensure that no one other than you is speaking during
digit string, make sure to say “Send.”
a voice command period.
NOTE: It is recommended that you do not store names in
Performance is maximized under:
your favorites phonebook while the vehicle is in motion.
• Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
Phonebook (Mobile and Favorites) name recognition rate
• Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
is optimized when the entries are not similar. You can say
“O” (letter “O”) for “0” (zero).
• Low Road Noise
Even though international dialing for most number com• Smooth Road Surface
binations is supported, some shortcut dialing number
• Fully Closed Windows
combinations may not be supported.
• Dry Weather Condition

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Audio quality is maximized under:

Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced by
lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.

• Low-To-Medium Blower Setting

In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
compromised with the convertible top down.

Far End Audio Performance

• Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed

Voice Text Reply

• Low Road Noise

Uconnect® Phone can read or send new messages on
your phone.

• Smooth Road Surface

• Fully Closed Windows

• Dry Weather Conditions

• Operation From The Driver’s Seat

Performance such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness to
a large degree rely on the phone and network, and not
the Uconnect® Phone.

Your phone must support SMS over Bluetooth® to use
this feature. If the Uconnect® Phone determines your
phone is not compatible with SMS messaging over
Bluetooth® the “Messaging” button will be grayed out
and the feature will not be available for use.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195

Read Messages:
If you receive a new text message while your phone is
connected to Uconnect® Phone, an announcement will
be made to notify you that you have a new text message.

Voice Text List

NOTE: Uconnect® Phone SMS is only available when the
vehicle is not moving.
Voice Text Reply

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Once a message is received and viewed or listened to,
you will have the following options:
• Send a Reply
• Forward
• Call

Send Messages Using Buttons On The Touchscreen:
You can send messages using Uconnect® Phone. To send
a new message:
1. Press the “Phone” button on the touchscreen.
2. Press the “messaging” button on the touchscreen then
“New Message.”
3. Press one of the 18 preset messages and the person
you wish to send the message to.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197

Send Messages Using Voice Commands:
1. Push the Phone

button.

2. After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
say “Send message to John Smith mobile.”
3. After the system prompts you for what message you
want to send, say the message you wish to send or say
“List.” There are 18 preset messages.
While the list of defined messages are being read, you can
interrupt the system by pushing the Voice Command
button and saying the message you want to send.

Preset Message List

4. If multiple numbers are available for the contact select
which number you would like to have the message
sent.
5. Press “Send” or “Cancel.”

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

After the system confirms that you want to send your List of Preset Messages:
message to John Smith, your message will be sent.
1. Yes.
2. No.
3. Okay.
4. I can’t talk right now.
5. Call me.
6. I’ll call you later.
7. I’m on my way.
8. Thanks.
Preset Message List

9. I’ll be late.
10. I will be minutes late.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199

11. See you in minutes.

Bluetooth® Communication Link

12. Stuck in traffic.

Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the
Uconnect® Phone. When this happens, the connection
can generally be re-established by switching the mobile
phone OFF/ON. Your mobile phone is recommended to
remain in Bluetooth® ON mode.

13. Start without me.
14. Where are you?
15. Are you there yet?
16. I need directions.
17. I’m lost.
18. See you later.

Power-Up
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the
ON or ACC position, or after a language change, you
must wait at least 15 seconds prior to using the system.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Voice Tree

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201

6. Send dial tones for automated systems is available
while a call is active. This is an example that uses a
You can replace “John Smith” with any name in your
Phonebook Record named “Voicemail Password.”
mobile or favorite phone book. You can also say “Send
a message to John Smith” and the system will ask you 7. Storing Dial tones in contact names is possible but
only the first number encountered in a contact name
which phone number you want to send a message to
will be sent. For example if there is a number stored in
for John Smith.
the Home and Work numbers for the contact “VoiceYou can replace “Mobile” with “Home,” “Work” or
mail password” only the Home number will be sent.
“Other.”
8. If your phone does not support phonebook download
You can replace “Incoming Calls” with “Outgoing
or call log download over Bluetooth® then these
Calls” or “Missed Calls.”
commands will return a response that the contact does
not exist in the phonebook.
You can replace “248 555 1212” with any phone
number supported by your Mobile phone.
9. Emergency and Towing assistance are contacts that have

NOTE:
1.

2.
3.
4.

been pre-loaded in the phonebook. Commands such as
5. These commands can be used during a phone call after
“Call Emergency” and “Call Towing Assistance” will call
pushing the Uconnect® Voice Command button on
the corresponding number stored with those contacts.
the steering wheel. Please note the call will be muted
while the VR session is active.
NOTE: Available Voice Commands are shown in bold
face and underlined in the gray shaded boxes.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203

5. You can replace “248 555 1212” with any phone
number supported by your Mobile phone.

NOTE:

1. You can replace “John Smith” with any name in your
mobile or favorite phone book. You can also say “Send 6. You can replace “4” with any message number shown
a message to John Smith” and the system will ask you
on the screen.
which phone number you want to send a message to
7. If your phone does not support phonebook download
for John Smith.
or call log download over Bluetooth® then these
2. You can replace “Mobile” with “Home,” “Work” or
commands will return a response that the contact does
“Other.”
not exist in the phonebook.
3. You can replace “Incoming Calls” with “Outgoing
Calls” or “Missed Calls.”
4. Messaging commands only work if the Uconnect®
system is equipped with this feature and the mobile
phone supports messaging over Bluetooth®.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205

NOTE: Available Voice Commands are shown in bold VOICE COMMAND (Uconnect® 200)
face and underlined in the gray shaded boxes.
Voice Command System Operation
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:

This Voice Command system allows you to
control your AM, FM radio, satellite radio, disc
player, and a memo recorder.

• Changes or modifications not expressly approved by NOTE: Take care to speak into the Voice Interface Systhe party responsible for compliance could void the tem as calmly and normally as possible. The ability of the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Voice Interface System to recognize user voice commands
may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a raised
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
voice level.
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired opWARNING!
eration.
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following all applicable
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)
laws, including laws regarding phone use. Your attention should be focused on safely operating the
vehicle. Failure to do so may result in a collision
causing serious injury or death.

system will be interrupted, and after the beep, you can
add or change commands. This will become helpful
once you start to learn the options.
NOTE: At any time, you can say the words “Cancel”,
“Help” or “Main Menu”.

These commands are universal and can be used from any
button, you
When you push the Voice Command
menu. All other commands can be used depending upon
will hear a beep. The beep is your signal to give a
the active application.
command.
When using this system, you should speak clearly and at
NOTE: If you do not say a command within a few a normal speaking volume.
seconds, the system will present you with a list of
The system will best recognize your speech if the winoptions.
dows are closed, and the heater/air conditioning fan is
To interrupt the system while it lists options, push the set to low.
button, listen for the beep, and
Voice Command
At any point, if the system does not recognize one of your
say your command.
commands, you will be prompted to repeat it.
Pushing the Voice Command
button while the
system is speaking is known as “barging in.” The To hear the first available Menu, push the Voice Combutton and say “Help” or “Main Menu”.
mand
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207

Commands

Main Menu

The Voice Command system understands two types of Start a dialogue by pushing the Voice Command
button. You may say “Main Menu” to switch to
commands, Universal commands and Local commands.
Universal commands are available at all times. Local the main menu.
commands are available if the supported radio mode is
In this mode, you can say the following commands:
active.
• “Radio AM” (to switch to the radio AM mode)
Changing The Volume
• “Radio FM” (to switch to radio FM mode)
1. Start a dialogue by pushing the Voice Command
button.
• “Sat” (to switch to Satellite radio mode)
2. Say a command (e.g., “Help”).

• “Disc” (to switch to the disc mode)

3. Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the • “USB” (to switch to USB mode)
volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Com• “Bluetooth Streaming” (to switch to Bluetooth®
mand system is speaking. Please note the volume
Streaming mode)
setting for Voice Command is different than the audio
system.
• “Memo” (to switch to the memo recorder)
• “System Setup” (to switch to system setup)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Radio AM

• “Menu Radio” (to switch to the radio menu)

To switch to the AM band, say “AM” or “Radio AM.” In • “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
this mode, you may say the following commands:
Satellite Radio
• “Frequency #” (to change the frequency)
To switch to satellite radio mode, say “Sat” or “Satellite
Radio.” In this mode, you may say the following com• “Next Station” (to select the next station)
mands:
• “Previous Station” (to select the previous station)
• “Channel Number” (to change the channel by its
• “Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu)
spoken number)
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
• “Next Channel” (to select the next channel)
Radio FM
• “Previous Channel” (to select the previous channel)
To switch to the FM band, say “FM” or “Radio FM.” In
• “List Channel” (to hear a list of available channels)
this mode, you may say the following commands:
• “Select Name” (to say the name of a channel)
• “Frequency #” (to change the frequency)
• “Next Station” (to select the next station)

• “Previous Station” (to select the previous station)

• “Menu Radio” (to switch to the radio menu)
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209

• “Previous Track” (to play the previous track)

Disc Mode

To switch to the disc mode, say “Disc.” In this mode, you • “Play” (to play an Artist Name, Playlist Name, Album
may say the following commands:
Name, Track Name, etc.)
• “Track” (#) (to change the track)

Bluetooth® Streaming (BT) Mode
To switch to Bluetooth® Streaming (BT) mode, say
“Bluetooth Streaming.” In this mode, you may say the
following commands:

• “Next Track” (to play the next track)

• “Previous Track” (to play the previous track)
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)

• “Play” (to play the current track)

USB Mode

To switch to USB mode, say “USB.” In this mode, you
may say the following commands:
• “Next Track” (to play the next track)

• “Pause” (to pause the current track)

• “Next Track” (to play the next track)

• “Previous Track” (to play the previous track)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Memo Mode

– “Previous” (to play the previous memo)

To switch to the voice recorder mode, say “Memo.” In
this mode, you may say the following commands:

– “Delete” (to delete a memo)

– “Delete All” (to delete all memos)
• “New Memo” (to record a new memo) — During the Setup
recording, you may push the Voice Command
button to stop recording. You proceed by say- To switch to system setup, you may say one of the
following:
ing one of the following commands:
• “Change to setup”
– “Save” (to save the memo)
– “Continue” (to continue recording)
– “Delete” (to delete the recording)

• “Switch to system setup”
• “Main menu setup”

• “Play Memos” (to play previously recorded memos) — • “Switch to setup”
During the playback you may push the Voice Com- In this mode, you may say the following commands:
button to stop playing memos. You promand
• “Language English”
ceed by saying one of the following commands:
– “Repeat” (to repeat a memo)
– “Next” (to play the next memo)

• “Language French”

• “Language Spanish”
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211

parked, engine running, all windows closed, and the
blower fan switched off. This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The system will adapt to the
last trained voice only.

• “Tutorial”

• “Voice Training”

NOTE: Keep in mind that you have to push the Voice
button first and wait for the beep
Command
VOICE COMMAND
before speaking the “Barge In” commands.

Uconnect® 8.4/8.4 Nav

Voice Training
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recognizing their voice commands or numbers the Uconnect®
Voice “Voice Training” feature may be used.

The Uconnect® Voice Command system allows
you to control your AM, FM radio, satellite
radio, disc player, USB/iPod® and SiriusXM
Travel Link.

button, say “System
1. Push the Voice Command
Setup” and once you are in that menu then say
“Voice Training.” This will train your own voice to NOTE: Take care to speak into the Voice Command
system as calmly and normally as possible. The ability of
the system and will improve recognition.
the Voice Command system to recognize user voice
2. Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by commands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking
Uconnect® Voice. For best results, the “Voice Training” or a raised voice level.
session should be completed when the vehicle is
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

what can be said based on the context you are in. After
three consecutive failures of a spoken command the VR
session will end.
Pushing the Uconnect® Voice Command
button
while the system is speaking is known as “barging in.”
The system will be interrupted, and after the beep, you
can say a command. This will become helpful once you
start to learn the options.

NOTE: At any time, you can say the words “Cancel” or
When you push the Uconnect® Voice Command
button, you will hear a beep. The beep is your signal “Help.”
to give a command.
These commands are universal and can be used from any
If no command is spoken the system will say one of two menu. All other commands can be used depending upon
the active application.
responses:
When using this system, you should speak clearly and at
• I didn’t understand
a normal speaking volume.
• I didn’t get that, etc.
The system will best recognize your speech if the winIf a command is not spoken a second time, the system dows are closed, and the heater/air conditioning fan is
will respond with an error and give some direction as set to low.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213

At any point, if the system does not recognize one of your 3. Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the
volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Comcommands, you will be prompted to repeat it.
mand system is speaking. Please note the volume
To hear available commands, push the Uconnect® Voice
setting for Voice Command is different than the audio
button and say “Help.” You will hear
Command
system.
available commands for the screen displayed.
Starting Voice Recognition (VR) Session In
Uconnect® Voice Commands
Radio/Player Modes
The Uconnect® Voice Command system understands
two types of commands. Universal commands are avail- In this mode, you can say the following commands:
able at all times. Local commands are available if the NOTE: The commands can be said on any screen when
supported radio mode is active.
a call is not active after pushing the Uconnect® Voice
button.
Start a dialogue by pushing the Uconnect® Voice Com- Command
mand

button.

Source

Changing The Volume

To switch to the audio source, say “Change source to
1. Start a dialogue by pushing the Voice Command Disc” for example. This command can be given in any
mode or screen:
button.
• “Track” (#) (to change the track)
2. Say a command (e.g., “Help”).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

214 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Voice Tree

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 215

NOTE:
• You can replace “950 AM” with any other AM or FM
frequency, such as “98.7 FM.”
• You can replace “80’s on 8” with any other satellite
station name received by the radio.
• You can replace “8” with any other satellite channel
number received by the radio.
• You can replace “rock” with any of the satellite music
types.
NOTE: Available Voice Commands are shown in bold
face and shaded grey.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

216 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 217

NOTE:
• You can replace the album, artist, song, genre, playlist,
podcast and audio book names with any corresponding names on the current device that is playing.
• You can replace “8” with any track on the CD that is
currently playing. Command is only available when
CD is playing.
• Playlist, Podcast and audio book commands are only
available when the iPod® is connected and playing.
• VR commands, Albums, Artists, and Genre names are
based on the music metadata contained on the loaded/
connected device.
NOTE: Available Voice Commands are shown in bold
face and shaded grey.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

218 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 219

NOTE:
• You can replace “NFL” with any league shown on the
sports league screen. For example you can say “Show
MLB headlines” or “Show PGA headlines.”
• You can replace “Headlines” with any menu items
shown on a league screen. For example you can say
“Show NFL Schedule and results” or “Show NCAA
Basketball AP top 25” or “Show Major League Baseball
Teams.”
• You can also say “Show Current Weather” or “Show
extended weather” or “Show five day forecast” or
“Show ski info” to get other forecasts.
NOTE: Available Voice Commands are shown in bold
face and shaded grey.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

220 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 221

NOTE:
• Only available with Navigation equipped vehicles.

• You can replace “Player” with “Radio,” “Navigation,”
“Phone,” “Climate,” “More” or “Settings.”
• Navigation commands only work if equipped with
Navigation.
NOTE: Available Voice Commands are shown in bold
face and shaded grey.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

222 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 223

NOTE:

SEATS

• You can also say “Find City,” “Find Favorite,” “Find Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
Play by Category,” “Find Play by Name,” “Find Re- vehicle.
cently Found,” “Where to?” or “Go Home.”
• You can say “Find Nearest” then “Restaurant,” “Fuel,”
“Transit,” “Lodging,” “Shopping,” “Bank,” “Entertainment,” “Recreation,” “Attractions,” “Community,”
“Auto Services,” “Hospitals,” “Parking,” “Airport,”
“Police Stations,” “Fire Stations,” or “Auto Dealers.”
NOTE: Available Voice Commands are shown in bold
face and shaded grey.

WARNING!

• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

224 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Power Seats — If Equipped

Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward

Some models may be equipped with a power driver’s
seat. The power seat switch is located on the outboard
side of the seat near the floor. Use the switch to move the
seat up, down, forward or rearward.

The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.
Push the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position has been reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position is reached.
Reclining The Seatback Forward Or Rearward
The seatback can be reclined both forward and rearward.
Push the seat recliner switch forward or rearward, the
seatback will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position has been reached.

Power Seat Switch
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 225

Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats
may be equipped with power lumbar. The power lumbar
switch is located on the outboard side of the power seat.
Push the switch forward or rearward to increase or
decrease the lumbar support. Push the switch upward or
downward to raise or lower the lumbar support.

Power Seat Recliner Switch

WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

226 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Manual Front Seat Forward/Rearward Adjustment
On models equipped with manual seats, the adjusting
bar is located at the front of the seats, near the floor.

Power Lumbar Switch

Front Seat Adjustment

While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar and move the
seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once you have
reached the desired position. Then, using body pressure,
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 227

move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that
the seat adjusters have latched.

WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.

Recline Lever

WARNING!

Manual Front Seat Recline Adjustment
To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on the
outboard side of the seat, lean back to the desired
position and release the lever. To return the seatback, lift
the lever, lean forward and release the lever.

Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

228 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Manual Seat Height Adjustment — If Equipped

Front Heated Seats — If Equipped

The driver’s seat height can be raised or lowered by The front heated seats control buttons are located within
using a lever, located on the outboard side of the seat. the Uconnect® system. You can gain access to the control
Pull upward on the lever to raise the seat height or push buttons through the climate screen or the controls screen.
downward on the lever to lower the seat height.
once to turn the High
• Press the heated seat button
setting ON.

Seat Height Adjustment

• Press the heated seat button
the Low setting ON.

a second time to turn

• Press the heated seat button
the heating elements OFF.

a third time to turn

If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will automatically switch to LO-level after approximately 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the display
will change from HI to LO, indicating the change. The
LO-level setting will turn OFF automatically after approximately 45 minutes.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 229

NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated seats
to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
heated seats can be programed to come on during a
remote start.
This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect®
system. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting
in a seat that has been overheated could cause
serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

230 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Head Restraints

Reactive Head Restraints — Front Seats

Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury
by restricting head movement in the event of a rear
impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top
of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear.

The front driver and passenger seats are equipped with
Reactive Head Restraints (RHR). In the event of a rear
impact the RHRs will automatically extend forward
minimizing the gap between the back of the occupants
head and the RHR.

WARNING!
The head restraints for all occupants must be properly installed and adjusted prior to operating the
vehicle or occupying a seat. Head restraints should
never be adjusted while the vehicle is in motion.
Driving a vehicle with the head restraints improperly
adjusted or removed could cause serious injury or
death in the event of a collision.

The RHRs will automatically return to their normal
position following a rear impact. If the RHRs do not
return to their normal position see your authorized
dealer immediately.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the release
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
downward on the head restraint.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 231

WARNING!
Do not place items over the top of the Reactive Head
Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable DVD
players. These items may interfere with the operation
of the Reactive Head Restraint in the event of a
collision and could result in serious injury or death.
Rear Head Restraints
The rear outboard head restraints have three positions
UP, MID and DOWN. The center head restraint has only
two positions, Up and Down. When the center seat is
Release Button
being occupied the head restraint should be in the raised
NOTE: The head restraints should only be removed by position. When there are no occupants in the center seat
qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If either the head restraint can be lowered for maximum visibility
of the head restraints require removal, see your autho- for the driver.
rized dealer.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

232 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the push
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
downward on the head restraint.

Folding Rear Seat
The rear seatbacks can be folded forward to provide an
additional storage area. To fold the rear seatback, pull on
the loops located on the upper seatback.
NOTE: The upper seatback loops can be tucked away
when not in use.

Push Button

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 233

Rear Seatback Loops

Folded Rear Seatback

After releasing the seatback, it can be folded forward.

When the seatback is folded to the upright position, make
sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the
seatback above the seat strap.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

234 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!
• Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position, the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury.
• The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the
rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down
position) should not be used as a play area by
children when the vehicle is in motion. They could
be seriously injured in a collision. Children should
be seated and using the proper restraint system.
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
Two latches must be released to open the hood.

Hood Release Lever

2. Move to the outside of the vehicle and push the safety
catch to the left. The safety catch is located under the
center front edge of the hood.

1. Pull the hood release lever located under the left side
of the instrument panel.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 235

Hood Safety Latch

Hood Prop Rod

3. Lift upward on the hood prop rod to release it from the 4. Place the hood prop rod in the hood slot to secure the
stowage retainer.
hood in the open position.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

236 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION! (Continued)
secure both latches. Never drive your vehicle unless
the hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged.

WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
Hood Prop Rod Slot

LIGHTS

CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Lower the hood until it is open approximately 6 in (15 cm), and then drop it. This should

Headlight Switch

(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

The headlight switch is located on the left side of
the instrument panel. This switch controls the

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 237

operation of the headlights, parking lights, instrument Rotate the headlight switch to the second detent for
panel lights, instrument panel light dimming, interior headlight, parking light and instrument panel light operation.
lights and fog lights.
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the
AUTO position. When the system is on, the headlight
time delay feature is also on. This means the headlights
will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you place the
ignition into the OFF position. To turn the automatic
system off, move the headlight switch out of the AUTO
position.
Headlight Switch

Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent
for parking light and instrument panel light operation.

NOTE: The engine must be running before the headlights
will come on in the automatic mode.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

238 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

To activate the delay feature, place the ignition in the OFF
position while the headlights are still on. Then, turn off
the headlights within 45 seconds. The delay interval
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
begins when the headlight switch is turned off.
after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is
placed in the AUTO position and programmable feature If you turn the headlights or parking lights on, or place
is set to ON. In addition, the headlights will turn off the ignition in ACC or RUN, the system will cancel the
when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by delay.
this feature.
If you turn the headlights off before the ignition, they will
Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only)

NOTE: The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be turn off in the normal manner.
turned on or off using the Uconnect® System. Refer to NOTE:
“Uconnect® Settings/Customer Programmable Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for • The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds of
placing the ignition in the OFF position to activate this
further information.
feature.
Headlight Time Delay
• The headlight delay time is programmable using the
This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination
Uconnect® System, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in
for up to 90 seconds (programmable) when leaving your
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
vehicle in an unlit area.
information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 239

• Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights
of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to
remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film,
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control system
and other obstructions on the windshield or camera
provides increased forward lighting at night by automatlens will cause the system to function improperly.
ing high beam control through the use of a digital camera
mounted on the inside rearview mirror. This camera • To opt out of the Advanced Auto High-Beam Sensitivdetects vehicle specific light and automatically switches
ity Control (default) and enter Reduced High-Beam
from high beams to low beams until the approaching
Sensitivity Control (not recommended), toggle highvehicle is out of view.
beam lever 6 full on/off cycles within 10 seconds of
ignition ON. System will return to default setting upon
NOTE:
ignition off.
• The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control can be
If the windshield or Automatic High Beam Headlamp
turned on or off using the Uconnect® System. Refer to
Control mirror is replaced, the mirror must be re-aimed
“Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instruto ensure proper performance. See your local authorized
ment Panel” for further information.
dealer.
Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control — If
Equipped

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

240 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

To Activate

Daytime Running Lights (DRL)

1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO headlight The Daytime Running Lights will come on whenever the
ignition is placed in the RUN position, the headlights are
position.
off and the parking brake is off. The headlight switch
2. Push the multifunction lever away from you (toward must be used for normal nighttime driving.
front of vehicle) to engage the high beam mode.
NOTE: The Daytime Running Lights can be turned on
NOTE: This system will not activate until the vehicle is
and off using the Uconnect® System, refer to “Uconnect®
at or above 15 mph (24 km/h).
Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
To Deactivate
1. Pull the multifunction lever toward you (or rearward Lights-On Reminder
in car) to manually deactivate the system (normal If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition
operation of low beams).
is placed in the OFF position, a chime will sound to alert
2. Push back on the multifunction lever once again to the driver when the driver’s door is opened.
reactivate the system.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 241

headlight switch. To turn off the front fog lights, either
press the headlight switch a second time or turn off the
The front fog light switch is built into the headlight
headlight switch.
switch.
An indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates
when the fog lights are turned on.
Fog Lights — If Equipped

NOTE: The fog lights will operate with the low beam
headlights or parking lights on. However, selecting the
high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights.

Fog Light Switch

To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking
lights or the low beam headlights and press the
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

242 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Multifunction Lever

Turn Signals

The multifunction lever controls the operation of the turn Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
signals, headlight beam selection and passing lights. The on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show
multifunction lever is located on the left side of the proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
steering column.
NOTE:
• If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is
a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light
bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is
defective.
• A “Turn Signal On” message will appear in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver
Information Display (DID) and a continuous chime
will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile
(1.6 km) with either turn signal on.
Multifunction Lever
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 243

Lane Change Assist

Front Map/Reading Lights

Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond Lights are mounted in the overhead console. Each light
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash can be turned on by pressing the lens.
three times then automatically turn off.
To turn the lights off, press the lens a second time.
High/Low Beam Switch
Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch
the headlights to high beam. Pull the multifunction lever
toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam.
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
will turn on the high beams headlights until the lever is
released.
NOTE: If the flash to pass is held for 20 seconds the
feature will deactivate.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Front Map/Reading Lights

244 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

The lights also turn on when a door is opened. The lights Dimmer Controls
will also turn on when the UNLOCK button on the RKE The dimmer control is part of the headlight switch and is
is pressed.
located on the left side of the instrument panel.
Interior Lights
The interior lights come on when a door is opened.
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off
automatically 10 minutes after the ignition is moved to
the LOCK position. This will occur if the interior lights
were switched on manually or are on because a door is
open. This includes the glove box light, but not the trunk
light. To restore interior light operation, either place the
ignition in the ON/RUN position or cycle the light
switch.
Dimmer Controls

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 245

With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating the left Ambient Light Control — If Equipped
dimmer control upward will increase the brightness of Rotate the right dimmer control upward or downward to
the instrument panel lights.
increase or decrease the brightness of the FIB (if
equipped), of the door handle lights and of the door map
pocket lights.

Instrument Panel Dimmer
Door Handle/Ambient Light Dimmer
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

246 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Dome Light Position

WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS

Rotate the left dimmer control completely upward to the
second detent to turn on the interior lights. The interior
lights will remain on when the dimmer control is in this
position.

The multifunction lever operates the windshield wipers
and washer when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
or ACC position. The multifunction lever is located on
the left side of the steering column.

Interior Light Defeat (OFF)
Rotate the left dimmer control to the extreme bottom
“OFF” position. The interior lights will remain off when
the doors are open.
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)
Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control upward to
the first detent. This feature brightens all text displays
such as the odometer, Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID), and
radio when the position lights or headlights are on.
Windshield Wiper/Washer Control
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 247

Intermittent Wiper System
Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions
make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause between cycles desirable. Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent position, and then turn the
end of the lever to select the desired delay interval. There
are four delay settings, which allow you to regulate the
wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle every second
to a maximum of approximately 36 seconds between
cycles. The delay intervals will double in duration when
the vehicle speed is 10 mph (16 km/h) or less.
Wiper Operation
Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the first
detent, past the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper
operation, or to the second detent past the intermittent
settings for high-speed wiper operation.

CAUTION!
• Turn the windshield wipers off when driving
through an automatic car wash. Damage to the
windshield wipers may result if the wiper control
is left in any position other than off.
• In cold weather, always turn off the wiper switch
and allow the wipers to return to the “Park” position before turning off the engine. If the wiper
switch is left on and the wipers freeze to the
windshield, damage to the wiper motor may occur
when the vehicle is restarted.
• Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
the windshield wiper blades from returning to the
off position. If the windshield wiper control is
turned off and the blades cannot return to the off
position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

248 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper
control is in the delay range, the wipers will operate for
Rotate the end of the lever downward to the Mist
two wipe cycles after releasing the lever and then resume
position to activate a single wipe cycle to clear off road
the intermittent interval previously selected.
mist or spray from a passing vehicle. The wipers will
continue to operate until you release the multifunction If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper is
turned off, the wipers will operate for three wipe cycles
lever.
and then turn off.
NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the
WARNING!
windshield. The wash function must be used in order to
spray the windshield with washer fluid.
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to a collision. You might not see other
Windshield Washers
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
To use the washer, push the multifunction lever inward the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
(toward the steering column) and hold it for as long as windshield with the defroster before and during
washer spray is desired.
windshield washer use.
Mist Feature

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 249

Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only)
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on
if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position. In
addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers are
turned off if they were turned on by this feature.
The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be turned on
and off using the Uconnect® System, refer to “Uconnect®
Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.

The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the
multifunction lever. Wiper delay position 1 is the least
sensitive, and wiper delay position 4 is the most sensitive. Setting 3 should be used for normal rain conditions.
Settings 1 and 2 can be used if the driver desires less
wiper sensitivity. Setting 4 can be used if the driver
desires more sensitivity. The rain sense wipers will
automatically change between an intermittent wipe, slow
wipe and a fast wipe depending on the amount of
moisture that is sensed on the windshield. Place the
wiper switch in the OFF position when not using the
system.

The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and off using
This feature senses moisture on the windshield and the Uconnect® System, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in
automatically activates the wipers for the driver. The “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further infeature is especially useful for road splash or over spray formation.
from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate
the end of the multifunction lever to one of four settings
to activate this feature.
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

250 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE:

vehicle speed becomes greater than 0 mph (0 km/h) or
the outside temperature rises above freezing.

• The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the
• Neutral Wipe Inhibit — The Rain Sensing feature will
wiper speed is in the low or high position.
not operate when the ignition is placed in the RUN
• The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly
position, the automatic transmission shift lever is in
when ice or dried salt water is present on the windthe NEUTRAL position and the vehicle speed is less
shield.
than 5 mph (8 km/h), unless the wiper control on the
• Use of Rain-X® or products containing wax or silicone
multifunction lever is moved or the shift lever is
moved out of the NEUTRAL position.
may reduce rain sensor performance.
The Rain Sensing system has protective features for the • Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles equipped
wiper blades and arms. It will not operate under the
with Remote Starting system, Rain Sensing wipers are
following conditions:
not operational when the vehicle is in the remote start
mode. Once the operator is in the vehicle and has
• Low Temperature Wipe Inhibit — The Rain Sensing
placed the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position,
feature will not operate when the ignition is placed in
rain sensing wiper operation can resume, if it has been
the RUN position, the vehicle is stationary and the
selected, and no other inhibit conditions (mentioned
outside temperature is below 32°F (0°C), unless the
previously) exist.
wiper control on the multifunction lever is moved, the
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 251

TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping control
handle is located below the steering wheel at the end of
the steering column.

To unlock the steering column, push the control handle
down. To tilt the steering column, move the steering
wheel upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or
shorten the steering column, pull the steering wheel
outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the steering
column in position, push the control handle up until fully
engaged.

WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious injury or
death.

Tilt/Telescoping Control Handle
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

252 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated
The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps steering wheel to operate.
warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated
steering wheel has been turned on it will operate for up On models that are equipped with remote start, the
to 80 minutes before automatically shutting off. The heated steering wheel can be programmed to come on
heated steering wheel can shut off early or may not turn during a remote start through the Uconnect® system.
Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your
on when the steering wheel is already warm.
Instrument Panel” for further information.
The heated steering wheel control button is located
within the Uconnect® system. You can gain access to the
control button through the climate screen or the controls
screen.
HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED

• Press the heated steering wheel button
turn the heating element ON.

once to

• Press the heated steering wheel button
time to turn the heating element OFF.

a second

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 253

The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the
right side of the steering wheel.

WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical conditions must exercise
care when using the steering wheel heater. It may
cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods.
• Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering
wheel covers of any type and material. This may
cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED

When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over 1 — ON/OFF
accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph 2 — RES +
(40 km/h).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Electronic Speed Control Buttons
3 — SET 4 — CANCEL

254 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Electronic Speed Control system has been designed to shut
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at
the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control
system can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired
vehicle set speed.

WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you are not using it.

To Activate

To Set A Desired Speed

Push the ON/OFF button to activate the Electronic Speed
Control. The Cruise Indicator Light in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information
Display (DID) will illuminate. To turn the system off,
push the ON/OFF button a second time. The Cruise
Indicator Light will turn off. The system should be
turned off when not in use.

Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON.
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed
and on level ground before pressing the SET button.
When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, press
the SET (-) button and release. Release the accelerator and
the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.
NOTE: After pressing the SET button “Cruise Control
Set” message is displayed for five seconds or until
another switch is pressed.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 255

For Premium Clusters Only

• When set to analog mode: The red outer line on the • When set to analog mode: The white outer line on the
speedometer returns to red.
speedometer changes from red to white to identify set
speed.
To Resume Speed
To Deactivate
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+)
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the
vehicle will deactivate Electronic Speed Control without
erasing the set speed memory. Pressing the ON/OFF
button or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set
speed memory.

button and release. Resume can be used at any speed
above 20 mph (32 km/h).
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed

When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can inNOTE: After pressing the OFF button a “Cruise Control crease speed by pushing the RES (+) button.
Off” message is displayed for five seconds or until
another switch is pressed.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

256 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

The drivers preferred units can be selected through the • If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “ Undercontinue to increase until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen To Decrease Speed
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can deU.S. Speed (mph)
crease speed by pushing the SET (-) button.
• Pressing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 mph The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “ Underbutton results in an increase of 1 mph.
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will The speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen
continue to increase until the button is released, then speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
the new set speed will be established.

U.S. Speed (mph)

Metric Speed (km/h)

• Pressing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
• Pressing the RES (+) button once will result in a
button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
1 km/h increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 257

• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills
continue to decrease until the button is released, then The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
the new set speed will be established.
vehicle set speed.
Metric Speed (km/h)
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains
• Pressing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 km/h speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the moderate hills is normal.
button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so
• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed
continue to decrease until the button is released, then Control.
the new set speed will be established.

WARNING!

To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.

Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you
could lose control and have an accident. Do not use
Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads
that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

258 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

PARKSENSE® REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
EQUIPPED
The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist system provides visual
and audible indications of the distance between the rear
fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g.
during a parking maneuver. Refer to “ParkSense® System Usage Precautions” in this section for limitations of
this system and recommendations.

ParkSense® Sensors
The four ParkSense® sensors, located in the rear fascia/
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 79 in
(200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal
direction, depending on the location, type and orientation of the obstacle.

ParkSense® Warning Display
ParkSense® will retain the last system state (enabled or
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is The ParkSense® Warning screen will only be displayed if
Sound and Display is selected from the Uconnect®
changed to the ON/RUN position.
System. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “UnderstandParkSense® can be active only when the shift lever is in ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
REVERSE. If ParkSense® is enabled at this shift lever
position, the system will remain active until the vehicle The ParkSense® Warning screen is located within the
Driver Information Display (DID). It provides visual
speed is increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or
warnings to indicate the distance between the rear
above. The system will become active again if the vehicle
fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle. Refer to
speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately
“Driver Information Display (DID) Settings” in “Under6 mph (9 km/h).
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 259

ParkSense® Display
When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the warning display
will turn ON indicating the system status.

ParkSense Off

ParkSense Ready

The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
a single arc in one or more regions based on the obstacle’s
distance and location relative to the vehicle.
If an obstacle is detected in the center rear region, the
display will show a single solid arc in the center rear
region and will produce a one-half second tone. As the
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

260 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will
show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the
sound tone will change from slow, to fast, to continuous.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear
region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the
left and/or right rear region and will produce a fast
sound tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle,
the display will show the single arc moving closer to the
vehicle and the sound tone will change from fast, to
continuous.
One-Half Second Tone

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 261

Slow Tone

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

262 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Fast Tone

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 263

Fast Tone

Continuous Tone

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

264 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning
display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous
tone. The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:

Continuous Tone

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 265

Rear Distance
(in/cm)
Audible
Alert
Chime

Arc — Left
Rear
Arc — Center Rear
Arc —
Right Rear

Greater
than
79 in (200
cm)
None

79-59 in
(200-150
cm)

WARNING ALERTS
59-47 in
47-39 in
(150-120
(120-100
cm)
cm)

39-25 in
(100-65 cm)

25-12 in
(65-30 cm)

Less than
12 in (30
cm)

Slow
(for rear
center
only)

Fast
(for rear
center
only)

Fast

Continuous

None

Single 1/2Second
Tone
(for rear
center
only)
None

None

1st Flashing

None

6th Solid

5th Solid

4th Solid

None

3rd Flashing
None

2nd Flashing
2nd Flashing
2nd Flashing

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

1st Flashing
1st Flashing

266 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Enabling And Disabling ParkSense®

Service The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist
ParkSense® can be enabled and disabled using the System
Uconnect® System. The available choices are: Off, Sound During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense® Rear Park
Only, or Sound and Display. Refer to “Uconnect® Set- Assist System has detected a faulted condition, the
tings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for instrument cluster will actuate a single chime, once per
ignition cycle, and it will display the “PARKSENSE
further information.
UNAVAILABLE WIPE OFF REAR SENSORS” or the
When the ParkSense® button is pushed to disable the
“PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED”
system, the Driver Information Display (DID) will dismessage. Refer to “Driver Information Display (DID)” for
play the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for approximately
further information. When the shift lever/gear selector is
five seconds. Refer to “Driver Information Display (DID)
moved to REVERSE and the system has detected a
” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
faulted condition, the DID will display the #PARKSENSE
information. When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE
UNAVAILABLE WIPE OFF REAR SENSORS# or
and the system is disabled, the DID will display the
#PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED#
“PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as the vehicle is
message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. Under
in REVERSE.
this condition, ParkSense® will not operate.
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE OFF REAR SENSORS” appears in the Driver Information Display (DID)
make sure the outer surface and the underside of the rear
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 267

fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt
or other obstruction and then cycle the ignition. If the
message continues to appear, see an authorized dealer.

ParkSense Unavailable Service Required

The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist system will be automatically disabled when there are faulted conditions outside of
ParkSense Unavailable Wipe Off Rear Sensors
the ParkSense® Rear Park Assist system that inhibit the
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED” feature from functioning properly. The Driver Information
Display (DID) will actuate a single chime, once per ignition
appears in the DID, see an authorized dealer.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

268 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

cycle, and it will display the #PARKSENSE SYSTEM DISABLED# message. If “PARKSENSE SYSTEM DISABLED”
appears in the DID, cycle the ignition. If the message
appears again, see an authorized dealer.

Cleaning The ParkSense® System
Clean the ParkSense® sensors with water, car wash soap
and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not
scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.
ParkSense® System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
• Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud,
dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense® system operating properly.
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
affect the performance of ParkSense®.

ParkSense System Disabled

• When you turn ParkSense® off, the DID will display
“PARKSENSE OFF.” Furthermore, once you turn
ParkSense® off, it remains off until you turn it on
again, even if you cycle the ignition key.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 269

• When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE
position and ParkSense® is turned OFF, the DID will
display “PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as the
vehicle is in REVERSE.
• Clean the ParkSense® sensors regularly, taking care not to
scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be covered
with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do so
can result in the system not working properly. The
ParkSense® system might not detect an obstacle behind
the fascia/bumper, or it could provide a false indication
that an obstacle is behind the fascia/bumper.
• Use the ParkSense® switch to turn the ParkSense®
system OFF if objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer
hitches, etc. are placed within 12 in (30 cm) from the rear
fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can result in the system
misinterpreting a close object as a sensor problem,
causing the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQUIRED” message to be displayed in the DID.

CAUTION!
• ParkSense® is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below
the sensors will not be detected when they are in
close proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense® in order to be able to stop in time
when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended
that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when
using ParkSense®.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

270 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

WARNING! (Continued)

• Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using ParkSense®. Always check carefully
behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure
to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, and blind spots before backing up.
You are responsible for safety and must continue to
pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so
can result in serious injury or death.

• Before using ParkSense®, it is strongly recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the vehicle when the
vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can
result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles
because the hitch ball will be much closer to the
obstacle than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker
sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors
could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and shape, giving a false
indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.

(Continued)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 271

out of REVERSE unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView® Rear #PARK# or the vehicle’s ignition is cycled to the OFF
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen position.
image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever Fixed guide lines are overlaid on the image to illustrate
the shift lever is put into REVERSE. The image will be the width of the vehicle.
displayed in the touchscreen display along with a caution
note to “check entire surroundings” across the top of the NOTE: The ParkView® Rear Back Up Camera has proscreen. After five seconds this note will disappear. The grammable modes of operation that may be selected
ParkView® camera is located on the rear of the vehicle through the Uconnect® System. Refer to “Uconnect®
Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
above the rear License plate.
further information.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE, the rear
camera mode is exited and the last selected touchscreen Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of
the vehicle.
appears again.
PARKVIEW® REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED

If your vehicle is equipped with the Camera Delay
feature and it is turned On, the rear camera image will be
displayed for up to 10 seconds when the vehicle is shifted
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

272 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

The following table shows the approximate distances for
each zone:
Zone
Red
Yellow
Green

Distance to the rear of the vehicle
0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
1 ft - 3 ft (30 cm - 1 m)
3 ft or greater (1 m or greater)

WARNING!

CAUTION!

Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView® Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for the safety of your surroundings and
must continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.

• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView® should only
be used as a parking aid. The ParkView® camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your
drive path.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

(Continued)

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 273

OVERHEAD CONSOLE

CAUTION! (Continued)
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using ParkView® to be able to
stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended that the driver look frequently over his/her
shoulder when using ParkView®.

The overhead console contains courtesy/reading lights
and storage for sunglasses. Universal Garage Door
Opener (HomeLink®) and power sunroof switches may
also be included, if equipped.

NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds
up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water,
and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.

Overhead Console
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

274 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

The lights also turn on when a door is opened. The lights
Lights are mounted in the overhead console. Each light will also turn on when the UNLOCK button on the RKE
is pressed.
can be turned on by pressing the lens.
Sunglass Bin Door
To turn the lights off, press the lens a second time.
Front Map/Reading Lights

At the front of the console a compartment is provided for
the storage of a pair of sunglasses. The storage compartment access is a “push/push” design. Push the chrome
pad on the door to open. Push the chrome pad on the
door to close.

Front Map/Reading Lights

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 275

The HomeLink® buttons, located on either the overhead
console, headliner or sunvisor, designate the three different HomeLink® channels. The HomeLink® indicator is
located above the center button.

Sunglass Bin Door

GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink® replaces up to three remote controls (handheld transmitters) that operate devices such as garage
HomeLink® Buttons/Overhead Consoles
door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security
systems. The HomeLink® unit operates off your vehicle’s NOTE: HomeLink® is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
battery.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

276 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Before You Begin Programming HomeLink®

NOTE:

Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage • Erasing all channels should only be performed when
before you begin programming.
programming HomeLink® for the first time. Do not
erase channels when programming additional buttons.
For more efficient programming and accurate transmis-

sion of the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that • If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink®
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
system.
Programming A Rolling Code
To erase the channels place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position and push and hold the two outside HomeLink® For programming garage door openers that were manubuttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds or until the red factured after 1995. These garage door openers can be
identified by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located
indicator flashes.
where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door
opener. It is NOT the button that is normally used to
open and close the door. The name and color of the
button may vary by manufacturer.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 277

2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8
cm) away from the HomeLink® button you wish to
program while keeping the HomeLink® indicator
light in view.
3. Simultaneously push and hold both the HomeLink®
button you want to program and the hand-held transmitter button.

Training The Garage Door Opener
1 — Door Opener

2 — Training Button

1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.

4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indicator light. The HomeLink® indicator will flash slowly
and then rapidly after HomeLink® has received the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release both buttons after the indicator light changes
from slow to rapid.
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage),
locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can
usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is
attached to the garage door opener/device motor.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

278 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Firmly push and release the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. On some garage door openers/devices
there may be a light that blinks when the garage door
opener/device is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode.

Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
(Rolling Code)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:

NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next 1.
step after the LEARN button has been pushed.
2.
6. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed
HomeLink® button twice (holding the button for two
seconds each time). If the garage door opener/device
3.
activates, programming is complete.

Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do
not release the button.
Without releasing the button proceed with “Programming A Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all remaining
steps.

NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not activate, push the button a third time (for two seconds) to
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
complete the training.

To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons, For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT before 1995.
erase the channels.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 279

2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8
cm) away from the HomeLink® button you would like
to program while keeping the HomeLink® indicator
light in view.

• To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.

Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
3. Simultaneously push and hold both the HomeLink® (Non — Rolling Code)
button you want to program and the hand-held trans- To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
mitter button.
follow these steps:
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi- 1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
cator light. HomeLink® indicator will flash slowly
and then rapidly after HomeLink® has received the For vehicle’s equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™, place
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Re- the ignition in the RUN position with the Engine ON.
lease both buttons after the indicator light changes 2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
from slow to rapid.
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do
not release the button.
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink® button
and observe the indicator light.

3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Programming A Non-Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programremaining steps.
ming is complete and the garage door/device should
activate when the HomeLink® button is pressed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

280 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8
cm) away from the HomeLink® button you wish to
For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
program while keeping the HomeLink® indicator
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
light in view.
several seconds of transmission.
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig- 3. Continue to push and hold the HomeLink® button,
while you press and release (“cycle”) your hand-held
nals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transtransmitter every two seconds until HomeLink® has
mission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink®
successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indito pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this
cator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to
fully trained.
time-out in the same manner.
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming

It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling 4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to change flash
rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage
door or gate motor.
door may open and close while you are programming.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink® button
and observe the indicator light.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 281

2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programnot release the button.
ming is complete and the garage door/device should
activate when the HomeLink® button is pushed.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” step 2 and
• To program the two remaining HomeLink® buttons,
follow all remaining steps.
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT

NOTE:

erase the channels.

Using HomeLink®

If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for To operate, push and release the programmed
programming, plug it back in at this time.
HomeLink® button. Activation will now occur for the
programmed device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operaReprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
tor, security system, entry door lock, home/office light(Canadian/Gate Operator)
ing, etc.,). The hand-held transmitter of the device may
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, also be used at any time.
follow these steps:
Security
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
in your vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

282 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons for 20 If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
erased.
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is disabled when
the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
Troubleshooting Tips
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink®,
here are some of the most common solutions:
• Replace the battery in the original hand-held transmitter.
• Push the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener
to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
• Did you unplug the device for programming and
remember to plug it back in?

WARNING!

Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage while
programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause
serious injury or death.

WARNING!
Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are programming the universal transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people, pets
or other objects are in the path of the door or gate.
Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener
(Continued)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 283

WARNING! (Continued)
that has a “stop and reverse” feature as required by
Federal safety standards. This includes most garage
door opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not
use a garage door opener without these safety features. Call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet
at HomeLink.com for safety information or assistance.
General Information
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:

2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
• The transmitter has been tested and it complies with
FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
• The term IC before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.

1. This device may not cause harmful interference.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

284 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switch is located between the sun
visors on the overhead console.

Power Sunroof Switch

WARNING!
• Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the
Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location
accessible to children. Do not leave the ignition of
a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in
the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped
by the power sunroof while operating the power
sunroof switch. Such entrapment may result in
serious injury or death.
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could
also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten
your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are also properly secured.
(Continued)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 285

WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object, to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.

movement. The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a
partially opened condition until the switch is pushed and
held rearward again.
Closing Sunroof — Express

Press the switch forward and release it within one-half
second and the sunroof will close automatically from any
Opening Sunroof — Express
position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automatiPress the switch rearward and release it within one-half cally. This is called “Express Close”. During Express
second. The sunroof and sunshade will open automati- Close operation, any movement of the switch will stop
cally from any position. The sunroof and sunshade will the sunroof.
open fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express
Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode
Open”. During Express Open operation, any movement
To close the sunroof, press and hold the switch in the
of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially
To open the sunroof, press and hold the switch rearward closed condition until the switch is pushed and held
to full open. Any release of the switch will stop the forward again.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

286 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Pinch Protect Feature

Venting Sunroof — Express

This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obstruction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs. Next, press the switch forward and
release to Express Close.

Press and release the Vent button within one half second
and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is
called “Express Vent” and it will occur regardless of
sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any
movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.

Sunshade Operation
NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the
in Pinch Protect reversals, the fourth close attempt will be sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.
a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect disabled.
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is
Pinch Protect Override
open.
If a known obstruction (ice, debris, etc.) prevents closing
Wind Buffeting
the sunroof, attempt to remove the obstruction and then
press and hold the switch forward until the sunroof fully Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
closes.
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
NOTE: Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
pressed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 287

open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a nonabrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
the glass panel.
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS — IF EQUIPPED
Instrument Panel Outlet
The 12 Volt (13 Amp) instrument panel power outlet is
located on the lower instrument panel, below the climate NOTE: To ensure proper operation a MOPAR® cigar
controls. The power outlet has power available when the knob and element must be used.
ignition switch is in the ACC or RUN position. The
power outlet will also operate a conventional cigar
lighter unit (if equipped with an optional Smoker’s
Package).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

288 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!
• Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts (13
Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp) power
rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system
will need to be replaced.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not insert any other object in the power
outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the
fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
There is also a 12 Volt power outlet located in the center
console. This power outlet has power available only
when the ignition is placed in the ACC or RUN position
(if equipped).

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Center Console Outlet

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 289

WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
Underhood Fuses (Power Outlet Fuses)
1 — F84 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter
2 — F30 Fuse 20 A Yellow Center Console Outlet

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

290 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!

CAUTION! (Continued)

• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or
prevent the engine from starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will degrade the
battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
alternator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.

• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug. Improper use of the
power outlet can cause damage.

(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 291

CUPHOLDERS

Rear Seat Cupholders

The rear seat cupholders are located in the center armrest
between the rear seats. The cupholders are positioned
The cupholders are located in the center console forward
forward in the armrest and side-by-side to provide conveof the armrest between the front seats.
nient access to beverage cans or bottles while maintaining
a resting place for the rear occupant’s elbows.
Front Seat Cupholders

Front Cupholders
Rear Seat Cupholders
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

292 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

STORAGE
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the passenger side
of the instrument panel. Pull on the release handle to
open the glove compartment.

Opened Glove Compartment

Glove Compartment
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 293

Pull upward on the release handle, located on the front of
An open storage area, or cubby bin, is located in the the armrest, to open the storage compartment.
center console forward of the shift lever.
Console Features

There is a storage compartment located under the center
console armrest. If equipped, the 12 Volt power outlet,
USB and Aux jack are located here.

WARNING!

Do not operate this vehicle with a console compartment lid in the open position. Driving with the
console compartment lid open may result in injury in
a collision.

Center Console
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

294 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Door Storage
The door panels contain storage areas.

Rear Door Trim Storage
Front Door Trim Storage

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 295

Rear Seat Armrest Storage — If Equipped

CARGO AREA FEATURES

For rear passengers there is a storage bin located in the Cargo Area — 60/40 Split-Folding Rear Seat — If
armrest. Lift upward on the latch to open the storage Equipped
compartment.
The 60/40 split-folding rear seat provides cargo-carrying
versatility. The seatbacks fold down easily by pulling the
seatback loops between the seatbacks and the bolsters.
When the seats are folded down, they provide a continuous, nearly-flat extension of the load floor.
NOTE: The rear seatback loops can be tucked away
when not in use.

Rear Armrest Storage

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

296 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Rear Seatback Loops

Folded Rear Seatback

After releasing the seatback, it can be folded forward.

When the seatback is folded to the upright position, make
sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the
seatback above the seat strap.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 297

WARNING!

• Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position, the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury.
• The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the
rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down
position) should not be used as a play area by
children when the vehicle is in motion. They could
be seriously injured in a collision. Children should
be seated and using the proper restraint system.
• To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The rear
cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes
only, not for passengers, who should sit in seats
and use seat belts.

The weight and position of cargo and passengers can
change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle
handling. To avoid loss of control resulting in personal injury, follow these guidelines for loading your
vehicle:
• Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible.
• Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear
axle. Too much weight or improperly placed weight
over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of
the vehicle to sway.
• Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of
the seatback. This could impair visibility or become a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or
collision.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

298 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Ski Pass-Through

REAR WINDOW FEATURES

There is a ski pass-through door located behind the rear Rear Window Defroster
seat armrest that allows longer items, such as snow skis,
to be stored in the rear cargo area. Lower the armrest and
The rear window defroster button is located on
pull downward on the latch to open the ski pass-through
the climate control. Press this button to turn on the
door.
rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if
equipped). An indicator in the button will illuminate
when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window
defroster automatically turns off after approximately 15
minutes. For an additional 15 minutes of operation, press
the button a second time.

Ski Pass-Through
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 299

CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
! INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES . . . . . . . . . .304 ! DRIVER INFORMATION DISPLAY DID . . . . . . .332
! INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — BASE (EVIC) . . . . .305

▫ Four Button DID — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .333

! INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — PREMIUM
ANALOG (DID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306

▫ Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349

! INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — PREMIUM
DIGITAL (DID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
! INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS . . . . .308
! ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION
CENTER (EVIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321

! Uconnect® SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351
▫ Buttons On The Faceplate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351
▫ Buttons On The Touchscreen. . . . . . . . . . . . . .352
▫ Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect®
System 8.4 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352

! Uconnect® 200 — AM/FM STEREO RADIO WITH
CD PLAYER (MP3 AUX JACK) AND SiriusXM
▫ Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330
RADIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366
▫ Two Button EVIC — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .322

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

302 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode. . . . . . .367 ! iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL WITH Uconnect®
VOICE COMMAND — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .380
▫ Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD
And MP3 Audio Play. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372
▫ Connecting The iPod® Or External USB
Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . .374
▫ Using This Feature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382
▫ Enter/Browse Button (CD Mode For MP3/WMA
Play) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377
▫ Controlling The iPod® Or External USB Device
Using Radio Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383
▫ INFO Button (CD Mode For MP3/WMA
Play) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377
▫ Play Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383
▫ Operation Instructions — Auxiliary Mode . . . .377

▫ List Or Browse Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384

▫ Operation Instructions — Universal Serial Bus
(USB) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378

▫ Bluetooth® Streaming Audio (BTSA) . . . . . . .386

▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378
! CD PLAYER — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . .379
▫ CD Player Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . .380

! STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS . . . . . .387
▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .388
▫ CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .388
! CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . .389

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 303

! RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE
PHONES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389
! CLIMATE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390
▫ Manual Heating And Air Conditioning — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390

▫ Climate Control Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400
▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . .402
▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404

▫ Uconnect® 8.4 Climate Controls — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .395

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

304 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES

1 — Air Demister
2 — Outlet
3 — Instrument Cluster
4 — Radio/Uconnect® System

5 — Glove Compartment
6 — Climate Control Hard Controls/
Uconnect® System Hard Controls
7 — Power Outlet
8 — Ignition Switch
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

9 — Trunk Release
10 — Hood Release
11 — Dimmer Control
12 — Headlight Switch

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 305

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — BASE (EVIC)

Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Equipped
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

306 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — PREMIUM ANALOG (DID)

Driver Information Display (DID) Equipped
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 307

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — PREMIUM DIGITAL (DID)

Driver Information Display (DID) Equipped
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

308 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
1. Tachometer
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumiThis gauge measures engine revolutions-per-minute nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
(RPM x 1000).
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
2. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light — If Equipped on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should low tire pressure telltale.
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
tires.)
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 309

approximately one minute and then remain continuously
CAUTION! (Continued)
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. warning have been established for the tire size
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the sys- equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operatem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure tion or sensor damage may result when using reas intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety placement equipment that is not of the same size,
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can or
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
3. Turn Signal Indicators
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
The arrow will flash with the exterior turn
to continue to function properly.
signal when the turn signal lever is operated.

CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
(Continued)

If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle
is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal
on, a continuous chime will sound to alert you to turn the
signals off. If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate, check
for a defective outside light bulb.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

310 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

4. Temperature Gauge

WARNING!

The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature. Any reading within the normal range indicates that
the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,
or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.

CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
“H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the “H” and you hear continuous chimes,
turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized dealer for service.

A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer
for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to
look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your
Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the Cooling
System Pressure Cap paragraph.
5. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light — If Equipped
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN
position. It should go out with the engine
running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a
malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 311

light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the 6. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at
This indicator will illuminate when the front
speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authofog lights are on.
rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
7. Engine Temperature Warning Light
NOTE:
This light warns of an overheated engine condi• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC
tion. If the engine coolant temperature is too high,
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” come on this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will
momentarily each time the ignition switch is placed sound.
in the ON/RUN.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and
• Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also,
ESC system will be ON, even if it was turned off shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vepreviously.
hicle. If the temperature reading does not return to
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To
will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the Do In Emergencies” for further information.
maneuver that caused the ESC activation.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

312 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

For vehicles equipped with a premium cluster this indi- Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know
cator will display in the DID. Refer to ”Driver Informa- Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
tion Display (DID) — If Equipped” for further 10. Brake Warning Light
information.
This light monitors various brake functions,
8. High Beam Indicator
including brake fluid level and parking brake
This indicator shows that the high beam headapplication. If the brake light turns on it may
lights are on. Push the multifunction lever forindicate that the parking brake is applied, that
ward to switch the headlights to high beam, and pull the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with
toward yourself (normal position) to return to low beam. the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
9. Seat Belt Reminder Light
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON/
RUN position, this light will turn on for four to
eight seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb
check, if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will
sound. After the bulb check or when driving, if the
driver’s seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will illuminate and the chime will sound.

If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS)/Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system.
In this case, the light will remain on until the condition
has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 313

and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.

WARNING!

The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
dropped below a specified level.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level condiLight. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
the brake fluid level checked.
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necesON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for apsary.
proximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
inspected by an authorized dealer.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

314 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

The light also will turn on when the parking brake is 14. Power Steering System Warning
applied with the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
This light is used to manage the electrical
position.
warning of the EPS (Power Steering System).
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
Refer to “Power Steering” in “Starting and
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
Operating” for further information.
11. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator 15. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light
Light — If Equipped
This light informs you of a problem with the
This light indicates the Electronic Stability ConElectronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a
trol (ESC) is off.
problem is detected, the light will come on
while the engine is running. Cycle the ignition
key when the vehicle has completely stopped and the
12. Fuel Gauge
shift lever is placed in the NEUTRAL position. The light
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when should turn off. If the light remains lit with the engine
running, your vehicle will usually be drivable; however,
the ignition is in the ON/RUN position.
see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. If
13. Speedometer
the light is flashing when the engine is running, immeIndicates vehicle speed.
diate service is required and you may experience reduced
performance, an elevated/rough idle or engine stall and
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 315

your vehicle may require towing. The light will come on 17. Vehicle Security Light — If Equipped
when the ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN position
This light will flash at a fast rate for approxiand remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not
mately 15 seconds, when the vehicle security
come on during starting, have the system checked by an
alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly
authorized dealer.
until the vehicle is disarmed.
16. Air Bag Warning Light
18. Fuel Door Reminder
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds
The arrow in this symbol is a reminder that the
as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
Fuel Filler Door is located on the right side of
turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on
the vehicle.
during starting, stays on, or turns on while
driving, have the system inspected at an authorized 19. Electronic Speed Control Set Light
dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant Restraints”
This light will turn on when the electronic
in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for
speed control has been set.
further information.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

316 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

technician should leave the odometer reading the same
as it was before the repair or service. If s/he cannot do so,
When the fuel level reaches approximately 3.0 gal
then the odometer must be set at zero, and a sticker must
(11.0 L) this light will turn on, and remain on until
be placed in the door jamb stating what the odometer
fuel is added.
reading was before the repair or service. It is a good idea
21. Park/Headlight ON Indicator — If Equipped
for you to make a record of the odometer reading before
the repair/service, so that you can be sure that it is
This indicator will illuminate when the park
properly reset, or that the door jamb sticker is accurate if
lights or headlights are turned on.
the odometer must be reset at zero.
20. Low Fuel Light

22. Odometer/EVIC/DID Display — As Equipped
Odometer Display

The Shift Lever Indicator is self-contained within the
EVIC/DID display. It displays the gear position of the
automatic transmission.

The odometer display shows the total distance the ve- NOTE: You must apply the brakes before shifting from
hicle has been driven.
PARK.
U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer of Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Display
vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) feacorrect mileage that the vehicle has been driven. If your
tures a driver-interactive display that is located in the
odometer needs to be repaired or serviced, the repair
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 317

instrument cluster. For further information, refer to electrical devices (i.e., radio) or slightly increase engine
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)”.
speed (if at idle). If the light remains on, it means that the
charging system is experiencing a problem. See your
NOTE: You must apply the brakes before shifting from
local authorized dealer to obtain service immediately.
PARK.
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting
Driver Information Display (DID)
Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”.
The Driver Information Display (DID) features a driver- 24. Oil Pressure Warning Light
interactive display that is located in the instrument
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The
cluster. For further information, refer to “Driver Informalight should turn on momentarily when the engine is
tion Display (DID)”.
started. If the light turns on while driving, stop the
23. Charging System Warning Light
vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A
This light shows the status of the electrical charg- chime will sound when this light turns on.
ing system. The light should turn on when the Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
ignition switch is first placed in ON/RUN and remain on This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine.
briefly as a bulb check. If the light stays on or turns on The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
while driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

318 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

25. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light

26. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
an Onboard Diagnostic system, called OBD, that
(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition
monitors engine and automatic transmission conswitch is turned to the ON/RUN position and
trol systems. The light will illuminate when placing the
may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it ignition in ON/RUN from the OFF position, before
indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system engine start. If the bulb does not come on when turning
is not functioning and that service is required. However, the key from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition
the conventional brake system will continue to operate checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as poor fuel quality, etc., may
illuminate the MIL after engine start. The vehicle should
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
be serviced if the light stays on through several of your
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock
typical driving cycles. In most situations, the vehicle will
brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the
drive normally and will not require towing.
ignition switch is placed in the ON/RUN position, have
the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 319

CAUTION!

27. Transmission Temperature Warning Light — If
Equipped

Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the engine
control system. It also could affect fuel economy and
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.

This light indicates that the transmission fluid
temperature is running hot. This may occur
with severe usage, such as trailer towing. If this
light turns on while driving, safely pull over
and stop the vehicle. Then, shift the transmission into
NEUTRAL and run the engine at idle or faster until the
light turns off.

WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result
in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or
others.

CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

320 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

29. Electronic Speed Control Indicator
• Electronic Speed Control ON Indicator
If you continue operating the vehicle when the
This light will turn on when the electronic
Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illumispeed control is ON. For further information,
nated you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in
refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Uncontact with hot engine or exhaust components and
derstanding The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
cause a fire.
• Electronic Speed Control SET Indicator
This light will turn on when the electronic
28. Selectable DID Information
speed control is SET. For further information,
This area of the cluster will display selectable informarefer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Untion such as compass, outside temperature, etc.). For
derstanding The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
further information, refer to “Driver Information Display
30. Yellow Driver Information Display (DID) Reconfigu(DID) — If Equipped”.
rable Telltales

WARNING!

This area will show reconfigurable Yellow telltales (Low
Fuel Telltale, Windshield Washer Fluid Low Indicator,
Transmission Temperature Warning Telltale). For further
information, refer to “Driver Information Display (DID)”.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 321

31. Red Driver Information Display (DID) Reconfigu- messages that consist of approximately 60 possible warning or information messages. These pop up messages fall
rable Telltales
into several categories:
This area will show reconfigurable red telltales (Door(s)
Ajar, Oil Pressure Warning Telltale, Charging System • Five Second Stored Messages
Telltale, Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Telltale, Engine When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of
Temperature Warning Telltale, Electric Power Steering message takes control of the main display area for five
Malfunction). For further information, refer to “Driver seconds and then returns to the previous screen. Most of
Information Display (DID)”.
the messages of this type are then stored (as long as the
condition that activated it remains active) and can be
reviewed from the #Messages# main menu item. Examples of this message type are #Right Front Turn Signal
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) fea- Lamp Out# and #Low Tire Pressure#.
tures a driver-interactive display that is located in the
• Unstored Messages
instrument cluster.
The main display area will normally display the main This message type is displayed indefinitely or until the
menu or the screens of a selected feature of the main condition that activated the message is cleared. Examples
of this message type are #Turn Signal On# (if a turn signal
menu. The main display area also displays #pop up#
is left on) and #Lights On# (if driver leaves the vehicle).
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

322 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• Unstored Messages Until RUN

Two Button EVIC — If Equipped

These messages deal primarily with the Remote Start
feature. This message type is displayed until the ignition
is in the RUN state. Examples of this message type are
#Remote Start Aborted - Door Ajar# and #Press Brake
Pedal and Push Button to Start#.
• Five Second Unstored Messages

This system allows the driver to select a variety of useful
information by pushing the switches mounted on the
steering wheel. The EVIC consists of the following:
• Odometer

• Digital Vehicle Speed

• Trip
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of
message takes control of the main display area for five • Range To Empty
seconds and then returns to the previous screen. An
• Average Fuel Economy
example of this message type is #Automatic High Beams
• Current Fuel Economy
On#.
• Stored Messages
• Oil Life

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 323

• Settings
• Units

• Language

The system allows the driver to select information by
pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering
wheel:

Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC

EVIC Steering Wheel Buttons (Two–Button EVIC
Controls)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

324 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• UP Arrow Button

• Key Fob Damaged

• Key Fob Battery Low

• Parking Light Out

Push and release the UP arrow button to scroll • Key In Ignition
upward through the main menus (Odometer,
• Left Turn Signal Out
Digital Vehicle Speed, Trip Info, Range To
Empty, Average Fuel Economy, Current Fuel • Right Turn Signal Out
Economy, Stored Messages, Settings).
• Turn Signal On
• RIGHT Arrow Button
• Lights On
Push and release the RIGHT arrow button to
• Low Beam Headlight Out
access the sub-menu screens of a main menu
item. Push and hold the RIGHT arrow button • High Beam Headlight Out
for two seconds to reset displayed/selected
• License Plate Light Out
features that can be reset.
• Backup Light Out
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Messages
• Brake Light Out
• Wrong Key Fob

• Service Air Bag System
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 325

• Service Air Bag Warning Light

• Oil Temperature Hot

• Parking Brake Engaged

• Oil Change Due

• Washer Fluid Low
• Brake Fluid Low

• Service Electronic Braking System
• Engine Temperature Hot
• Battery Voltage Low
• Oil Pressure Low
• Fuel Low

• Service Antilock Brake System

• Service Electronic Throttle Control
• Transmission Too Hot

• Service Power Steering

• Check Fuel Cap

• Service Tire Pressure System
• Inflate Tire to XX
• Coolant Low

• Rain Sensor Fail

• Traction Control Off

• Engine Warming Wait To Start
• Too Cold Plug In Heater
• Cruise Off

• Cruise Ready

• Cruise Set To XXX MPH
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

326 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• Cruise Set To XXX km/h

• Remote Start Aborted Too Cold

• Passenger Seatbelt Unbuckled

EVIC Main Menu

• Driver Seatbelt Unbuckled

• Remote Start Active Push Start Button

• Door Open

To step to each main menu feature push and release the
UP button once for each step. A step from the last item in
the list will cause the first item in the feature list to be
displayed. The following features are in the main menu:

• Trunk Open

• Odometer

• Remote Start Disabled Start To Reset

• Trip

• Remote Start Aborted Door Open

• Average Fuel Economy

• Remote Start Aborted Time Expired

• Stored Messages

• Front Seatbelts Unbuckled
• Doors Open

• Remote Start Aborted Fuel Low

• Digital Vehicle Speed

• Remote Start Active Key To Run

• Range To Empty

• Remote Start Aborted Hood Open

• Current Fuel Economy

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 327

• Oil Life

Push the UP buttons to cycle through all the Trip Computer functions.

• Units

The Trip Functions mode displays the following information:

• Settings
• Language

Trip A
NOTE: For features in the EVIC that can be reset (Average Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last
Fuel Economy), the EVIC prompts a reset with a RIGHT
reset.
arrow button graphic and the word RESET next to it.
Trip B
Trip Info
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last
Push and release the UP arrow button until the Trip Info
reset.
icon is highlighted in the EVIC. Push and release the
RIGHT arrow button to display the following three trip Elapsed Time
features in the next screen:
Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset.
• Trip A
• Trip B

Elapsed time will increment when the ignition is in the
ON/RUN position.

• Elapsed Time
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

328 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

When the RTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km)
estimated driving distance, the RTE display will change
To Reset any of the three Trip Info functions, select the
to a text display of #LOW FUEL”. This display will
function you want to reset using the UP button. Push the
continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a
RIGHT arrow button until the feature display zero.
significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the
Range To Empty (RTE)
LOW FUEL text and a new RTE value will display.
Resetting A Trip Info Function

Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with
the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is
determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous
and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel
tank level. RTE cannot be reset.

Average Fuel Economy

This feature shows the average fuel economy since the
last reset. When Average Fuel Economy is selected, The
word “RESET>” (with right arrow) appears next to it.
Pushing the RIGHT arrow button will reset Average Fuel
NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle Economy which displays “0” immediately after reset.
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of Then, the history information will be erased, and the
the vehicle, regardless of the RTE display value.
averaging will continue from the last fuel average reading before the reset.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 329

Tire PSI

Stored Messages

Push and release the UP button until #Tire Pressure# is
displayed.

When a stored warning message is present, this
icon is displayed in the lower left side of the
Tire pressure information is displayed as follows:
Tire Pressure menu. This feature shows the
number of stored warning messages. Pushing
• If tire pressure is OK for all tires, a vehicle graphic is
displayed with tire pressure values in each corner or the RIGHT arrow button will allow you to see what the
stored messages are.
the graphic.
• If one or more tires have low pressure, Inflate Tire To
XX and a vehicle graphic are displayed with tire
pressure values in each corner of the graphic. Tire
pressure values that are too low will be flashing.

Settings — EVIC Units And Language Selection

Displays the units used for the Outside Temperature,
Average and Current Fuel Economy, Distance to Empty
and Tire Pressure features. Push and release the RIGHT
• If the Tire Pressure System requires service, #Service arrow button to toggle units between #U.S.# and #METTPM System# is displayed. Tire Pressure is an informa- RIC#.
tion only function and cannot be reset.
Push and release the UP arrow button until the Language
is displayed, then push and release the Right arrow
button to select English, Francais, or Espanol depending
on availability.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

330 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Oil Change Indicator

Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go™

• Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Oil Change Due” message will
display in the EVIC display for approximately 10
seconds after a single chime has sounded, to indicate
the next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil
change indicator system is duty cycle based, which
means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate,
dependent upon your personal driving style.

1. Without pushing the brake pedal, cycle the ignition to
the ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
2. Push the accelerator pedal fully, slowly, three times
within 10 seconds.
3. Cycle the ignition to the OFF/LOCK position.
Vehicles Not Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go™

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position (do
• Unless reset, this message will continue to display
not start the engine).
each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN
position or cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position 2. Push the accelerator pedal fully, slowly, three times
within 10 seconds.
if equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™. To turn off the
message temporarily, push and release the MENU 3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.
button. To reset the oil change indicator system (after
performing the scheduled maintenance) refer to the
following procedure.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 331

• Push and release the DOWN
arrow button to
scroll downward through the main menu to “Vehicle Info”.

Using The EVIC Menu
Vehicles Equipped With Passive Entry

• Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
arrow button to
START/STOP button and cycle the ignition to the • Push and release the RIGHT
access
the
”Oil
Life”
screen.
ON/RUN position (Do not start the engine.)
arrow button for one
• Push and release the DOWN
arrow button to • Push and hold the RIGHT
second to access the ”Oil Life Reset” screen.
scroll downward through the main menu to “Vehicle Info”.
• Push and hold the DOWN
arrow button until the
• Push and release the RIGHT
arrow button to
screen shows 100% oil life.
access the ”Oil Life” screen.
• Push and release the Up arrow button to exit the EVIC
• Push and hold the RIGHT
arrow button to reset the
screen.
gauge and numeric display to 100% for ”Oil Life.”
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
• Push and release the Up arrow button to exit the EVIC start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
screen.
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
Vehicles Not Equipped With Passive Entry
• Without pushing the brake pedal, cycle the ignition to
the ON/RUN position (Do not start the engine.)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

332 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

DID’s compass/outside temp line. Examples of this
message type are #Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out#
The DRIVER INFORMATION DISPLAY (DID) features an
and #Low Tire Pressure#.
interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster.
• Unstored Messages
The main display area will normally display the main
menu or the screens of a selected feature of the main This message type is displayed indefinitely or until the
menu. The main display area also displays #pop up# condition that activated the message is cleared. Examples
messages that consist of approximately 60 possible warn- of this message type are #Turn Signal On# (if a turn signal
ing or information messages. These pop up messages fall is left on) and #Lights On# (if driver leaves the vehicle).
into several categories:
• Unstored Messages Until RUN
DRIVER INFORMATION DISPLAY DID

• Five Second Stored Messages

When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of
message takes control of the main display area for five
seconds and then returns to the previous screen. Most of
the messages of this type are then stored (as long as the
condition that activated it remains active) and can be
reviewed from the #Messages# main menu item. As long
as there is a stored message, an #i# will be displayed in the

When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of message takes control of the main display area for five seconds

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 333

and then returns to the previous screen. An example of this • Stored Messages
message type is #Automatic High Beams On#.
• Screen Setup
Four Button DID — If Equipped
This system allows the driver to select a variety of useful
information by pushing the switches mounted on the
steering wheel. The DID consists of the following main
menu items:

• Speedometer

• Analog Vehicle Speed
• Vehicle Info

• Fuel Economy
• Trip A

Driver Information Display DID Cluster

• Trip B

• Audio
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

334 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

The system allows the driver to select information by • UP Arrow Button
pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering
Push and release the UP arrow button to scroll
wheel:
upward through the main menu and submenus (Fuel Economy, Trip A, Trip B, Stored
Messages, Screen Set Up).
• DOWN Arrow Button

Push and release the DOWN arrow button to
scroll downward through the main menu and
sub-menus (Fuel Economy, Trip A, Trip B,
Stored Messages, Screen Set Up).

• RIGHT Arrow Button
DID Steering Wheel Buttons (Four–Button DID
Controls)

Push and release the RIGHT arrow button to
access the information screens or sub-menu
screens of a main menu item. Push and hold
the RIGHT arrow button for two seconds to
reset displayed/selected features that can be reset.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 335

• LEFT Arrow Button

Push the LEFT arrow button to return to the
main menu from an info screen or sub-menu
item.

DID Displays
The DID displays are located in the center portion of the
cluster and consists of the follow sections:

1 — Speedometer (Digital or Analog) (km/h or mph)
2 — Main Screen — The inner ring of the display will
illuminate in grey under normal conditions, yellow for
non critical warnings, red for critical warnings and white
for on demand information.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

336 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

3 — Selectable Information (Compass, Temp, Range to •
Empty, Trip A, Trip B, Average MPG)
•
4 — Menu Titles / Odometer
•
5 — Menu Set (Selectable Icons)
•
6 — Shift Lever Status (PRNDL)
•
7 — Reconfigurable Telltales
•
9 — Sub-menu Current Position — Whenever there are
•
sub-menus available, the position within the sub-menus
•
is shown here.
DID Messages

• Front Seatbelts Unbuckled

• Driver Seatbelt Unbuckled

• Passenger Seatbelt Unbuckled
• Service Airbag System

Traction Control Off
Washer Fluid Low
Oil Pressure Low
Oil Change Due
Fuel Low
Service Antilock Brake System
Service Electronic Throttle Control
Service Power Steering

• Cruise Off

• Cruise Ready

• Cruise Set To XXX MPH

• Tire Pressure Screen With Low Tire(s) “Inflate Tire to
XX”
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 337

• Service Tire Pressure System

• Remote Start Active Key to Run

• Brake Fluid Low

• Remote Start Aborted Fuel Low

• Parking Brake Engaged

• Service Electronic Braking System
• Engine Temperature Hot

• Service Electronic Throttle Control
• Lights On

• Right Turn Signal Light Out
• Left Turn Signal Light Out
• Turn Signal On

• Vehicle Not In Park
• Key In Ignition

• Key In Ignition Lights On

• Remote Start Active Push Start Button
• Remote Start Aborted Too Cold

• Remote Start Aborted Door Open

• Remote Start Aborted Hood Open

• Remote Start Aborted Trunk Open

• Remote Start Aborted Time Expired

• Remote Start Disabled Start to Reset
• Service Airbag System

• Service Airbag Warning Light
• Driver Seatbelt Unbuckled

• Passenger Seatbelt Unbuckled
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

338 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• Front Seatbelts Unbuckled

• Service Shifter

• Doors Open

• Transmission Too Cold Idle With Engine On

• Door Open

• Engage Park Brake to Prevent Rolling

• Trunk Open

• Washer Fluid Low

The Reconfigurable Telltales section is divided into the
white telltales area on the right, yellow telltales in the
middle, and red telltales on the left.

• Gear Not Available
• Shift Not Allowed

• Shift to Neutral then Drive or Reverse

DID Yellow Telltales

• Autostick Unavailable Service Required

This area will show reconfigurable yellow caution telltales. These telltales include:

• Transmission Getting Hot Press Brake

• Low Fuel Telltale

• Automatic Unavailable Use Autostick Service Req.
• Trans. Hot Stop Safely Shift to Park Wait to Cool
• Transmission Cool Ready to Drive

When the fuel level reaches approximately 2.0 gal
(7.5 L) this light will turn on, and remain on until
fuel is added.

• Service Transmission

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 339

• Windshield Washer Fluid Low Indicator

CAUTION!

This telltale will turn on to indicate the windshield washer fluid is low.

• Transmission Temperature Warning Telltale — If
Equipped
This telltale indicates that the transmission
fluid temperature is running hot. This may
occur with severe usage, such as trailer towing.
If this telltale turns on, safely pull over and
stop the vehicle. Then, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and run the engine at idle or faster until the light
turns off.

Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature Warning Telltale illuminated will eventually
cause severe transmission damage or transmission
failure.

WARNING!
If the Transmission Temperature Warning Telltale is
illuminated and you continue operating the vehicle,
in some circumstances you could cause the fluid to
boil over, come in contact with hot engine or exhaust
components and cause a fire.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

340 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

DID Red Telltales
This area will show reconfigurable red telltales. These
telltales include:

• Charging System Telltale

This telltale shows the status of the electrical
charging system. If the telltale stays on or comes
on
while
driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non• Door Ajar
essential electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at
This telltale turns on when one or more doors idle). If the charging system telltale remains on, it means
are ajar. The telltale will show which doors are that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the
ajar.
charging system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See
an authorized dealer.
• Oil Pressure Warning Telltale
This telltale indicates low engine oil pressure. If • If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting
Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”.
the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut
off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound • Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Telltale
when this light turns on.
This telltale informs you of a problem with the
• Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If the
This light does not show how much oil is in the engine.
telltale comes on while driving, have the sysThe engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
tem checked by an authorized dealer.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 341

• If a problem is detected, the telltale will come on while • If the telltale turns on while driving, safely pull over
the engine is running. Cycle the ignition key when the
and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it
off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and
vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is
idle the vehicle. If the temperature reading does not
placed in the PARK position. The telltale should turn
return to normal, turn the engine off immediately and
off.
call for service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in
• If the telltale remains lit with the engine running, your
“What To Do In Emergencies” for more information.
vehicle will usually be drivable. However, see an
authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. If the • Electric Power Steering Malfunction
telltale is flashing when the engine is running, immeThis telltale is on when the Electric Power
diate service is required. You may experience reduced
Steering is not operating and needs service.
performance, an elevated/rough idle or engine stall
and your vehicle may require towing.
DID White Telltales
• Engine Temperature Warning Telltale
This telltale warns of an overheated engine condition. As temperatures rise and the gauge approaches H, this telltale will illuminate and a single
chime will sound after reaching a set threshold.

• Electronic Speed Control ON

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

This telltale will illuminate white when the electronic speed control is ON. For further information, refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle.”

342 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
the Analog or Digital display icon is highlighted in the
• Electronic Speed Control SET
DID. Push and release the RIGHT arrow button to change
This telltale will illuminate green when the the display between analog and digital.
electronic speed control is SET. For further
information, refer to “Electronic Speed Con- Vehicle Speed MPH / km/h
trol” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle.”
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow
button until the Vehicle Speed icon is highAnalog Or Digital Speedometer Selection
lighted in the DID. Push the RIGHT arrow
button to view a digital display of the current
Full Speedometer Analog Icon
speed in MPH or km/h. Pushing the RIGHT arrow
button a second time will toggle the unit of measure
between mph or km/h. Push the LEFT arrow button to
return to the main menu.
Full Speedometer Digital Icon
DID Green Telltales

NOTE: Changing the unit of measure in the Vehicle
Speed menu will not change the unit of measure in the
DID.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 343

Vehicle Info

Fuel Economy

Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow
button until the Vehicle Info icon is highlighted
in the DID. Push and release the RIGHT arrow
to scroll through the following information
sub-menus using the UP and DOWN arrows:
Vehicle Info Sub Menus

Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow
button until the Fuel Economy icon is highlighted. Push the RIGHT arrow button and the
next screen will display the following:
• Average Fuel Economy
• Range To Empty (RTE)

Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
#Tire Pressure# is highlighted in the DID. Press and • Current Fuel Economy
release the RIGHT arrow button and one of the following
will be displayed:
• Tire Pressure

• Coolant Temp
• Oil Temp
• Oil Life

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

344 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Fuel Economy Analog Display

Fuel Economy Digital Display

The DID has the capability of displaying an interactive
flower through the Fuel Economy sub-menu which will
add one flower petal for every 2.5 Miles Per Gallon
(MPG) (1.06 km per liter (km/l) increment. Once the
vehicle reached 30 MPG the DID will display a full
flower.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 345

Fuel Economy MPG Flower Analog Display

Fuel Economy MPG Flower Digital Display

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

346 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Trip A

Trip B
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow
button until the Trip A icon/title is highlighted
in the DID. The Trip A information will display
the following:

Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow
button until the Trip B icon/title is highlighted
in the DID. The Trip B information will display
the following:

• Distance mi or km/h

• Elapsed Time

• Average. mpg or L/100km

• Average. mpg or L/100 km

Hold the RIGHT arrow button to reset all the informa- Hold the RIGHT arrow button to reset all the information.
tion.
Push the DOWN arrow button to enter Trip B.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 347

Stored Messages
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow
button until the Messages display icon is highlighted in the DID. This feature shows the
number of stored warning messages. Pushing
the RIGHT arrow button will allow you to see what the
stored messages are. Push the LEFT arrow button to
return to the Main Menu.
Screen Setup
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow
button until the Screen Setup display icon is
highlighted in the DID. Push and release the
RIGHT arrow button to enter the Screen Setup
submenu. The Screen Setup feature allows you to change
what information is displayed in the instrument cluster
as well as the location that information is displayed.

Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
the Screen Setup display icon is highlighted in the DID.
Push and release the RIGHT arrow button to enter the
Screen Setup submenu. The Screen Setup feature allows
you to change the location that information is displayed
within the instrument cluster. Use the UP and DOWN
buttons to highlight a screen setup location (i.e., Upper
Left, Upper Right, etc.) then push the RIGHT arrow
button to select the location and make changes. Push the
UP and DOWN buttons to select the information you
would like to display in that location (i.e., Date, Time,
Outside Temp, etc.) and push the RIGHT arrow button to
save the display setting. You can push the LEFT arrow
button at any time to back out of a sub-menu selection.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

348 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

NOTE: The Screen Setup items are only available at
speeds less than 5 mph (8 km/h). All other menu items are
not active when in Screen Setup. If the vehicle is shifted
into gear, this feature is locked out and the main screen will
display “Screen Setup Unavailable While In Motion”.

• Upper Left

Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items

Time

• Speedometer

Range To Empty (RTE)

None

Compass
Outside Temp (default setting)

Analog 1

Average MPG

Analog 2

Current MPG

Digital 1 (default setting)

Trip A

Digital 2

Trip B

• Gear Display

• Upper Right

Standard (PRND –/+) (default setting)

None

Single Character (D)

Compass (default setting)

Word (Drive)

Outside Temp
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 349

Time

Outside Temp

Range To Empty (RTE)

Time

Average MPG

• Restore To Defaults (Restores All Settings To Default Settings)

Current MPG
Trip A
Trip B
• Lower Left

None (default setting)
Compass
Outside Temp
Time
• Lower Right

None (default setting)

Cancel
Okay
Oil Change Indicator
• Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Oil Change Due” message will
flash in the DID display for approximately 10 seconds
after a single chime has sounded, to indicate the next
scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent
upon your personal driving style.

Compass
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

350 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• Unless reset, this message will continue to display
each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN
position or cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position
if equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™. To turn off the
message temporarily, push and release the MENU
button. To reset the oil change indicator system (after
performing the scheduled maintenance) refer to the
following procedure.
Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go™

2. Fully push the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.
Using The DID Menu
Vehicles Equipped With Passive Entry
• Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button and cycle the ignition to the
ON/RUN position (Do not start the engine.)

1. Without pushing the brake pedal, cycle the ignition to • Push and release the DOWN
arrow button to
the ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
scroll downward through the main menu to “Vehicle Info”.
2. Fully push the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
within 10 seconds.
• Push and release the RIGHT
arrow button to
access the ”Oil Life” screen.
3. Cycle the ignition to the OFF/LOCK position.
Vehicles Not Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go™
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position (do
not start the engine).

• Push and hold the RIGHT
arrow button for one
second to access the ”Oil Life Reset” screen.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 351

• Push and hold the DOWN
arrow button to reset • Push and hold the DOWN
arrow button to reset
the gauge and numeric display to 100% for ”Oil
the gauge and numeric display to 100% for ”Oil
Life.”
Life.”
• Push and release the Up arrow button to exit the DID • Push and release the Up arrow button to exit the DID
screen.
screen.
Vehicles Not Equipped With Passive Entry

NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
• Without pushing the brake pedal, cycle the ignition to start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
the ON/RUN position (Do not start the engine.)
arrow button to Uconnect® SETTINGS
• Push and release the DOWN
scroll downward through the main menu to “Ve- The Uconnect® system uses a combination of buttons on
hicle Info”.
the touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate that allows
• Push and release the RIGHT
arrow button to you to access and change the customer programmable
features.
access the ”Oil Life” screen.
• Push and hold the RIGHT
arrow button for one Buttons On The Faceplate
second to access the ”Oil Life Reset” screen.
Buttons on the faceplate are located below the Uconnect®
system in the center of the instrument panel. In addition,
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

352 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

there is a Scroll/Enter control knob located on the right
side of the Climate Controls in the center of the instrument panel. Turn the control knob to scroll through
menus and change settings (i.e., 30, 60, 90), press the
center of the control knob one or more times to select or
change a setting (i.e., ON, OFF).

equipped such as Display, Clock, Safety & Driving Assistance, Lights, Doors & Locks, Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start, Engine Off Operation, Compass Settings,
Audio, Phone/Bluetooth and SIRIUS Setup.
NOTE: Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a
time.

Buttons On The Touchscreen

When making a selection, press the button on the touchButtons on the touchscreen are accessible on the screen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired
mode press and release the preferred setting until a
Uconnect® Touchscreen.
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect®
setting has been selected.
System 8.4 Settings
Once the setting is complete press the Back Arrow button
Press the More button on the touchscreen, then press the
on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu or
Settings button on the touchscreen to display the menu
press the X button on the touchscreen to close out of the
setting screen. In this mode the Uconnect® system allows
settings screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow buttons
you to access programmable features that may be
on the touchscreens on the right side of the screen will
allow you to toggle up or down through the available
settings.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 353

point on the scale between the + and – buttons on the
touchscreens. Then press the back arrow button on the
After pressing the Display button on the touchscreen the
touchscreen.
following settings will be available.
• Display Brightness With Headlights OFF
• Display Mode
Display

When in this display, you may select the brightness with
the headlights off. Adjust the brightness with the + and –
setting buttons on the touchscreens or by selecting any
point on the scale between the + and – buttons on the
touchscreens. Then press the back arrow button on the
NOTE: When Day or Night is selected for the Display touchscreen.
Mode, the usage of the Parade Mode feature will cause
• Set Language
the radio to activate the Display Brightness Day control
even though the headlights are on.
When in this display, you may select one of three languages
for all display nomenclature, including the trip functions
• Display Brightness With Headlights ON
and the navigation system (if equipped). Press the Set
When in this display, you may select the brightness with Language button on the touchscreen and then press the
the headlights on. Adjust the brightness with the + and – desired language button on the touchscreen until a checksetting buttons on the touchscreens or by selecting any mark appears next to the language, showing that setting
When in this display you may select one of the auto
display settings. To change Mode status, press and release the Day, Night or Auto button on the touchscreen.
Then press the back arrow button on the touchscreen.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

354 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the • Touchscreen Beep
touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the
• Units
sound heard when a press screen button (button on the
touchscreen) is pressed. Press the Touchscreen Beep
When in this display, you may select to have the EVIC,
button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears
odometer, and navigation system (if equipped) changed
next to the setting, showing that setting has been sebetween US and Metric units of measure. Press US or
lected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to
Metric until a check-mark appears next to the setting,
return to the previous menu.
showing that setting has been selected. Press the back
arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous • Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster — If Equipped
menu.
When this feature is selected, the turn-by-turn directions
• Voice Response Length
will appear in the display as the vehicle approaches a
designated turn within a programmed route. To make
When in this display, you may change the Voice Reyour selection, press the Navigation Turn-By-Turn In
sponse Length settings. To change the Voice Response
Cluster button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark
Length, press the Brief or Detailed button on the touchappears next to the setting, showing that setting has been
screen until a check-mark appears next to the setting,
selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen
showing that setting has been selected. Press the back
to return to the previous menu.
arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous
menu.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 355

return to the previous menu or press the “X” button on
the touchscreen to close out of the settings screen.

Clock

After pressing the Clock button on the touchscreen the
• Set Time Minutes
following settings will be available.
• Sync With GPS Time — If Equipped

When in this display, you may adjust the minutes. The
“Sync with GPS Time” button on the touchscreen must be
unchecked. To make your selection press the “+” or “–”
buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the minutes up or
down. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to
return to the previous menu or press the “X” button on
the touchscreen to close out of the settings screen.

When in this display, you may automatically have the
radio set the time. To change the Sync with GPS Time
setting press the “Sync with GPS Time” button on the
touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the
setting, indicating that the setting has been selected. Press
the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the
previous menu.
• Time Format
• Set Time Hours

When in this display, you may adjust the hours. The
“Sync with GPS Time” button on the touchscreen must be
unchecked. To make your selection press the “+” or “–”
buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the hours up or
down. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to

When in this display, you may select the time format
display setting. Press the “Time Format” button on the
touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the 12hrs
or 24hrs setting, indicating that the setting has been
selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen
to return to the previous menu.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

356 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Assist status, press and release the OFF, Sound Only or
Sounds and Display button. Then press the back arrow
When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the
button on the touchscreen. Refer to “ParkSense® Rear
digital clock in the status bar. To change the Show Time
Park Assist” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Status setting press the “Show Time in Status Bar” button
Vehicle” for system function and operating information.
on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to
setting, indicating that the setting has been selected. Press • Blind Spot Alert — If Equipped
the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the When this feature is selected, the Blind Spot Alert feature
previous menu.
can be set to Off, Lights or Lights and Chime. The Blind
• Show Time In Status Bar — If Equipped

Safety & Driving Assistance
After pressing the Safety/Assistance button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available.
• Park Assist — If Equipped

The Rear Park Assist system will scan for objects behind
the vehicle when the transmission shift lever is in REVERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph
(18 km/h). The system can be enabled with Sound Only,
Sound and Display, or turned OFF. To change the Park

Spot Alert feature can be activated in “Lights” mode.
When this mode is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor
(BSM) system is activated and will only show a visual
alert in the outside mirrors. When “Lights & Chime”
mode is activated, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) will
show a visual alert in the outside mirrors as well as an
audible alert when the turn signal is on. When “Off” is
selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is deactivated. To change the Blind Spot Alert status, press the
Off, Lights or Lights & Chime button on the touchscreen.
Then press the back arrow button on the touchscreen.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 357

NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in
the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is
not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor
alignment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will result
in the BSM not operating to specification.
• ParkView® Backup Camera

Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView® Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen
image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever
the shift lever is put into REVERSE. The image will be
displayed on the radio touchscreen display along with a
caution note to “check entire surroundings” across the
top of the screen. After five seconds, this note will
disappear. The ParkView® camera is located on the rear
of the vehicle above the rear License plate. To make your
selection, press the ParkView® Backup Camera button on
the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to

setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the
back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the
previous menu.
• Rain Sensing Auto Wipers

When this feature is selected, the system will automatically activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture
on the windshield. To make your selection, press the Rain
Sensing button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark
appears next to setting, showing that setting has been
selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen
to return to the previous menu.
Lights
After pressing the Lights button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available.
• Interior Accent Lighting

When this feature is selected, the interior accent lighting
surrounding the instrument panel will illuminate. To

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

358 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

make your selection, press the Interior Accent Lighting
button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears
next to setting, showing that setting has been selected.
Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return
to the previous menu.
• Headlight Illumination On Approach

When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
and remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when the doors
are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter. To change the Illuminated Approach status,
press the + or - button on the touchscreen to select your
desired time interval. Press the back arrow button on the
touchscreen to return to the previous menu.

turned off if they were turned on by this feature. To make
your selection, press the Headlights With Wipers button
on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the
back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the
previous menu.
• Auto Dim High Beams — If Equipped

When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights
will deactivate automatically under certain conditions. To
make your selection, press the Auto High Beams button
on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the
back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the
previous menu. Refer to “Lights/Automatic High Beam
• Headlights With Wipers — If Equipped
Headlamp Control— If Equipped” in “Understanding
When this feature is selected, and the headlight switch is The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on.
The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 359

• Daytime Running Lights

Doors & Locks

When this feature is selected, the headlights will turn on
whenever the engine is running. To make your selection,
press the Daytime Running Lights button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow
button on the touchscreen to return to the previous
menu.

After pressing the Doors & Locks button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available.
• Auto Unlock On Exit

When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when
the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the
PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is
opened. To make your selection, press the Auto Unlock
• Flash Lights With Lock
On Exit button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark
When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash appears next to setting, indicating that the setting has
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. This feature may be screen to return to the previous menu.
selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature • Flash Lights With Lock
selected. To make your selection, press the Flash Lamps
with Lock button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash
appears next to setting, showing that setting has been when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote
selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. To make your selection,
to return to the previous menu.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

360 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

press the Flash Lights With Lock button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting has been selected. Press the back arrow
button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
• Sound Horn With Lock

When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the remote start is activated. To make your selection,
press the Sound Horn With Lock button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting has been selected. Press the back
arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous
menu.

indicating that the setting has been selected. Press the
back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the
previous menu.
• 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks

When 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is selected, only the
driver’s door will unlock on the first press of the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter UNLOCK button. When
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is selected, you must press
the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the
passenger’s doors. When Unlock All Doors On 1st Press
is selected, all of the doors will unlock on the first press
of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button.

• Sound Horn With Remote Start

When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the remote start is activated. To make your selection,
press the Sound Horn With Remote Start button on the
touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting,
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 361

NOTE: If the vehicle is programmed 1st Press Of Key Fob
Unlocks, all doors will unlock no matter which Passive
Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If 1st Press Of
Key Fob Unlocks is programmed, only the driver’s door
will unlock when the driver’s door is grasped. With
Passive Entry, if 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is programmed pressing the handle more than once will only
result in the driver’s door opening. If driver door first is
selected, once the driver door is opened, the interior door
lock/unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors (or
use RKE transmitter).

touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting,
indicating that the setting has been selected. Press the
back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the
previous menu. Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in
“Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”.
• Interior Motion Detection Alarm

This feature will sound the vehicles alarm when motion
is detected inside the vehicle while locked. To make your
selection, press the Interior Motion Detection Alarm
button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears
next to setting, indicating that the setting has been
• Passive Entry
selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s to return to the previous menu.
door(s) without having to press the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter lock or unlock buttons. To make
your selection, press the Passive Entry button on the

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

362 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

selection, press the Auto Heated Seats button on the
touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting,
After pressing the Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start
showing that setting has been selected. Press the back
button on the touchscreen the following settings will be
arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous
available.
menu.
• Horn With Remote Start
Engine Off Options
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the remote start is activated. To make your selection, After pressing the “Engine Off Options” button on the
press the Sound Horn With Remote Start button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available.
touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, • Engine Off Power Delay
showing that setting has been selected. Press the back
When this feature is selected, the power window
arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous
switches, radio, Uconnect® system (if equipped), DVD
menu.
video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped),
• Auto-On Driver Heated Seat & Steering Wheel With and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes
Vehicle Start — If Equipped
after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening either front
door will cancel this feature. To change the Engine Off
When this feature is selected the driver’s heated seat and
Power Delay status press the “0 seconds,” “45 seconds,#
heated steering wheel will automatically turn on when
“5 minutes” or “10 minutes” button on the touchscreen.
temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C). To make your
Then press the back arrow button on the touchscreen.
Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 363

NOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the top of
the instrument panel, such as iPod’s, Mobile Phones,
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to have
Laptops and Radar Detectors. This is where the compass
the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when
module is located, and it can cause interference with the
exiting the vehicle. To change the Headlight Off Delay
compass sensor, and it may give false readings.
status press the “+” or “–” button on the touchscreen to
select your desired time interval. Press the back arrow
button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
• Headlight Off Delay

Compass Settings
After pressing the Compass Settings button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available.
• Variance

Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
North and Geographic North. To compensate for the
differences the variance should be set for the zone where
the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly set,
the compass will automatically compensate for the differences, and provide the most accurate compass heading.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

364 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• Perform Compass Calibration

Press the Calibration button on the touchscreen to change
this setting. This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the need to manually reset the compass. When the
vehicle is new, the compass may appear erratic and the
EVIC will display CAL until the compass is calibrated.
You may also calibrate the compass by pressing the ON
button on the touchscreen and completing one or more
360-degree turns (in an area free from large metal or
metallic objects) until the CAL indicator displayed in the
EVIC turns off. The compass will now function normally.

• Equalizer

When in this display you may adjust the Bass, Mid and
Treble settings. Adjust the settings with the + and –
setting buttons on the touchscreens or by selecting any
point on the scale between the + and – buttons on the
touchscreens. Then press the back arrow button on the
touchscreen.
NOTE: Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide your
finger up or down to change the setting as well as press
directly on the desired setting.
• Speed Adjusted Volume

Audio

This feature increases or decreases volume relative to
After pressing the Audio button on the touchscreen the vehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted Volume
press the Off, 1, 2 or 3 button on the touchscreen. Then
following settings will be available.
press the back arrow button on the touchscreen.
• Balance/Fade
When in this display you may adjust the Balance and
Fade settings.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 365

• Music Info Cleanup

SiriusXM Setup

This feature helps organize music files for optimized music After pressing the “SIRIUS Setup” button on the touchnavigation. To make your selection, press the Music Info screen the following settings will be available.
Cleanup button on the touchscreen, select On or Off fol- • Channel Skip
lowed by pressing the back arrow button on the touchscreen.
SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of
• Surround Sound — If Equipped
channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude
This feature provides simulated surround sound mode. undesirable channels while scanning. To make your selecTo make your selection, press the Surround Sound button tion, press the “Channel Skip” button on the touchscreen,
on the touchscreen, select On or Off followed by pressing select the channels you would like to skip followed by
the back arrow button on the touchscreen.
pressing the back arrow button on the touchscreen.
Phone/Bluetooth®

• Subscription Information

After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth®” button on the New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free
touchscreen the following settings will be available.
limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio
with your radio. Following the expiration of the free
• Paired Devices
services, it will be necessary to access the information on
This feature shows which phones are paired to the the Subscription Information screen in order to rePhone/Bluetooth® system. For further information, refer subscribe.
to the Uconnect® Supplement.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

366 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Press the Subscription Info button on the touchscreen to Uconnect® 200 — AM/FM STEREO RADIO WITH
access the Subscription Information screen.
CD PLAYER (MP3 AUX JACK) AND SiriusXM
RADIO
Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To
reactivate your service, either call the number listed on
the screen or visit the provider online.
NOTE: SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription.

Uconnect® 200

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 367

Operating Instructions — Radio Mode

SEEK Buttons

to search for
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or Press and release the SEEK buttons
the next listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the
ACC position to operate the radio.
right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
down. The radio will remain tuned to the new station
Push the ON/VOLUME
control knob to turn on the until you make another selection. Holding either butcontrol knob a ton will bypass stations without stopping until you
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME
second time to turn off the radio.
release it.
Electronic Volume Control

TIME Button

The electronic volume control turns continuously (360 Push the TIME button to alternate display of the time and
degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning radio frequency.
the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
Clock Setting Procedure
volume, and to the left decreases it.
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours are
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
highlighted.
set at the same volume level as last played.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

368 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side ENTER/ INFO Button
BROWSE control knob to set the minutes. The minutes Push the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call
will highlight.
letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/ message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).
SCROLL control knob.
RW/FF
5. To exit, press the TIME button or press the BACK Pushing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
button to return to the previous menu.
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
The clock can also be set by pressing the MENU button. direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
For vehicles equipped with satellite radio, press the AM or FM frequencies.
MENU button until CLOCK appears in the display. TUNE Control
Using the ENTER/BROWSE button select SET TIME,
and then follow the above procedure, starting at Step 2. Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
NOTE: Time format has the options of 12HR or 24HR.
Selecting one of these options will change the way the
clock is displayed.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 369

Push the ENTER/BROWSE button a second time and
MID RANGE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to
To set the Bass, Mid Range, Treble, Balance or Fade
settings press the AUDIO button to access the Audio decrease the mid-range tones.
sub-menu.
Push the ENTER/BROWSE button a third time and
TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
The Audio sub-menu can also be reached by pressing the
MENU button until AUDIO appears in the display. Push knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the treble tones.
the ENTER/BROWSE button to select the AUDIO menu
and use the TUNE/SCROLL knob to highlight select Push the ENTER/BROWSE button a fourth time and
Bass, Mid Range, Treble, Balance or Fade. Once the BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL condesired selection is highlighted, push the ENTER/ trol knob clockwise or counterclockwise to adjust the
BROWSE button to select the item and use the TUNE/ sound level from the Left or Right side speakers.
SCROLL knob to adjust the setting.
Push the ENTER/BROWSE button a fifth time and FADE
Push the ENTER/BROWSE button and BASS will dis- will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob
play. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise to clockwise or counterclockwise to adjust the sound level
increase or counterclockwise to decrease the bass tones. between the front and rear speakers.
Setting The Bass, Mid Range, Treble, Balance Or
Fade

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

370 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Press the BACK button to exit Bass, Mid Range, Treble,
Balance or Fade.
MENU Button

ENTER/BROWSE button to set the minutes. The minutes will highlight. Adjust the minutes using the right
side TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Push the ENTER/
BROWSE button to save time change.

Pressing the MENU button allows you to scroll between
the setting sub-menus. Once the desired sub-menu set- Player Mode
ting is highlighted push the TUNE/SCROLL knob to • Player Browse — Selecting Player Browse will go to
select the setting. The following items are selectable:
the appropriate browse menu depending on the device
currently playing (will function the same as pressing
Radio Mode
the browse button while in that mode). This will only
• Audio — Selecting the Audio sub-menu will allow you
appear in the menu if the device currently playing can
to adjust the Bass, Mid Range, Treble, Balance or Fade,
support these features.
just like pushing the Audio hard control. If the BACK
button is pressed the radio will return to the Main • Shuffle (SHFL) — This function shuffles (randomizes
the order of the files). This will only appear in the
Menu.
menu if the device currently playing can support these
• Clock — Selecting Clock will allow you to set the
features.
clock. Adjust the hours by turning the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob. After adjusting the hours, push the • Repeat (RPT) — When Repeat is activated, the currently playing song will begin again when it ends. It
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 371

ENTER/BROWSE button to set the minutes. The minwill continue to cycle through the same song until
repeat is turned Off. Repeat will be turned off once one
utes will highlight. Adjust the minutes using the right
side TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Push the ENTER/
for the following conditions are met: 1) The source is
BROWSE button to save time change.
ejected 2) A different track list within that source is
initiated 3) The REPEAT button is toggled OFF. This
System Info
will only appear in the menu if the device currently
• Selecting System Info will display the software verplaying can support these features.
sion, serial number and SIRIUS ID.
• Audio — Selecting the Audio sub-menu will allow you
to adjust the Bass, Mid Range, Treble, Balance or Fade, RADIO Button
just like pressing the Audio hard control. If the BACK Press the button to select either AM, FM and Satellite
button is pressed the radio will return to the Main mode if equipped.
Menu.
Buttons 1 - 5
• Clock — Selecting Clock will allow you to set the
clock. Adjust the hours by turning the TUNE/SCROLL These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
control knob. After adjusting the hours, push the commit to pushbutton memory AM (A, B, C), FM (A, B, C)
and Satellite — 15 AM, 15 FM and 15 SAT stations.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

372 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

To Set The Pushbutton Memory

Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And
When you are receiving a station that you wish to MP3 Audio Play
commit to pushbutton memory, press and hold the NOTE:
button (1–5) you wish to lock onto this station for three
• The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or ACC
seconds.
position to operate the radio.
You may add a second or third station to each pushbut• This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
ton by repeating the above procedure with this exception:
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
Press the A–B–C button to select the A, B or C mode. Each
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
button can be set for up to 3 stations in AM, FM and Sat.
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
This allows a total of 15 AM, 15 FM and 15 SAT stations
to be stored into pushbutton memory.
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
Pressing the Player button will allow you to switch from label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
AM/FM modes to Player mode (CD, USB/iPOD®, AUX, the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
Bluetooth®).
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
Player Button

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 373

If you insert a disc with the ignition ON/RUN and the
radio ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode
and begin to play when you insert the disc. The display
will show the track number, and index time in minutes
and seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.

This CD player will accept 4–3/4 inch (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.

Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.

A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
SEEK Button

CAUTION!

EJECT Button — Ejecting A CD

If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.

Push the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Push the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pushing and holding the SEEK
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in
CD and MP3 modes.
TIME Button
Push this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

374 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

settings will be dependent of the current source. If shuffle
is on in iPod®, moving to CD will not have shuffle On
Push and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
unless it was previously set to On.
begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or
another CD button is pushed. The RW (Reverse) button Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ranworks in a similar manner.
domly selected track.
RW/FF

Shuffle (SHFL) And Repeat (RPT)

Notes On Playing MP3 Files

This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in
random order to provide an interesting change of pace.
Press the MENU button to display the Player menu. Use
the TUNE/SCROLL knob to scroll to the Shuffle or
Repeat sub-menu. Once the Shuffle or Repeat sub-menu
setting is highlighted push the ENTER/BROWSE button
to select the setting and turn it on or off.

The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
file recording media and formats are limited. When
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restrictions.
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, WMA and CDDA+MP3.

Shuffle and Repeat cannot be active at the same time. If
one is selected while the other is currently active the Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
currently active one will be changed to OFF. These The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 375

When reading discs recorded using formats other than Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read • Level 1: 12 (including a separator #.# and a threefiles properly and may be unable to play the file norcharacter extension)
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator #.# and a threeThe radio uses the following limits for file systems:
character extension)
• Maximum number of folder levels: 8
Multi-session disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multi-session discs may contain combinations of normal
• Maximum number of files: 255
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
• Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file Discs created with an option such as #keep disc open after
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers writing# are most likely multi-session discs. The use of
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to multi-session for CD audio or MP3 playback may result
display the file name and folder name, and will assign in longer disc loading times.
a number instead. With a maximum number of files,
Supported MP3 File Formats
exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this dis- The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 extension as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
play.)
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

376 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rates.
MPEG Specification
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3

MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3

Sampling Frequency (kHz)
48, 44.1, 32

24, 22.05, 16

Bit Rate (kbps)
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32,
24, 16, 8

ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
Playback Of MP3 Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
by the following:
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 377

• Number of files and folders - Loading times will INFO Button (CD Mode For MP3/WMA Play)
increase with more files and folders
Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a Name, and Folder Name (if available).
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option Press the INFO button once more to return to #elapsed
before writing to the disc.
time# priority mode.
Enter/Browse Button (CD Mode For MP3/WMA
Play)

Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or
more and the radio will display song titles for each file.

Pressing the Enter/Browse button will bring up a list of
all folders on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is
done by turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a folder by pressing the ENTER/BROWSE button
will begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the
next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain
playable files).

Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds
to return to #elapsed time# display.

The folder list will time out after five seconds.

Operation Instructions — Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
MP3 player and utilize the vehicle’s audio system to
amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

378 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Pressing the PLAYER button will change the mode to Pressing the PLAYER button will change the mode to
USB when an iPod® or external USB drive is connected.
auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.
Pressing the ENTER/BROWSE button while in USB
mode will bring up a list of available categories within
• The head unit will have no control of the AUX device. the USB. The categories will consist of: Playlists, Artist,
You can only control the volume on the head unit. No Album, Genre, Audiobooks, Podcasts and all Songs..
information about the song will be displayed.
Browsing through the categories will function the same
• The AUX device must be turned on and the device’s as iPod® browse. USB will not have folder browsing.
volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio is not If the USB connected does not have any audio files and
loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the AUX the user selects USB as the device to play audio the screen
audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume will display, “No audio files found.” This messaged is to
down and radio volume up.
be displayed for all devices that do not have audio files
NOTE:

Operation Instructions — Universal Serial Bus
(USB) — If Equipped

when connected and selected.

Security
The USB audio input allows the user to plug in a flash If this radio is installed in a vehicle that does not have a
drive and utilize the vehicle’s audio system to amplify matching Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) an Secuthe source and play through the vehicle speakers.
rity code will need to be entered by the dealer.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 379

CD PLAYER — IF EQUIPPED
The single disc CD player is located in the center console.
NOTE:
• The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position
before the CD player will operate.
• The CD Player is part of the radio for the Uconnect®
200.

CD Player

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

380 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

CD Player Operating Instructions

Uconnect® — If Equipped

If equipped with Uconnect® 8.4, refer to the Uconnect®
8.4 manual for further information.

To insert disc into the player, follow the instructions
shown:
iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL WITH Uconnect®
1. Gently insert the disc with the label facing the rear of VOICE COMMAND — IF EQUIPPED

the vehicle while the light below the loading slot is This feature allows an iPod® or external USB device to be
illuminated. The disc will automatically be pulled into plugged into the USB port.
the CD player.
iPod® control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod®
2. Upon insertion, the disc will begin to play, and the and iPhone® devices. Some iPod® software versions
light below the loading slot will turn off.
may not fully support the iPod® control features. Please
visit Apple’s website for software updates.
EJECT (EJT) Button
If there is a disc in the CD player, press the EJT button If equipped with Uconnect® 8.4, refer to the Uconnect®
and the disc will eject. If you do not remove the disc User’s Manual for further details on iPod®, USB, and
MP3 usage.
within 10 seconds, it will be reloaded.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 381

Connecting The iPod® Or External USB Device
Use the connection cable to connect an iPod® or external
USB device to the vehicle’s USB/AUX connector port
which is located in the center console.

Center Console USB/AUX Connector Port Cable Routing

Center Console USB/AUX Connector Port

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

382 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

NOTE: The center console will have a position where the
iPod® or consumer electronic audio device cable can be
routed through without damaging the cable when closing the lid. A factory cut out space for the cable to be
routed may be located in the base of the center console on
either the front or side. This allows routing of the cable
without damaging it while closing the lid. If a cut out is
not available in the center console base, route the cable
away from the lid latch and in a place that will allow the
lid to close without damaging the cable.

NOTE: If the audio device battery is completely discharged, it may not communicate with the iPod®/USB/
MP3 control system until a minimum charge is attained.
Leaving the audio device connected to the iPod®/USB/
MP3 control system may charge it to the required level.
Using This Feature
By using an iPod® cable, or an external USB device to
connect to the USB port:

• The audio device can be played on the vehicle’s sound
system, providing metadata (artist, track title, album,
Once the audio device is connected and synchronized to
etc.) information on the radio display.
the vehicle’s iPod®/USB/MP3 control system (iPod® or
external USB device may take a few minutes to connect),
• The audio device can be controlled using the radio
the audio device starts charging and is ready for use by
buttons to Play, Browse, and List the iPod® contents.
pressing radio switches, as described below.
• The audio device battery charges when plugged into
the USB/AUX connector (if supported by the specific
audio device).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 383

Controlling The iPod® Or External USB Device
Using Radio Buttons
To enter the iPod®/USB/MP3 control mode and access a
connected audio device, either push the “AUX” button
on the radio faceplate or push the VR button and say
#USB# or #Switch to USB.# Once in the iPod®/USB/MP3
control mode, audio tracks (if available from audio
device) start playing over the vehicle’s audio system.
Play Mode

• Turning it clockwise (forward) by one click, while
playing a track, skips to the next track or press the
VR button and say #Next Track.#
• Turning it counterclockwise (backward) by one click,
will jump to the previous track in the list or press the
VR button and say #Previous Track#
• Jump backward in the current track by pressing and
holding the << RW button. Holding the << RW
button long enough will jump to the beginning of the
current track.

When switched to iPod®/USB/MP3 control mode, the
• Jump forward in the current track by pressing and
iPod® or external USB device automatically starts Play
holding the FF>> button.
mode. In Play mode, the following buttons on the radio
faceplate may be used to control the iPod® or external • A single press backward << RW or forward FF>> will
USB device and display data:
jump backward or forward respectively, for five seconds.
• Use the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to select the next
or previous track.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

384 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

the SHUFFLE button again. To turn SHUFFLE On/Off
• Use the << SEEK button during play mode to jump to
button, wait for
the start of the current track. Pressing the SEEK>>
with Voice Commands, press the
the beep, and say “Shuffle On” or “Shuffle Off.”
button during play mode will jump to the next track in
the list, or press the VR button and say #Next or
List Or Browse Mode
Previous Track.#
During Play mode, pressing any of the buttons described
• While a track is playing, press the INFO button to see below, will bring up Browse mode. List mode enables
the associated metadata (artist, track title, album, etc.) scrolling through the list of menus and tracks on the
for that track. Pressing the INFO button again jumps audio device.
to the next screen of data for that track. Once all
screens have been viewed, the last INFO button press In Browse mode, the radio PRESET buttons are used as
shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod® or external
will go back to the play mode screen on the radio.
USB device.
• Pressing the REPEAT button will change the audio
device mode to repeat the current playing track or • Preset 1 – Playlists
press the VR button and say #Repeat ON# or #Repeat • Preset 2 – Artists
Off.#
• Preset 3 – Albums
• Press the SHUFFLE button to play the selections on
the USB/iPod® device in random order to provide an • Preset 4 – Genres
interesting change of pace. To stop Shuffle Mode, press • Preset 5 – Audiobooks
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 385

• Pressing a PRESET button will display the current list
on the top line and the first item in that list on the
second line.
• To exit Browse mode without making a selection, press
the same PRESET button again to go back to Play
mode.
• Browse button: The Browse button will display the
top level menu of the iPod® or external USB device.
Press and then turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob
to list the top-menu item to be selected and press the
TUNE/SCROLL control knob to select. This will display the next sub-menu list item on the audio device,
then follow the same steps to go to the desired track in
that list. Not all iPod® or external USB device submenu levels are available on this system.
• A-B-C button: For all player devices, pressing the
A-B-C button while browsing will present an ABC
jump feature. The system will show the available first

letters of the item being browsed. If letters do not have
items they will not be shown, “_” will be shown in
their place. After selecting a letter you will be taken to
the first item of that letter within the entire list. When
a browse subcategory is selected and contains no
contents, “No items found” will be displayed on the
screen. This message times out after three seconds, and
will take you back to the submenu you were previously in.

CAUTION!
• Leaving the iPod® or external USB device (or any
supported device) anywhere in the vehicle in extreme heat or cold can alter the operation or damage the device. Follow the device manufacturer’s
guidelines.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

(Continued)

386 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Controlling BTSA Using Radio Buttons

CAUTION! (Continued)
• Placing items on the iPod® or external USB device,
or connections to the iPod® or external USB device
in the vehicle, can cause damage to the device
and/or to the connectors.

WARNING!
Do not plug in or remove the iPod® or external USB
device while driving. Failure to follow this warning
could result in an accident.
Bluetooth® Streaming Audio (BTSA)

To enter BTSA mode, push either “AUX” button on the
radio or push the VR button and say “Bluetooth Streaming Audio.”
Play Mode
When switched to BTSA mode, some audio devices can
start playing music over the vehicle’s audio system, but
some devices require the music to be initiated on the
device first, then it will get streamed to the Uconnect®
phone system. Seven devices can be paired to the
Uconnect® phone system, but just one can be selected
and played.

Music can be streamed from your cellular phone to the Selecting A Different Audio Device
Uconnect® phone system.
1. Push the PHONE button to begin.
Refer to the Uconnect® Radio Supplement for further
2. After the #Ready# prompt and following the beep, say
information on Bluetooth® connectivity.
#Setup#, then say #Select Audio Devices.#
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 387

3. Say the name of the audio device or ask the STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS
Uconnect® phone system to list the audio devices.
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to
Next Track
access the switches.
Use the SEEK UP button, or push the VR button on the
radio and say “Next Track,” to jump to the next music
track on your cellular phone.

Previous Track
Use the SEEK DOWN button, or push the VR button on
the radio and say “Previous Track,” to jump to the
previous music track on your cellular phone.
Browse
Browsing is not available on a Bluetooth® Streaming
Audio (BTSA) device. Only the current song that is
playing will display info.

Remote Sound Controls (Back View Of Steering Wheel)

The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
pushbutton in the center and controls the volume and
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

388 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

mode of the sound system. Pressing the top of the rocker The button located in the center of the left-hand control
switch will increase the volume, and pressing the bottom will tune to the next preset station that you have programmed in the radio preset button.
of the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
Pressing the center button will make the radio switch CD Player
between the various modes available (AM/FM/SAT/ Pushing the top of the switch once will go to the next
CD/HDD/AUX, etc.).
track on the CD. Pushing the bottom of the switch once
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a will go to the beginning of the current track, or to the
pushbutton in the center. The function of the left-hand beginning of the previous track if it is within eight
control is different depending on which mode you are in. seconds after the current track begins to play.
The following describes the left-hand control operation in If you push the switch up or down twice, it plays the
second track; three times, it will play the third, etc.
each mode.
The center button on the left side rocker switch has no
Radio Operation
function for a single-disc CD player. However, when a
Pushing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next multiple-disc CD player is equipped on the vehicle, the
listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch center button will select the next available CD in the
will “Seek” down for the next listenable station.
player.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 389

NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular
To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following disc, it may be damaged (e.g., scratched, reflective coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc)
precautions:
oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the good disc before considering disc player service.
surface.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
wiping from center to edge.
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratch- your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
ing the disc.
by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners, not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
or anti-static sprays.
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
turned down or off during mobile phone operation when
not using Uconnect® (if equipped).
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE

7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

390 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

CLIMATE CONTROLS
The air conditioning and heating system is designed to
make you comfortable in all types of weather. This
system can be operated through either the controls on the
instrument panel or through the Uconnect® 8.4 system
display if equipped.
When the Uconnect® 8.4 system is in different modes
(Radio, Player, Settings, More, etc.) the driver and passenger temperature settings will be indicated at the top of
the display.
Manual Heating And Air Conditioning — If
Equipped

Manual Climate Control Buttons

1. Blower Control

The Manual Temperature Controls consist of a series of
Rotate this control to regulate the amount of air forced
outer rotary dials and inner push knobs.
through the ventilation system in any mode. The blower
speed increases as you move the control to the right from
the “O” (OFF) position. There are seven blower speeds.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 391

2. Recirculation Control
Pressing the Recirculation Control button will temporarily put the system in recirculation mode. This can be used
when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or
high humidity are present. Activating recirculation will
cause the LED in the control button to illuminate.
NOTE:

• Recirculated air is not allowed in Defrost modes. If
the Recirculation button is pressed while in this
mode, the LED indicator will flash several times then
go out. Recirculation will be disabled automatically
is this mode is selected.
• The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection.

• When the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK
• Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make
position, the recirculation feature will be cancelled.
the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur.
3. Temperature Control
Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
• The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp
weather will cause windows to fog on the inside,
because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. Select the outside air position for maximum defogging.
• The A/C will engage automatically to prevent fogging when the recirculation button is pressed and the
mode control is set to panel or Bi-Level.

Rotate this control to regulate the temperature of the air
inside the passenger compartment. Rotating the dial left
into the blue area of the scale indicates cooler temperatures, while rotating right into the red area indicates
warmer temperatures.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

392 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• ECONOMY MODE
NOTE: If your air conditioning performance seems lower
If economy mode is desired, press the A/C button to
than expected, check the front of the A/C condenser
turn OFF the indicator light and the A/C compressor.
located in front of the radiator for an accumulation of dirt
Then, move the temperature control to the desired
or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from behind
temperature and select only Panel, Bi-Level or Floor
the radiator and through the condenser. Fabric front
modes.
fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser,
reducing air conditioning performance.
5. Mode Control (Air Direction)
4. Air Conditioning Control
Rotate this control to choose from several patterns of air
Press this button to engage the Air Conditioning. A light distribution. You can select either a primary mode as
will illuminate when the Air Conditioning system is identified by the symbols on the control, or a blend of
engaged. Rotating the dial left into the blue area of the two of these modes. The closer the setting is to a
scale indicates cooler temperatures, while rotating right particular symbol, the more air distribution you receive
from that mode.
into the red area indicates warmer temperatures.
• Panel
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor will not engage
Air is directed through the outlets in the
until the engine has been running for about 10 seconds.
instrument panel. These outlets can be ad• MAX A/C
justed to direct airflow.
For maximum cooling use the A/C and recirculation
buttons at the same time.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 393

NOTE: The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed
so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers
for maximum airflow to the rear.
• Bi-Level
Air is directed through the panel and floor
outlets.

• Mix

Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and
side window demist outlets. This setting
works best in cold or snowy conditions that
require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is
good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
• Front Defrost
Air is directed through the windshield and side
window demist outlets. Use this mode with maximum blower and temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting.

NOTE: For all settings, except full cold or full hot, there
is a difference in temperature between the upper and
lower outlets. The warmer air flows to the floor outlets.
This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but
cool conditions.
• Floor
Air is directed through the floor outlets with a NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in Mix,
small amount flowing through the defrost and Defrost, or a blend of these modes, even if the Air
Conditioning (A/C) button is not pressed. This dehuside window demist outlets.
midifies the air to help dry the windshield. To improve
fuel economy, use these modes only when necessary.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

394 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

6. Electronic Rear Window Defrost

CAUTION!

Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster
and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator in the button will illuminate when the rear window
defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically
turns off after approximately 15 minutes. For an additional 15 minutes of operation, press the button a second
time.
NOTE:
• You can turn off the heated mirror feature at anytime
by pressing the rear window defroster switch a
second time.
• To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear
window defroster only when the engine is operating.

Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 395

Uconnect® 8.4 Climate Controls — If Equipped

Buttons On The Touchscreen

Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the
The buttons on the faceplate are located below the Uconnect® 8.4 system screen.
Uconnect® 8.4 screen, in the center of the instrument
panel.
Buttons On The Faceplate

Uconnect® 8.4 Automatic Temperature Controls —
Buttons On The Touchscreen
Automatic Climate Controls — Buttons On The
Faceplate
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

396 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Button Descriptions (Applies To Both Buttons On
The Faceplate And Buttons On The Touchscreen)

4. AUTO Operation Button

Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by
adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Performing
Press to change the current setting, the indicator illumi- this function will cause the ATC to switch between
nates when MAX A/C is ON. Performing this function manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic
again will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch into Operation” for more information.
manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator will turn off. 5. Front Defrost Button
1. MAX A/C Button

2. A/C Button
Press and release to change the current Air Conditioning
(A/C) setting, the indicator illuminates when A/C is ON.
Performing this function will cause the automatic operation to switch into manual mode and the AUTO indicator
will turn off.
3. Recirculation Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when ON.

Press and release to change the current airflow setting to
Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this feature is ON. Air comes from the windshield and side
window demist outlets. When the defrost button is
selected, the blower level will increase. Use Defrost mode
with maximum temperature settings for best windshield
and side window defrosting and defogging. Performing
this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual
mode. If the front defrost mode is turned off the climate
system will return the previous setting.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 397

6. Rear Defrost Button
Press and release this button to turn on the rear window
defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped).
An indicator will illuminate when the rear window
defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically
turns off after 15 minutes.

CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
7. Passenger Temperature Control Up Button
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
control. Press the button on the faceplate for warmer
temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and
slide the button on the touchscreen temperature bar
towards the red arrow button on the touchscreen for
warmer temperature settings.
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will
automatically exit Sync.

(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

398 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

8. Passenger Temperature Control Down Button

10. Blower Control

Provides the passenger with independent temperature
control. Press the button on the faceplate for cooler
temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and
slide the button on the touchscreen temperature bar
towards the blue arrow button on the touchscreen for
cooler temperature settings.

Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air forced
through the climate system. There are seven blower speeds
available. Adjusting the blower will cause automatic mode
to switch to manual operation. The speeds can be selected
using either the blower control knob on the faceplate or
buttons on the touchscreens as follows:

NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will Blower Control Knob On The Faceplate
automatically exit Sync.
The blower speed increases as you turn the control
clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The blower
9. SYNC
speed decreases as you turn the blower control knob
Press the Sync button on the touchscreen to toggle the counter-clockwise.
Sync feature On/Off. The Sync indicator is illuminated
when this feature is enabled. Sync is used to synchronize Button On The Touchscreen
the passenger temperature setting with the driver tem- Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting
perature setting. Changing the passenger temperature and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting.
setting while in Sync will automatically exit this feature. Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar
area between the icons.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 399

11. Modes
The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air
comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets,
and demist outlets. The Mode settings are as follows:
• Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument
panel. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air
vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can
be moved up and down or side to side to regulate
airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel located
below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount
of airflow from these outlets.
• Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets
and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is
directed through the defrost and side window
demister outlets.

NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and
warmer air from the floor outlets.
• Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight
amount of air is directed through the defrost
and side window demister outlets.
• Mix Mode
Air comes from the floor, defrost and side
window demist outlets. This mode works best
in cold or snowy conditions.
• Defrost Mode
Air comes from the windshield and side window
demist outlets. Use Defrost mode with maximum
temperature settings for best windshield and side
window defrosting and defogging. When the defrost
mode is selected, the blower level may increase.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

400 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

12. Climate Control OFF Button

Climate Control Functions

Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control A/C (Air Conditioning)
ON/OFF.
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator
to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning
13. Driver Temperature Control Down Button
system. When the air conditioning system is turned on,
Provides the driver with independent temperature concool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into
trol. Push the button for cooler temperature settings.
the cabin. For improved fuel economy, press the A/C
NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically button to turn off the air conditioning and manually
adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same adjust the blower and airflow mode settings.
time.
NOTE:
14. Driver Temperature Control Up Button
• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,
Provides the driver with independent temperature conselect Defrost mode and increase blower speed.
trol. Push the button for warmer temperature settings.
• If your air conditioning performance seems lower than
NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (loadjust the passenger temperature setting at the same
cated in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of
time.
dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from
behind the radiator and through the condenser. Fabric
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 401

front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the Recirculation
condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or
high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired,
MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling perforyou may wish to recirculate interior air by
mance.
pressing the Recirculation control button. The
Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C and the recirculation indicator will illuminate when this button is
prior settings. The button on the touchscreen illuminates selected. Push the button a second time to turn off the
when MAX A/C is ON.
Recirculation mode and allow outside air into the vehicle.
MAX A/C

In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can be
adjusted to desired user settings. Pressing other settings
will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch to the
selected setting and MAX A/C to exit.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

402 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

NOTE: In cold weather, use of recirculation mode may
lead to excessive window fogging. The recirculation
feature may be unavailable (button on touchscreen
greyed out) if conditions exist that could create fogging
on the inside of the windshield. On systems with Manual
Climate Controls, the Recirculation mode is not allowed
in Defrost mode to improve window clearing operation.
Recirculation will be disabled automatically if this mode
is selected. Attempting to use Recirculation while in this
mode will cause the LED in the control button to blink
and then turn off.

Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
Automatic Operation
1. Press the AUTO button on the faceplate or the AUTO
button on the touchscreen on the Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) Panel.
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the
system to maintain by adjusting the driver and passenger temperature control buttons. Once the desired
temperature is displayed, the system will achieve and
automatically maintain that comfort level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is
not necessary to change the settings. You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the
system to function automatically.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 403

NOTE:

Manual Operation Override

• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings. The The system allows for manual selection of blower speed,
system automatically adjusts the temperature, mode, and air distribution mode, A/C status and recirculation conblower speed to provide comfort as quickly as possible. trol.
• The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric
units by selecting the US/M customer-programmable
feature. Refer to the “Uconnect® System Settings” in
this section of the manual.

The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by
adjusting the blower control. The fan will now operate at
a fixed speed until additional speeds are selected. This
allows the front occupants to control the volume of air
circulated in the vehicle and cancel the Auto mode.

To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic
mode, during cold start-ups the blower fan will remain The operator can also select the direction of the airflow
on low until the engine warms up. The blower will by selecting one of the available mode settings. A/C
increase in speed and transition into Auto mode.
operation and Recirculation control can also be manually
selected in Manual operation.

NOTE: Each of these features operates independently from
each other. If any feature is controlled manually, temperature control will continue to operate automatically.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

404 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Operating Tips

Vacation Storage

NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service
suggested control settings for various weather condi- (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the
tions.
fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure
Summer Operation
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
The engine cooling system must be protected with a of compressor damage when the system is started again.
high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corroWindow Fogging
sion protection and to protect against engine overheating.
A solution of 50% OAT (Organic Additive Technology) Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly recoolant that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material moved by turning the mode selector to Defrost. The
Standard MS-12106 and 50% water is recommended. Defrost/Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear
Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your windshield and provide sufficient heating. If side window fogging becomes objectionable, increase blower
Vehicle” for proper coolant selection.
speed to improve airflow and clearing of the side winWinter Operation
dows. Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild
Use of the air Recirculation mode during winter months but rainy or humid weather.
is not recommended because it may cause window
fogging.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 405

NOTE:

A/C Air Filter

• Recirculate without A/C should not be used for long The climate control system filters outside air containing
dust, pollen and some odors. Strong odors cannot be
periods, as fogging may occur.
totally filtered out. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in
• Automatic Temperature Controls (ATC) will automati- “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for filter replacement instruccally adjust the climate control settings to reduce or tions.
eliminate window fogging on the front windshield.
When this occurs, recirculation will be unavailable.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush, and snow.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

406 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Operating Tips Chart

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
! STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411

▫ Turbocharger “Cool Down” — If Equipped . . .416

▫ Manual Transmission — If Equipped . . . . . . .411 ! ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED . . .416
▫ Automatic Transmission — If Equipped . . . . .412 ! MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED . .417
▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412

▫ Shifting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418

▫ Normal Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412

▫ Downshifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419

▫ Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F or
! AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION —
−29°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .414
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421
▫ Extended Park Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .414

▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423

▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415

▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . .424

▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

408 STARTING AND OPERATING

!
!

▫ Six-Speed Automatic Transmission
! POWER STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(1.4L Turbo Engine Only — DDCT) . . . . . . . . .424
! ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
▫ Six-Speed Automatic Transmission (2.0L And
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . .
2.4L Engine Only — 6F24) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435
▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . .
AUTOSTICK® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . .
▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
▫ Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . .
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES . . . . . . . . .445
▫ Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445
▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445
▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . .
DRIVING THROUGH WATER . . . . . . . . . . . . .446
! TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . .
▫ Flowing/Rising Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446
▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN). . . . . . .
PARKING BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448
▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . .
BRAKE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

. . . .451
. . . .452
. . . .453
. . . .455
. . . .456
. . . .456
. . . .457
. . . .458
. . . .461
. . . .465
. . . .465
. . . .468
. . . .470

STARTING AND OPERATING 409

▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . .471 ! TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) . . . . . . .488
! TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . .476 ! TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . .490
▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476 ! TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM
(TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478
▫ Base System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . .479
▫ Premium System — If Equipped . . . . . .
▫ Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Tire Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480
! FUEL REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Run Flat Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .482
▫ 1.4L Turbo Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Spare Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482
▫ 2.0L And 2.4L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485
▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . .
▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .486
▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . .
▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

. . . . .491
. . . . .494
. . . . .497
. . . . .500
. . . . .500
. . . . .500
. . . . .500
. . . . .501
. . . . .501
. . . . .502

410 STARTING AND OPERATING

▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503

▫ Trailer Hitch Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513

▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503

▫ Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514

▫ Fuel System Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
! ADDING FUEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .505
▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .505
! VEHICLE LOADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .508
▫ Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .508
! TRAILER TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .510

▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . .515
▫ Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .516
▫ Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521
! RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523

▫ Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . .510

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 411

STARTING PROCEDURES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both
inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts.

WARNING!
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
Manual Transmission — If Equipped
Before starting the engine fully apply the parking brake,
press the clutch pedal to the floor, and place the shift
lever in NEUTRAL.
NOTE:
• The engine will not start unless the clutch pedal is
pressed to the floor.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

412 STARTING AND OPERATING

• If the key will not turn and the steering wheel is Keyless Enter-N-Go™
locked, rotate the wheel in either direction to relieve
pressure on the locking mechanism and then turn the
This feature allows the driver to operkey.
ate the ignition switch with the push
of a button, as long as the Remote
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is in
The shift lever must be in the PARK or NEUTRAL
the passenger compartment.
position before you can start the engine. Depress the
brake pedal before shifting to any driving gear.
NOTE: You must press the brake pedal before shifting Normal Starting
out of PARK.

Using The ENGINE START/STOP Button
1. The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the
ENGINE START/STOP button once.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 413

3. The system takes over and attempts to start the
vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the starter will
disengage automatically after 10 seconds.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to
the engine starting, push the button again.
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine
is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator
pedal.
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button

vehicle speed above 5 mph (8 km/h) before the engine
will shut off. The ignition switch position will remain
in the ACC position until the shift lever/gear selector
is in PARK and the button is pressed twice to the OFF
position. If the shift lever/gear selector is not in PARK
and the ENGINE START/STOP button is pressed
once, the EVIC/DID will display a “Vehicle Not In
Park” message and the engine will remain running.
Never leave a vehicle out of the PARK position, or it
could roll.

NOTE: If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN
(engine not running) position and the transmission is in
1. Place the shift lever/gear selector in PARK, then press
PARK, the system will automatically time out after 30
and release the ENGINE START/STOP button.
minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the
OFF position.
2. The ignition switch will return to the OFF position.
3. If the shift lever/gear selector is not in PARK, the
ENGINE START/STOP button must be held for two
seconds or three short presses in a row with the
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

414 STARTING AND OPERATING

ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With
Driver’s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or
NEUTRAL Position)

• Press the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time to
return the ignition to the OFF position (EVIC/DID will
display “OFF”).

The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar to an
ignition switch. It has four positions, OFF, ACC, RUN
and START. To change the ignition positions without
starting the vehicle and use the accessories follow these
steps:

Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F or −29°C)

• Starting with the ignition in the OFF position,

To ensure reliable starting under extreme cold conditions
an externally powered electric block heater (available
from your authorized dealer) is required for the 1.4L
Turbo engine below -20°F (-29°C) and for the 2.4L engine
below -29°F (-34°C) and is recommended for the 2.0L
engine and 2.4L engine below -20°F (-29°C).

• Press the ENGINE START/STOP button once to place
the ignition to the ACC position (EVIC/DID will Extended Park Starting
display “ACC”),
NOTE: Extended Park condition occurs when the vehicle
• Press the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time has not been started or driven for at least 35 days.
to place the ignition to the RUN position (EVIC/DID
1. Install a battery charger or jumper cables to the battery
will display “ON/RUN”),
to ensure a full battery charge during the crank cycle.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 415

2. Cycle the ignition in the START position and release it If Engine Fails To Start
when the engine starts.
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
3. If the engine fails to start within ten seconds, cycle the #Normal Starting# or #Extreme Cold Weather# procedure,
ignition to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position, wait five and has not experienced an extended park condition as
seconds to allow the starter to cool, then repeat the identified in #Extended Park Starting# procedure it may
be flooded. Push the accelerator pedal all the way to the
Extended Park Starting procedure.
floor and hold it there. Crank the engine for no more than
4. If the engine fails to start after eight attempts, allow 15 seconds. This should clear any excess fuel in case the
the starter to cool for at least 10 minutes, then repeat engine is flooded. Leave the ignition key in the ON
the procedure.
position, release the accelerator pedal and repeat the
“Normal Starting” procedure.

CAUTION!

To prevent damage to the starter, do not continuously
crank the engine for more than 10 seconds at a time.
Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.

WARNING!
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing
serious personal injury.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

416 STARTING AND OPERATING

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED

CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not continuously
crank the engine for more than 25 seconds at a time.
Wait 60 seconds before trying again.

The engine block heater warms the engine and permits
quicker starts in cold weather.
Connect the cord to a 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet
with a grounded, three-wire extension cord.

After Starting

The engine block heater is required for 1.4L Turbo engine
The idle speed will automatically decrease as the engine below -20°F (-29°C) and for the 2.4L engine below -29°F
warms up.
(-34°C). It is recommended for the 2.0L engine and 2.4L
engine below -20°F (-29°C).
Turbocharger “Cool Down” — If Equipped
This vehicle is equipped with an after-run pump to cool
the turbocharger after the engine is shut off. Depending
on the type of driving and the amount of cargo, the pump
will run for up to 10 minutes after the engine has been
shut off to circulate coolant through the turbocharger.
Although the pump is rubber-mounted for quiet operation, it is normal to hear it running during this time.

The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood,
behind to the driver’s side headlamp. Follow the steps
below to properly use the engine block heater:
1. Locate the engine block heater cord (behind the driver’s side headlamp).
2. Undo the Velcro strap that secures the heater cord in
place.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 417

3. Pull the cord to the front of the vehicle and plug it into
a grounded, three-wire extension cord.

WARNING!

4. After the vehicle is running, reattach the cord to the
Velcro strap and properly stow away behind the
driver’s side headlamp.

Remember to disconnect the engine block heater
cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt
electrical cord could cause electrocution.

NOTE:

MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED

• The engine block heater cord is a factory installed
option. If your vehicle is not equipped, heater cords
are available from your authorized MOPAR® dealer.
• The engine block heater will require 110 Volts AC and
6.5 Amps to activate the heater element.
• The engine block heater must be plugged in at least
one hour to have an adequate warming effect on the
engine.

WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended without having the parking
brake fully applied. The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle,
especially on an incline.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

418 STARTING AND OPERATING

Shifting

CAUTION!
Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch
pedal, or attempt to hold the vehicle on a hill with the
clutch pedal partially engaged, as this will cause
abnormal wear on the clutch.

Fully press the clutch pedal before shifting gears. As you
release the clutch pedal, lightly press the accelerator
pedal.
You should always use first gear when starting from a
standing position.

NOTE: During cold weather, you may experience inRecommended Vehicle Shift Speeds
creased effort in shifting until the transmission fluid
To utilize your manual transmission efficiently for both
warms up. This is normal.
fuel economy and performance, it should be upshifted as
listed in recommended shift speed chart. Shift at the
vehicle speeds listed for acceleration. When heavily
loaded or pulling a trailer these recommended up-shift
speeds may not apply.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 419

All Engines

Manual Transmission Shift Speeds in MPH (KM/H)
Gear Selection
2 to 3
3 to 4
4 to 5
Accel.
24 (39)
34 (55)
47 (76)
Cruise
19 (31)
27 (43)
37 (60)

Downshifting
Moving from a high gear down to a lower gear is
recommended to preserve brakes when driving down
steep hills. In addition, downshifting at the right time
provides better acceleration when you desire to resume
speed. Downshift progressively. Do not skip gears to
avoid overspeeding the engine and clutch.

WARNING!

5 to 6
56 (90)
41 (66)

CAUTION!
• Skipping gears and downshifting into lower gears
at higher vehicle speeds can damage the engine
and clutch systems, Any attempt to shift into lower
gear with clutch pedal depressed may result damage to the clutch system. Shifting into lower gear
and releasing the clutch may result in engine
damage.

Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip, and the vehicle could skid.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

(Continued)

420 STARTING AND OPERATING

Maximum Recommended Downshift Speeds

CAUTION! (Continued)
• When descending a hill, be very careful to downshift one gear at a time to prevent overspeeding the
engine which can cause engine damage, and/or
clutch damage, even if the clutch pedal is pressed.
If transfer case is in low range the vehicle speeds to
cause engine and clutch damage are significantly
lower.
• Failure to follow the maximum recommended
downshifting speeds may cause the engine damage
and/or damage the clutch, even if the clutch pedal
is pressed.
• Descending a hill in low range with clutch pedal
depressed could result in clutch damage

CAUTION!
Failure to follow the maximum recommended downshifting speeds may cause the engine to overspeed
and/or damage the clutch disc, even if the clutch
pedal is pressed.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 421

Gear Selection
Maximum
Speed

Manual Transmission Shift Speeds in MPH (KM/H)
6 to 5
5 to 4
4 to 3
3 to 2
80 (129)
70 (113)
50 (81)
30 (48)

2 to 1
15 (24)

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED

CAUTION!
If you skip a gear while downshifting or downshift
at too high of a vehicle speed, these conditions may
cause the engine to overspeed if too low of a gear is
selected and the clutch pedal is released. Damage to
the clutch and the transmission can result from
skipping a gear while downshifting or downshifting
at too high of a vehicle speed even if the clutch pedal
is held pressed (i.e., not released).

CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:
• Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after
the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle
speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly pressing the brake pedal.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

422 STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.

WARNING!
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
turn the engine OFF, and remove the Key Fob.
When the ignition is in the LOCK/OFF (key removal) position, the transmission is locked in
PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted
movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF position, remove the Key Fob
from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
(Continued)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 423

Key Ignition Park Interlock

WARNING! (Continued)
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the transmission gear selector.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition (in a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go ™) in the ACC or ON/RUN
position. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.

This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Interlock which requires the transmission to be in PARK
before the ignition switch can be turned to the LOCK/
OFF (key removal) position. The Key Fob can only be
removed from the ignition when the ignition is in the
LOCK/OFF position, and the transmission is locked in
PARK whenever the ignition switch is in the LOCK/OFF
position.
NOTE: If a malfunction occurs, the system will trap the
Key Fob in the ignition switch to warn you that this
safety feature is inoperable. The engine can be started
and stopped but the Key Fob cannot be removed until
you obtain service.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

424 STARTING AND OPERATING

Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System

The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles (kilometers).

This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock System (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in PARK
unless the brakes are applied. To shift the transmission
out of PARK, the ignition switch must be turned to the
ON/RUN position (engine running or not) and the brake
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
pedal must be pressed.
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.
Six-Speed Automatic Transmission (1.4L Turbo
Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when
Engine Only — DDCT)
shifting between these gears.
The transmission gear position display (located in the
This transmission is programmed to prevent shifting
instrument panel cluster) indicates the transmission gear
from REVERSE to DRIVE or DRIVE to REVERSE, if
range. You must press the brake pedal and the lock
vehicle speed is above 6 mph (10 km/h). This safety
button on the shift lever to move the shift lever out of
feature helps protect your transmission from damage.
PARK (refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System” in this section). To drive, press the lock button on The transmission shift lever has PARK, REVERSE, NEUthe front of the shift lever and move the shift lever from TRAL, DRIVE, and AutoStick® (+/-) shift positions.
Manual shifts can be made using the AutoStick® shift
PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position.
control (refer to “AutoStick®” in this section for further
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 425

information). Toggling the shift lever rearward (+) or
forward (-) while in the AutoStick® position (beside the
DRIVE position) will manually select the transmission
gear, and will display the current gear in the instrument
cluster as 1, 2, 3, etc.
NOTE: If the shift lever cannot be moved to the PARK,
REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when pushed forward) it is probably in the AutoStick® (+/-) position
(beside the DRIVE position). In AutoStick® mode, the
transmission gear (1, 2, 3, etc.) is displayed in the
instrument cluster. Move the shift lever to the right (into
the DRIVE [D] position) for access to PARK, REVERSE,
and NEUTRAL.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

5
Shift Lever

426 STARTING AND OPERATING

the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. As an added
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to grade.
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating.
This is especially important when the engine is cold.
WARNING!
Gear Ranges

PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in
motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the
vehicle in this range.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking
brake.

• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not completely in PARK. Check by trying to
move the shift lever out of PARK with the brake
pedal released. Make sure the transmission is in
PARK before leaving the vehicle.

When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
shifting the transmission to PARK, otherwise the load on
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

(Continued)

STARTING AND OPERATING 427

WARNING! (Continued)

• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.

• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
turn the engine OFF, and remove the Key Fob.
When the ignition is in the LOCK/OFF (key removal) position, the transmission is locked in
PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted
movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF position, remove the Key Fob
from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.

(Continued)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

428 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING! (Continued)

CAUTION!

• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, (or
in a location accessible to children) and do not
leave the ignition (in a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™) in the ACC or ON/RUN
position. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.

• Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you
must turn the ignition switch from the LOCK/OFF
position to the ON/RUN position, and also press
the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the shift
lever could result.
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this
can damage the drivetrain.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
you have engaged the transmission into the PARK position:
• When shifting into PARK, press the lock button on the
shift lever and firmly move the lever all the way
forward until it stops and is fully seated.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 429

• Look at the transmission gear position display and
verify that it indicates the PARK position.

WARNING!

• With brake pedal released, verify that the shift lever
will not move out of PARK.

Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.

REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. The engine may be
started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift
the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.

CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A
Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies”
for further information.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

430 STARTING AND OPERATING

• During low-speed driving conditions in first gear,
vehicle momentum changes may feel exaggerated in
This range should be used for most city and highway
response to changes in accelerator pedal position. This
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downbehavior is normal and is similar to vehicles equipped
shifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission
with a manual transmission.
automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The
DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteris- • At low speeds you may hear mechanical noises similar
tics under all normal operating conditions.
to a manual transmission as the transmission changes
gears. These noises are normal and will not damage
To maximize fuel economy, the Dual Dry Clutch transthe transmission.
mission uses a geartrain arrangement similar to a manual
transmission. Therefore, you should become familiar • Very aggressive driving may result in some clutch
with some of the normal operational characteristics of
odor similar to a manual transmission. An active
this transmission:
warning message will display in the Instrument Cluster if cool down actions are needed.
DRIVE (D)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 431

• When stopped on an incline, always use the brakes to
hold the vehicle in place. On steep inclines, Hill Start
Assist (HSA) will temporarily hold the car in position
when the brake pedal is released. If the accelerator
pedal is not applied after a short time, the car will roll
back. Either reapply the brake (to hold the vehicle) or
press the accelerator to climb the hill.

When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain, or traveling into strong head
winds), use the AutoStick® shift control (refer to
“AutoStick®” in this section for further information) to
select a lower gear. Under these conditions, using a lower
gear will improve performance and extend transmission
life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.

• Before and after the engine is started, you may hear a
hydraulic pump for a short period of time. This noise During extremely cold temperatures, the transmission
is normal and will not damage the transmission.
will not operate if the oil temperature is -22°F (-30°C) or
below. Allow the engine to idle briefly with the transmission in PARK in order to warm the fluid. Normal
operation will resume once the transmission temperature
has risen to a suitable level.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

432 STARTING AND OPERATING

Instrument Cluster Messages
Messages will be displayed in the instrument cluster to
alert the driver when certain unusual conditions occur.
These messages are described below.
MESSAGE
GEAR NOT AVAILABLE
SHIFT NOT ALLOWED

DESCRIPTION
In AutoStick® mode, the gear selected by the driver is not available due to a fault
condition. See your authorized dealer for diagnosis and service.
The gear position requested by the driver is currently blocked. This occurs if: REVERSE is requested while moving (at 6 mph [10 km/h] or faster), if DRIVE is requested while moving backwards (at 6 mph [10 km/h] or faster), or if (in
AutoStick® mode) a DOWNSHIFT is requested while in 1st gear, 3rd gear or
higher is requested at a stop, or a requested shift would cause engine lugging or
overspeed. Make sure the vehicle is stopped before engaging DRIVE or REVERSE.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 433

MESSAGE
SHIFT TO NEUTRAL –
THEN D or R

AUTOSTICK NOT
AVAILABLE
AUTOMATIC MODE
NOT AVAILABLE
REDUCE GEAR
CHANGES
TRANS. GETTING HOT
PRESS BRAKE

DESCRIPTION
The transmission has shifted itself into NEUTRAL (due to a fault condition, or overheat due to excessive idling when stopped in DRIVE with the brakes released), but
the shift lever remains in gear. Shift into NEUTRAL and then back into gear for continued driving. If the transmission will not re-engage, see your authorized dealer.
AutoStick® mode is unavailable due to a shift lever fault. See your authorized
dealer for diagnosis and service.
The transmission is unable to shift itself automatically, due to a fault condition. Use
the AutoStick® mode to shift the transmission manually. See your authorized
dealer for diagnosis and service.
The transmission pump is overheating. In AutoStick® mode, try to drive in one specific gear as much as possible, avoiding frequent gear changes. In DRIVE, the transmission will automatically modify its shift schedule to reduce the number of shifts.
The transmission driving clutch is overheating, usually due to repeated launches in
stop-and-go traffic. Pull over and allow the transmission to cool in NEUTRAL until
“TRANS. COOL READY TO DRIVE” is displayed.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

434 STARTING AND OPERATING

MESSAGE
TRANS. HOT STOP
SAFELY SHIFT TO P
SERVICE TRANSMISSION
SERVICE SHIFTER
ENGAGE PARK BRAKE

DESCRIPTION
The transmission driving clutch has overheated. Pull over, shift the transmission
into PARK, and allow the vehicle to cool until “TRANS. COOL READY TO
DRIVE” is displayed.
A transmission fault has been detected. See your authorized dealer for diagnosis
and service.
A shift lever fault has been detected. See your authorized dealer for diagnosis and
service.
The sensor that confirms PARK engagement is not functioning properly. Engage the
parking brake to ensure that the vehicle will not roll when in PARK.

Reverse, or 1st, 3rd, 5th, and Reverse, or 2nd, 4th, and 6th
[with no Reverse]). PARK and NEUTRAL will continue
Transmission function is monitored electronically for
to be available. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
may be illuminated. Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
to be driven to an authorized dealer for service without
Mode is activated. In this mode, some gears will be
damaging the transmission.
unavailable. The transmission will operate only in a
certain select set of gears (such as 1st, 2nd, 3rd, and
Transmission Limp Home Mode

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 435

In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the service is required.
following steps:
Six-Speed Automatic Transmission (2.0L And
2.4L Engine Only — 6F24)
1. Stop the vehicle.
The transmission gear position display (located in the
instrument panel cluster) indicates the transmission gear
Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
range. You must press the brake pedal and the lock
button on the shift lever to move the shift lever out of
Wait approximately 10 seconds.
PARK (refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock SysRestart the engine.
tem” in this section). To drive, press the lock button on
Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no the front of the shift lever and move the shift lever from
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position.
operation.
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a

2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3.
4.
5.
6.

NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that you visit your authorized dealer at your
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has
diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could
recur.

precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles (kilometers).

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

436 STARTING AND OPERATING

Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the Gear Ranges
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped. DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when NEUTRAL into another gear range.
shifting between these gears.
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
The transmission shift lever has PARK, REVERSE, NEUallow the selected gear to engage before accelerating.
TRAL, DRIVE, and AutoStick® (+/-) shift positions. Manual
This is especially important when the engine is cold.
shifts can be made using the AutoStick® shift control (refer
to “AutoStick®” in this section for further information). PARK (P)
Toggling the shift lever rearward (+) or forward (-) while in
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
the AutoStick® position (beside the DRIVE position) will
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
manually select the transmission gear, and will display the
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in
current gear in the instrument cluster as 1, 2, 3, etc.
motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the
NOTE: If the shift lever cannot be moved to the PARK, vehicle in this range.
REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when pushed forward)
it is probably in the AutoStick® (+/-) position (beside the When parking on a level surface, you may shift the
DRIVE position). In AutoStick® mode, the transmission transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking
gear (1, 2, 3, etc.) is displayed in the instrument cluster. brake.
Move the shift lever to the right (into the DRIVE [D] When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
position) for access to PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL. shifting the transmission to PARK, otherwise the load on
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 437

the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. As an added
precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a
downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill
grade.

WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not completely in PARK. Check by trying to
move the shift lever out of PARK with the brake
pedal released. Make sure the transmission is in
PARK before leaving the vehicle.

WARNING! (Continued)
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.

(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

(Continued)

438 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING! (Continued)

(Continued)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 439

CAUTION!

• Look at the transmission gear position display and
verify that it indicates the PARK position.

• With brake pedal released, verify that the shift lever
will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL (N)

The following indicators should be used to ensure that
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
you have engaged the transmission into the PARK posiperiods with the engine running. The engine may be
tion:
started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift
• When shifting into PARK, press the lock button on the the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.
shift lever and firmly move the lever all the way
forward until it stops and is fully seated.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

440 STARTING AND OPERATING

DRIVE (D)

WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.

This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission
automatically upshifts through underdrive first, second,
third, and fourth gears, direct fifth gear and overdrive
sixth gear. The DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal operating conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or
while towing heavy trailers), use the AutoStick® shift
control (refer to “AutoStick®” in this section for further
information) to select a lower gear. Under these conditions, using a lower gear will improve performance and
extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting
and heat buildup.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 441

If the transmission temperature exceeds normal operating limits, the transmission controller will modify the
transmission shift schedule and expand the range of
torque converter clutch engagement. This is done to
prevent transmission damage due to overheating. If the
transmission becomes extremely hot, the “Transmission
Temperature Warning Light” may illuminate and the
transmission may operate differently until the transmission cools down.

Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains
in fourth gear regardless of which forward gear is
selected. PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue
to operate. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be
illuminated. Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be
driven to an authorized dealer for service without damaging the transmission.

In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
During very cold temperatures (-4°F [-20°C] or below), following steps:
transmission operation may be modified depending on
1. Stop the vehicle.
engine and transmission temperature as well as vehicle
speed. Normal operation will resume once the transmis- 2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
sion temperature has risen to a suitable level.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
Transmission function is monitored electronically for
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could 5. Restart the engine.
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

442 STARTING AND OPERATING

6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no • The transmission fluid has reached an adequate temlonger detected, the transmission will return to normal
perature.
operation.
• The engine coolant has reached an adequate temperaNOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recomture.
mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your
• Vehicle speed is sufficiently high.
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has
diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could • The driver is not heavily pressing the accelerator.
recur.
Torque Converter Clutch
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been
service is required.
included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle.
A clutch within the torque converter engages automatically at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly
The automatic transmission includes an electronically
different feeling or response during normal operation in
controlled Overdrive (sixth gear). The transmission will
the upper gears. When the vehicle speed drops or during
automatically shift into Overdrive if the following consome accelerations, the clutch automatically disengages.
ditions are present:
Overdrive Operation

• The shift lever is in the DRIVE position.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 443

NOTE: Engagement of the torque converter clutch is
inhibited at very cold temperatures. Because the engine
speed is higher when the torque converter clutch is not
engaged, it may seem as if the transmission is not shifting
into Overdrive when cold. This is normal. The torque
converter clutch will function normally once the transmission is sufficiently warm.
AUTOSTICK®

Operation
When the shift lever is in the AutoStick® position (beside
the DRIVE position), it can be moved forward and
rearward. This allows the driver to manually select the
transmission gear being used. Moving the shift lever
forward (-) triggers a downshift and rearward (+) an
upshift. The current gear is displayed in the instrument
cluster. In AutoStick® mode, the transmission will only
shift up or down when the driver moves the shift lever
rearward (+) or forward (-), unless an engine lugging or
overspeed condition would result. It will remain in the
selected gear until another upshift or downshift is chosen, except as described below.

AutoStick® is a driver-interactive transmission feature
providing manual shift control, giving you more control
of the vehicle. AutoStick® allows you to maximize engine braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts, and improve overall vehicle performance. This
system can also provide you with more control during • For all models except GT, the transmission will automatically upshift when necessary to prevent engine
passing, city driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain
over-speed.
driving, and many other situations.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

444 STARTING AND OPERATING

• For GT models, the transmission will remain in the • If the system detects powertrain overheating, the
selected gear even when maximum engine speed is
transmission will revert to automatic shift mode and
reached. The transmission will upshift only when
remain in that mode until the powertrain cools off.
commanded by the driver. Engine overspeed protec• If the system detects a problem, it will disable
tion is provided by the engine controls.
AutoStick® mode and the transmission will return to
• The transmission will automatically downshift to first
the automatic mode until the problem is corrected.
gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the driver
should manually upshift (+) the transmission as the To disengage AutoStick® mode, return the shift lever to
the DRIVE position. You can shift in or out of the
vehicle is accelerated.
AutoStick® position at any time without taking your foot
• With 2.0L or 2.4L engine, you can start out, from a stop, off the accelerator pedal.
in first or second gear. Tapping (+) (at a stop) will
allow starting in second gear. Starting out in second
WARNING!
gear is helpful in snowy or icy conditions.
• If a requested downshift would cause the engine to Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
over-speed, that shift will not occur.
grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
• Avoid using speed control when AutoStick® is engaged. personal injury.
• Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when
AutoStick® is engaged.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 445

DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES

Traction

Acceleration

When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or
complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To
reduce this possibility, the following precautions should
be observed:

Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slippery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull
erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs
when there is a difference in the surface traction under
the front (driving) wheels.

WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the
front wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle
and possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and
carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction
(ice, snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).

1. Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are
slushy.
2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
3. Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first
become visible.
4. Keep tires properly inflated.
5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a
sudden stop.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

446 STARTING AND OPERATING

DRIVING THROUGH WATER

Shallow Standing Water

Driving through water more than a few inches/ Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure shallow standing water, consider the following Cautions
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
and Warnings before doing so.
Flowing/Rising Water

WARNING!

WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where water
is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flowing water can wear away the road or path’s surface
and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water.
Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry
your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this
warning may result in injuries that are serious or
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.

• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h) when driving through standing water.
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s braking capabilities, which increases stopping
distances. Therefore, after driving through standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on the
brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
• Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 447

CAUTION!

CAUTION! (Continued)

• Always check the depth of the standing water
before driving through it. Never drive through
standing water that is deeper than the bottom of
the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
• Determine the condition of the road or the path
that is under water and if there are any obstacles in
the way before driving through the standing water.
• Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water. This will minimize wave
effects.

• Driving through standing water may cause damage
to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always
inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil, transmission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e.,
fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance) after
driving through standing water. Do not continue to
operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated, as this may result in further damage. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious
internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

(Continued)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

448 STARTING AND OPERATING

The parking brake lever is located in the center console.
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking To apply the parking brake, pull the lever up as firmly as
brake is fully applied. Also, be certain to leave an possible. To release the parking brake, pull the lever up
slightly, press the center button, then lower the lever
automatic transmission in PARK, or manual transmission
completely.
in REVERSE or first gear.
PARKING BRAKE

When the parking brake is applied with the ignition
switch in the ON position, the “Brake Warning Light” in
the instrument cluster will illuminate.
NOTE:
• When the parking brake is applied and the automatic
transmission is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning
Light” will flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime
will sound to alert the driver. Fully release the parking
brake before attempting to move the vehicle.
Parking Brake

• This light only shows that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 449

wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. For vehicles
equipped with an automatic transmission, apply the
parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK,
otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out
of PARK. The parking brake should always be applied
whenever the driver is not in the vehicle.

WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and a collision.
(Continued)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

450 STARTING AND OPERATING

BRAKE SYSTEM

WARNING! (Continued)
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission in
PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll
and cause damage or injury.

CAUTION!
If the “Brake Warning Light” remains on with the
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction
is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an
authorized dealer immediately.

Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic
brake systems. If either of the two hydraulic
systems loses normal capability, the remaining
system will still function. However, there will
be some loss of overall braking effectiveness. This will be
evident by increased pedal travel during application and
greater pedal force required to slow or stop the vehicle. In
addition, if the malfunction is caused by a leak in the
hydraulic system, the “Brake Warning Light” will turn on
as the brake fluid level drops in the master cylinder.
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (i.e.,
repeated brake applications with the engine OFF) the
brakes will still function. However, the effort required to
brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required
with the power system operating.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 451

POWER STEERING

WARNING!
• Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting
or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures, excessive lining
wear, and possible brake damage. You would not
have your full braking capacity in an emergency.
• Driving a vehicle with the “Brake Warning Light”
on is dangerous. A significant decrease in braking
performance or vehicle stability during braking
may occur. It will take you longer to stop the
vehicle or will make your vehicle harder to control.
You could have a collision. Have the vehicle
checked immediately.

The electric power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will vary its assist to provide
light efforts while parking and good feel while driving. If
the electric steering system experiences a fault that
reduces assist or prevents the vehicle from providing
assist, you will still have the ability to steer the vehicle
manually.

WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could pose
a safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be
obtained as soon as possible.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

452 STARTING AND OPERATING

If the “SERVICE POWER STEERING# OR
#POWER STEERING ASSIST OFF - SERVICE
SYSTEM” message and a steering wheel icon
are displayed on the EVIC/DID screen, it indicates that the vehicle needs to be taken to the dealer for
service. It is likely the vehicle has lost power steering
assistance. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information
(EVIC) or #Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

(EVIC)/Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

If the “POWER STEERING SYSTEM HOT - PERFORMANCE MAY BE LIMITED” message and an icon are
displayed on the EVIC/DID screen, it indicates that
extreme steering maneuvers may have occurred, which
caused an over temperature condition in the power
steering system. You will lose power steering assistance
momentarily until the over temperature condition no
longer exists. Once driving conditions are safe, then pull
over and let vehicle idle for a few moments until the light
turns off. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information

• If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for
service.

NOTE:
• Even if the power steering assistance is no longer
operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle.
Under these conditions there will be a substantial
increase in steering effort, especially at low speeds and
during parking maneuvers.

ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic
brake control system. This system includes Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Traction
Control System (TCS), Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM),
Trailer Sway Control (TCS), Hill Start Assist (HSA), Brake
Lock Differential (BLD), and Electronic Stability Control

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 453

(ESC). These systems work together to enhance both ABS is activated during braking under certain road or
vehicle stability and control in various driving condi- stopping conditions. ABS-inducing conditions can include ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose
tions.
debris, or panic stops.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
You also may experience the following when the brake
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased
system goes into anti-lock:
vehicle stability and brake performance under most
braking conditions. The system automatically prevents • The ABS motor running (it may continue to run for a
short time after the stop).
wheel lock, reduces stop distance, and enhances vehicle
control during stop.
• The clicking sound of solenoid valves.
When the vehicle is driven over 6 mph (10 km/h), you • Brake pedal pulsations.
may also hear a slight clicking sound as well as some
related motor noises. These noises are the system per- • A slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end
of the stop.
forming its self-check cycle to ensure that the ABS is
working properly. This self-check occurs each time the These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
vehicle is started and accelerated past 6 mph (10 km/h).

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

454 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING!

WARNING! (Continued)

• The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equipment that may be susceptible to interference
caused by improperly installed or high output
radio transmitting equipment. This interference
can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation of such equipment should be
performed by qualified professionals.
• Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to a collision.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to
slow down or stop.

• The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded
by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or
the traction afforded.
• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner that could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.

(Continued)

All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and
type and tires must be properly inflated to produce
accurate signals for the computer.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 455

If both the “Brake System Warning Light” and the “ABS
Warning Light” remain on, the ABS and Electronic Brake
Force Distribution (EBD) systems are not functioning.
The “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” moniImmediate repair to the ABS system is required.
tors the ABS. The light will turn on when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON position Brake Assist System (BAS)
and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
If the “ABS Warning Light” remains on or comes on capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock portion of the system detects an emergency braking situation by sensbrake system is not functioning and that service is ing the rate and amount of brake application and then
required. However, the conventional brake system will applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help
continue to operate normally if the “Brake System Warn- reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the
ABS. Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best
ing Light” is not on.
BAS assistance. To receive the benefit of the system, you
If the “ABS Warning Light” is on, the brake system
must apply continuous braking pressure during the
should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the
stopping sequence, (do not “pump” the brakes). Do not
benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the “ABS Warning Light”
reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer
does not come on when the ignition switch is turned to
desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is
the ON position, have the light repaired as soon as
deactivated.
possible.

Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

456 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING!
BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from
acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction
afforded by prevailing road conditions. BAS cannot
prevent accidents, including those resulting from
excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery
surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of a BASequipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which could jeopardize
the user’s safety or the safety of others.
Traction Control System (TCS)
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake
pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine
power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and
stability. A feature of the TCS system, Brake Limited
Differential (BLD), functions similar to a limited slip

differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven
axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than
the other, the system will apply the brake of the spinning
wheel. This will allow more engine torque to be applied
to the wheel that is not spinning. This feature remains
active even if TCS and ESC are in the “Partial Off” mode.
Refer to “Electronic Stability Control (ESC)” in this
section for more information.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the
speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate
of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed
are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then
applies the appropriate brake and may also reduce
engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will
occur. ERM will only intervene during very severe or
evasive driving maneuvers.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 457

ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring
during severe or evasive driving maneuvers. It cannot
prevent wheel lift due to other factors, such as road
conditions, leaving the roadway, or striking objects or
other vehicles.

WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions, and driving conditions, influence the chance
that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot
prevent all wheel lift or rollovers, especially those
that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects
or other vehicles. The capabilities of an ERMequipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which could jeopardize
the user’s safety or the safety of others.

Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an excessively swaying trailer. TSC activates automatically once
the excessively swaying trailer is recognized. When TSC
is functioning, the “ESC Light” will flash, the engine
power will be reduced, and you will feel the brake being
applied to individual wheels in an attempt to stop the
trailer from swaying.
NOTE: The TSC is disabled when the ESC system is in
the “Partial Off” mode.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

458 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING!
• TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying. Always
use caution when towing a trailer and follow the
tongue weight recommendations. Refer to ”Vehicle
Loading” and “Trailer Towing” in “Starting and
Operating” for further information.
• If TSC activates while towing a trailer, stop the
vehicle at the nearest safe location and adjust the
trailer load to eliminate the trailer sway.
• Failure to follow these warnings can result in an
accident or serious personal injury.

during this short period of time, the system will release
brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill. The
system will release brake pressure in proportion to the
amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in
the intended direction of travel.
Hill Start Assist Disable Procedure
NOTE: Vehicle roll back mitigation will not be present
with this feature disabled.
Hill Start assist can be disabled if desired. This procedure
applies to vehicles equipped with a manual or Powertech
transmission.

1. Wheels must be pointed straight ahead, on a level
surface.
The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when
starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill. HSA will maintain 2. Automatic transmission should be in PARK.
the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short
period of time after the driver takes their foot off of the 3. Place manual transmission in NEUTRAL if equipped.
brake pedal. If the driver does not apply the throttle 4. Begin with the ignition OFF.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 459

5. Engage park brake.

HSA Activation Criteria

6. Start engine and wait for ESC OFF lamp to turn off.

The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to
activate:

7. Apply brake pedal.

• Vehicle must be stopped.
8. Turn steering wheel 200 degrees counter clockwise,
just over half a turn from center position. Press the • Vehicle must be on a 3% (manual transmission), 3.5%
(automated manual transmission), or 8% grade or
“ESC off” button four times.
greater (automatic transmission) hill.
9. Rotate the steering wheel back to center and continue
in a clockwise direction until 200 degrees past center. • Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction (i.e.,
vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle back10. Turn the ignition to OFF position.
ing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
11. If procedure was done correctly, ESC malfunction HSA will work in REVERSE and all forward gears when
lamp will flash four times after engine starts.
the activation criteria have been met. The system will not
12. Procedure must be completed within 90 seconds.

activate if the vehicle is placed in NEUTRAL or PARK.

13. Repeat the condition to re-enable Hill Start Assist
(HSA).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

460 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING!

There may be situations on minor hills with a loaded
vehicle, or while pulling a trailer, when the system
will not activate and slight rolling may occur. This
could cause a collision with another vehicle or object.
Always remember the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle.

• If you use a trailer brake controller with your
trailer, your trailer brakes may be activated and
deactivated with the brake switch. If so, when the
brake pedal is released there may not be enough
brake pressure to hold the vehicle and trailer on a
hill and this could cause a collision with another
vehicle or object behind you. In order to avoid
rolling down the hill while resuming acceleration,
manually activate the trailer brake prior to releasing the brake pedal. Always remember the driver is
responsible for braking the vehicle.
• HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when leaving your vehicle.
Also, be certain to leave the transmission in PARK.

Towing With HSA
HSA will provide assistance when starting on a grade
when pulling a trailer.

(Continued)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 461

Electronic Stability Control (ESC)

WARNING! (Continued)
• Failure to follow these warnings may cause the
vehicle to roll down the incline and could collide
with another vehicle, object or person, and cause
serious or fatal injury. Always remember to use the
parking brake while parking on a hill and that the
driver is responsible for braking the vehicle.
NOTE: The HSA system may also be turned on and off
if the vehicle is equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display
(DID). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects for over-steering and under-steering the vehicle by
applying the brake of the appropriate wheel. Engine
power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain
the desired path.
ESC reduces engine torque and applies brake pressure to
select individual wheels to mitigate vehicle under-steer
and vehicle over-steer. The system uses engine torque
reduction along with individual wheel brake pressure to
correct under-steer and over-steer conditions.
• Over-steer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
• Under-steer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

462 STARTING AND OPERATING

ESC Operating Modes

WARNING!
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing
road conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in
turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent accidents resulting
from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate
driver input for the conditions. Only a safe, attentive,
and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.

The ESC system has two available operating modes.
Full On
This is the normal operating mode for ESC. Whenever the
vehicle is started the system will be in this mode. This
mode should be used for most driving situations. ESC
should only be turned to “Partial Off” for specific reasons
as noted. Refer to “Partial Off” for additional information.
Partial Off
The “ESC Off” button is located in the switch bank above
the climate control. To enter the “Partial Off” mode,
momentarily press the “ESC Off” button and the “ESC
Off Indicator Light” will illuminate. To turn the ESC on
again, momentarily press the “ESC Off” button and the
“ESC Off Indicator Light” will turn off. This will restore
the normal “ESC On” mode of operation.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 463

WARNING!
• When in %Partial Off% mode, the TCS functionality
of ESC, (except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS section), has been disabled and
the %ESC Off Indicator Light% will be illuminated.
When in %Partial Off% mode, the engine power
reduction feature of TCS is disabled, and the
enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC system is reduced.
• Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is disabled when the
ESC system is in the %Partial Off% mode.

NOTE: When driving with snow chains, or when starting
off in deep snow, sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to
allow more wheel spin when starting off in snow, mud,
sand, gravel, or when using tire chains. This can be
accomplished by momentarily pressing the “ESC off”
button to enter partial mode “Partial Off” mode. Once the
situation requiring “Partial Off” mode is overcome, turn
ESC back on by momentarily pressing the “ESC Off”
button. This may be done while the vehicle is in motion
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position. It should go out with the engine
running. The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” will flash to indicate the system is actively correcting an undesirable vehicle condition. This includes

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

464 STARTING AND OPERATING

Yaw control, traction control, and trailer sway control. If • Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system
will be ON even if it was turned off previously.
the lamp remains solid under normal driving conditions,
your vehicle should be serviced at an authorized dealer.
• The ESC system may make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” starts
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC
that caused the ESC activation.
system becomes active.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also ESC Off Indicator Light
flashes when the Traction Control System (TCS) or trailer
sway is active. If the “ESC Activation/ Malfunction
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the
Indicator Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is partially
up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as
off.
possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the
prevailing road conditions.
In some cases, when accelerating from stop on steep
grades, it may be beneficial to turn off ESC. Once the
NOTE:
grade ascent is complete, ESC can be turned on again.
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 465

TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION

NOTE:

Tire Markings

• P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• European — Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter #P# is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.

1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards
Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description

4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades

• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

466 STARTING AND OPERATING

• Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary • High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
emergency use only. Temporary high pressure comstandards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
pact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example:
T145/80D18 103M.
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or
%....blank....% = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
– Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 467

EXAMPLE:
R = Construction code
– #R# means radial construction, or
– #D# means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
– A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
– A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to
its load index under certain operating conditions
– The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

468 STARTING AND OPERATING

EXAMPLE:
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL)
tire:
• XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
• LL = Light load tire or
• C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this
tire
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire, tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Tire Identification Number (TIN)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 469

EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
– This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 01 means the year 2001
– Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year
in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

470 STARTING AND OPERATING

Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term
B-Pillar
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure

Maximum Inflation Pressure

Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Tire Placard

Definition
The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located
behind the front door.
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after
the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven
less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three
hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per
square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible
cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation
pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure
as shown on the tire placard.
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the
recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 471

Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire And Loading Information Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door.

5
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

472 STARTING AND OPERATING

Tire And Loading Information Placard

Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
Tire And Loading Information Placard

This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 473

To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
spare tires.
XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
Loading
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the weight referenced here.
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occuinflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section
XXX kg” on your vehicle’s placard.
of this manual.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pasGAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
“Vehicle Loading” in this section.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

474 STARTING AND OPERATING

4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of NOTE:
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
“XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The followbe five 150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the
ing table shows examples on how to calculate total
amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity
load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your
is 650 lbs (295 kg) (since 5 x 150 lbs (68 kg) = 750 lbs
vehicle with varying seating configurations and num(340 kg), and 1400 lbs (635 kg) – 750 lbs (340 kg) =
ber and size of occupants. This table is for illustration
650 lbs [295 kg]).
purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not
• For the following example, the combined weight of
safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
capacity calculated in step 4.
(392 kg).

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 475

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

476 STARTING AND OPERATING

• Tread Wear

WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas
are affected by improper tire pressure:
• Safety and Vehicle Stability
• Economy

• Ride Comfort

Safety

WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
• Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can result in overheating and tire failure.
• Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
• Overinflated or under-inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
(Continued)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 477

WARNING! (Continued)
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the
right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.

• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right.
Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance
resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear

Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnormal wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the
Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability need for earlier tire replacement.
of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
response or over responsiveness in the steering.
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause ride.
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
NOTE:

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

478 STARTING AND OPERATING

Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side door.
At least once a month:

Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire inflation pressure is
defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The
cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum
inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.

• Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual
judgement when determining proper inflation. Tires Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
may look properly inflated even when they are under- of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
inflated.
temperature changes.
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.

CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the valve stem.

Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 479

inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation

WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
75 mph (120 km/h).

The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
Radial Ply Tires
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
WARNING!
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera- on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
tion. Refer to your authorized tire dealer or original poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Alequipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operat- ways use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
ing speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
combine them with other types of tires.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

480 STARTING AND OPERATING

Tire Repair

Tire Types

If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it All Season Tires — If Equipped
meets the following criteria:
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (spring,
summer, fall and winter). Traction levels may vary be• The tire has not been driven on when flat.
tween different all season tires. All season tires can be
• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and
• The puncture is no greater than ¼# (6 mm).
handling of your vehicle.
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
additional information.
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and
service description (Load Index and Speed Symbol).

Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or
on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with summer tires, be
aware these tires are not designed for winter or cold
driving conditions. Install winter tires on your vehicle
when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if
roads are covered with ice or snow. For more information, contact an authorized dealer.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 481

Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use
summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.

Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during the winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
“mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires
equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires
only in sets of four; failure to do so
may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.

WARNING!
Do not use summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You
could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury
or death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates
the possibility of loss of vehicle control.

Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
(120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to
original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold
tire inflation pressures.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

482 STARTING AND OPERATING

While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation
pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the
Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire
inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited
driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable.

See the tire pressure monitoring section for more information.
Spare Tires — If Equipped
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit
instead of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire Service Kit” in
“What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.

CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
compact or limited-use temporary spare installed.
Damage to the vehicle may result.

Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full Wheel — If Equipped
capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and
mode.
wheel equivalent in look and function to the original
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 483

equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle
of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire
rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option,
refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended
tire rotation pattern.

Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled
on your vehicle at the first opportunity.

Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only. Do not install more than one compact spare tire and
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on
WARNING!
the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire. Compact spares are for temporary emergency use
Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T” only. With these spares, do not drive more than
or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: T145/ 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited
80D18 103M.
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

484 STARTING AND OPERATING

your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
first opportunity.
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
WARNING!
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn
to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size Limited-use spares are for emergency use only. Inspare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
stallation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the speed listed on the limit-use spare wheel. Keep
first opportunity.
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on
Full Size Spare — If Equipped

Limited-Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency
use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the
limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving
limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as

your Tire and Loading Information Placard located
on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the
driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it
on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss
of vehicle control.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 485

Tire Spinning

Tread Wear Indicators

When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or to help you in determining when your tires should be
for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop- replaced.
ping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.

WARNING!

Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.

1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

486 STARTING AND OPERATING

These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread • Distance driven
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
becomes 1/16” (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the
higher, and summer tires typically have a reduced
tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced. Refer
tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle mainto “Replacement Tires” in this section for further infortenance schedule is highly recommended.
mation.

WARNING!

Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
• Driving style

Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting
in serious injury or death.

• Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures
can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the
tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replace- exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
ment.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 487

It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two
rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manuthose of the original wheels.
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent to the originals in size, quality and performance It is recommended you contact your authorized tire
when replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions
“Tread Wear Indicator.” Refer to the Tire and Loading you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure
Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect
the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original
equipment tire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the Tire Safety Information section of this
manual for more information relating to the Load Index
and Speed Symbol of a tire.
Replacement Tires

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

488 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING!

WARNING! (Continued)

• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control and have
a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use
only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have a collision.

• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.

CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES)
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body
clearance. Follow these recommendations to guard
against damage.
• Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as
recommended by the traction device manufacturer

(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 489

• Install on Front Tires

CAUTION!

• Due to limited clearance,

• For a 205/55R16 the 12 mm Diamond Tire Chain with
Ratchet Tensioning Device from tirechain.com is recommended.
• For a 225/45R17 either the Peerless Auto-Trac or Thule
CG-9 snow chain is recommended.

WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow)
between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable
handling. You could lose control and have a collision.

To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
• Because of restricted traction device clearance between tires and other suspension components, it is
important that only traction devices in good condition are used. Broken devices can cause serious
damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise
occurs that could indicate device breakage. Remove
the damaged parts of the device before further use.
• Install device as tightly as possible and then retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
• Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pavement.
(Continued)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

490 STARTING AND OPERATING

CAUTION! (Continued)
• Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instructions on the method of installation, operating
speed, and conditions for use. Always use the
suggested operating speed of the device manufacturer’s if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS

These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain
mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or
unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being
performed.

The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving, The suggested rotation method is the “rearward cross”
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern
does not apply to some directional tires that must not be
unequal rates.
reversed.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 491

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recommended cold placard pressure.

Tire Rotation

The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1
psi (7.0 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when
the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will
decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on
“cold inflation tire pressure”. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a
three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must
not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into
the tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires – General Information”
in “Starting and Operating” for information on how to
properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

492 STARTING AND OPERATING

also increase as the vehicle is driven - this is normal and driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in
there should be no adjustment for this increased pres- order for the TPMS to receive this information.
sure.
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if cold (parked for more than three hours) placard pressure
the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning of 30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F
limit for any reason, including low temperature effects, or (20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa),
a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire
natural pressure loss through the tire.
pressure to approximately 23 psi (158 kPa). This tire
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the Tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light. Driving the vehicle
off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended
may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 27
cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warnpsi (186 kPa), but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
ing (Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light) illuminates,
Light will still be ON. In this situation, the Tire Pressure
you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended
Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the
cold placard pressure in order for the Tire Pressure
tires are inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold
Monitoring Telltale Light to turn off. The system will
placard pressure value.
automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light will turn off once the system receives the
updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need to be
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 493

CAUTION!

CAUTION! (Continued)

• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you take
your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have
your sensor function checked.

• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor.

(Continued)

NOTE:
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure
or condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

494 STARTING AND OPERATING

Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the valve
stopping ability.
stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainteModule.
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire gauge, even NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle regularly
illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale and to maintain the proper pressure.
Light.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure, • Receiver Module.
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors.
the tire.

• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light.

Base System
This is the TPMS warning indicator located in the
instrument cluster.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 495

Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings

Service TPMS Warnings

The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster, a #LOW TIRE PRESSURE#
message and “Inflate Tire to XX” message will be displayed for a minimum of five seconds, and an audible
chime will be activated when one or more of the four
active road tire pressures are low. Should this occur, you
should stop as soon as possible, check the inflation
pressure of each tire on your vehicle, and inflate each tire
to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure
value. The recommended cold placard pressure value is
the pressure value in the #Inflate Tire to XX# message
displayed in the EVIC/DID. The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Light will
extinguish and the #LOW TIRE PRESSURE# and “Inflate
Tire to XX” messages will turn off once the updated tire
pressures have been received. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) to
receive this information.

The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid when a
system fault is detected. The system fault will also sound
a chime and display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message for a minimum of five seconds. If the ignition key is
cycled, this sequence will repeat providing the system
fault still exists. The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light will turn off when the fault condition no longer
exists. A system fault can occur with any of the following
scenarios:
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the
TPM sensors.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals.
3. Snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

496 STARTING AND OPERATING

4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.

seconds and then remain on solid and a “SERVICE
TPM SYSTEM” message will be displayed for a minimum of five seconds.

NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will
wheel and tire assembly.
sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
1. The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure
monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not monisolid and a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message will be
tor the tire pressure in the compact spare tire.
displayed for a minimum of five seconds.
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road 5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, a chime will
tire, the TPMS will update automatically and the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF, as
sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure
and #LOW TIRE PRESSURE# and “Inflate Tire to XX”
messages will still turn ON due to the low tire.
warning limit in any of the four active road tires. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
3. However, after driving the vehicle for up to 20 minabove 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to
utes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the Tire Pressure
receive this information.
Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 497

Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings

Premium System — If Equipped
The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim
mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the valve
stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver
module.

The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster and an audible chime will
be activated when one or more of the four active road tire
pressures are low. The audible chime will sound once
every ignition cycle for the first condition that it detects.
In addition, the EVIC/DID will display a “Inflate Tire to
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
XX” message for a minimum of five seconds and a
tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintain
graphic of the pressure value(s) with the low tire(s)
the proper pressure.
displayed in a different color. The recommended cold
The TPMS consists of the following components:
placard pressure inflation value is the pressure value
displayed in the #Inflate Tire to XX# message displayed in
• Receiver Module
the EVIC/DID.
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four
• Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages, active road tire(s), you should stop as soon as possible
which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information and inflate all tires that are in a different color on the
Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID)
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

498 STARTING AND OPERATING

graphic display to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value. The system will automatically update, the “Inflate Tire to XX” message will no longer be
displayed, the graphic display of the pressure value(s)
will return to their normal color, and the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Light will extinguish once the updated tire
pressure(s) have been received. The vehicle may need to
be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h)
to receive this information.
Service TPMS Message
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds, and then remain on solid when a
system fault is detected. The system fault will also sound
a chime. The EVIC/DID will display a “SERVICE TPM
SYSTEM” message for a minimum of five seconds. This
text message is then followed by a graphic display, with
“- -“ in place of the pressure value(s) indicating which
Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor(s) is not being received.

If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
no longer exists, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light will no longer flash, the #SERVICE TPM SYSTEM#
message will not be present, and a pressure value will be
displayed instead of dashes. A system fault can occur
with any of the following scenarios:
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the
TPM sensors.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals.
3. Snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 499

NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare
wheel and tire assembly.

message for a minimum of five seconds and then
display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure values.

1. The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure 4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will
sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not moniwill flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
tor the tire pressure in the compact spare tire.
solid, the EVIC/DID will display a “SERVICE TPM
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
SYSTEM” message for a minimum of five seconds and
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warnthen display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure
ing limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, a chime will
values.
sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
will still turn ON due to the low tire. The “Inflate Tire 5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare
to XX” message and the graphic with the low tire
tire, the TPMS will update automatically and the Tire
pressure in a different color will be displayed.
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF, as
3. However, after driving the vehicle for up to 20 minlong as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure
utes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the Tire Pressure
warning limit in any of the four active road tires. The
Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
seconds and then remain on solid. In addition, the
above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to
EVIC/DID will display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM”
receive this information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

500 STARTING AND OPERATING

General Information

FUEL REQUIREMENTS

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and 1.4L Turbo Engine
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
This engine is designed to meet all emis• This device may not cause harmful interference.
sion regulations and provide satisfactory
fuel economy and performance when us• This device must accept any interference received,
ing high-quality unleaded #regular# gasoincluding interference that may cause undesired opline having an octane rating of 87. For
eration.
optimum performance and fuel economy the use of 91
The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the octane or higher is recommended.
following licenses:
2.0L And 2.4L Engine
United States
KR55WY9012
Canada
7812D-5WY9012
This engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide excellent
fuel economy and performance when using high-quality unleaded “regular” gasoline having an octane rating of 87.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 501

Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
required. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline
before considering service for the vehicle.

Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.
The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gasoline. Properly blended reformulated gasoline will provide excellent performance and durability of engine and
fuel system components.

Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the Worldwide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which define fuel properties Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxynecessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance, genates such as Ethanol.
and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recomCAUTION!
mends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC specifications if they are available.
DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or gasoReformulated Gasoline
line containing more than 10% Ethanol. Use of these
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner blends may result in starting and drivability probburning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline.” lems, damage critical fuel system components, cause
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

502 STARTING AND OPERATING

CAUTION! (Continued)
emissions to exceed the applicable standard, and/or
cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to illuminate. Pump labels should clearly communicate if a
fuel contains greater than 10% Ethanol.

If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
• Operate in a lean mode

• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on

• Poor engine performance
Problems that result from using gasoline containing
• Poor cold start and cold driveability
Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may • Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion
not be covered under New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with
E-85 perform the following:
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Non-Flex Fuel (FFV) vehicles are compatible with gaso- • Change the engine oil and oil filter
line containing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher
• Disconnect and reconnect the battery
ethanol content may void the vehicle’s warranty.
• Drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer)

More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged
exposure to E-85 fuel.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 503

MMT In Gasoline

Materials Added To Fuel

Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT)
is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
life and reduces emissions system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal
and California reformulated gasoline.

All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
conditions and they would result in additional cost.
Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the
fuel.
Fuel System Cautions

CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
• The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance and damage the emissions control system.
(Continued)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

504 STARTING AND OPERATING

Carbon Monoxide Warnings

CAUTION! (Continued)
• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
or malfunctioning and may require immediate service. Contact your authorized dealer for service
assistance.
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.
Most of these products contain high concentrations
of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such
fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the
manufacturer.

WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.

NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

(Continued)

STARTING AND OPERATING 505

WARNING! (Continued)
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal
conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive
with all side windows fully open.
• Keep the trunk closed when driving your vehicle to
prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous exhaust gases from entering the vehicle.

ADDING FUEL
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)

Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)

1. Place the vehicle in PARK (P) position and switch the
ignition LOCK/OFF.

The fuel filler cap is located behind the fuel filler door, on
the passenger side of the vehicle. If the fuel filler cap is
lost or damaged, be sure the replacement fuel filler cap 2. Press the center-rear edge of the fuel filler door and
release to open.
has been designed for use with this vehicle.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

506 STARTING AND OPERATING

3. Remove the fuel filler cap and hang cap by tether on NOTE: In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the
fill door to prevent damage to body side.
fuel door from opening. If this occurs, lightly push on the
fuel door around the entire perimeter to break the ice
buildup and re-open the door.
4. After you have stopped pumping fuel, remove the fuel
filler nozzle and replace the fuel filler cap.
5. To close the fuel filler door, press the center-rear edge
of the fuel filler door and then release. The fuel door
will close.

Fuel Filler Door and Fuel Filler Cap Tether Hook
1 — Fuel Filler Door Actuator
2 — Fuel Filler Cap Tether Hook

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 507

CAUTION!

WARNING!

• Damage to the fuel system or emission control
system could result from using an improper fuel
filler cap. A poorly fitting cap could let impurities
into the fuel system. Also, a poorly fitting aftermarket cap can cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL)” to illuminate, due to fuel vapors escaping
from the system.
• A poorly fitting fuel filler cap may cause the MIL to
turn on.
• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.

• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is
being filled.
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regulations and may cause the malfunction indicator light
to turn on.
• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on
the ground while filling.
NOTE:
• When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank
is full.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

508 STARTING AND OPERATING

• Tighten the gas cap about one-quarter turn until you • Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
hear one click. This is an indication that the cap is • Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
properly tightened.
• Type of Vehicle
• If the gas cap is not tighten properly, the MIL will come
on. Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time the • Month, Day and Hour of Manufacture (MDH)
vehicle is refueled.
The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
VEHICLE LOADING
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Administration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total
affixed to the driver’s side door or B-Pillar.
load must be limited so that you do not exceed the
Vehicle Certification Label
GVWR.
Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label attached to
Tire Size
the driver’s door B-Pillar.
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents
The label contains the following information:
the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires
• Name of manufacturer
must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.
• Month and year of manufacture

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 509

The best way to figure out the total weight of your
vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size listed.
operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that
Inflation Pressure
it is not over the GVWR.
Rim Size

This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and
all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
shorten useful service life. Heavier suspension components do not necessarily increase the vehicle’s GVWR.
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight
of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo loaded
into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight values are
determined by weighing your vehicle on a commercial
scale before any occupants or cargo are added.
Overloading
The load carrying components (springs, tires, wheels,
etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory service as
long as you do not exceed the GVWR.

Loading
To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty
weight. Store heavier items down low and be sure you
distribute their weight as evenly as possible. Stow all
loose items securely before driving. Improper weight
distribution can have an adverse effect on the way your
vehicle steers and handles, and the way the brakes
operate.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

510 STARTING AND OPERATING

Common Towing Definitions

CAUTION!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
GVWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can break, or
it can change the way your vehicle handles. This
could cause you to lose control. Also, overloading can
shorten the life of your vehicle.

The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)

The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
TRAILER TOWING
exceed the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle
In this section you will find safety tips and information Certification Label” in “Starting and Operating” for
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do further information.
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
review this information to tow your load as efficiently
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
and safely as possible.
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or temTo maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage, porary) loaded in or on the trailer in its #loaded and
follow the requirements and recommendations in this ready for operation# condition. The recommended way to
manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 511

measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a
vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer must be
supported by the scale.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
and trailer when weighed in combination.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either the front
or rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification Label” in “Starting and Operating” for further
information.

WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the
hitch ball by the trailer. The recommended tongue weight
is 10% to 15% for a conventional hitch. You must consider
this as part of the load on your vehicle.
Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the
maximum width of the front of a trailer.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

512 STARTING AND OPERATING

Trailer Sway Control

Weight-Distributing Hitch

The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be
installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue
that typically provides adjustable friction associated with
the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer
swaying motions while traveling.

A weight-distributing hitch system works by applying
leverage through spring (load) bars. They are typically
used for heavier loads, to distribute trailer tongue weight
to the tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s).
When used in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, it provides for a more level ride, offering more
consistent steering and brake control and thereby enhancing towing safety. The addition of a friction/
hydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused by
traffic and crosswinds, contributing positively to tow
vehicle and trailer stability. Trailer sway control and a
weight distributing (load equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue Weights (TW) and may be
required depending on Vehicle and Trailer
configuration/loading to comply with GAWR requirements.

Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
some other connecting point of the truck. These kind of
hitches are the most popular on the market today and
they are commonly used to tow small- and mediumsized trailers.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 513

Trailer Hitch Classification
The following chart provides the industry standard for
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) chart for the Maximum GTW towable
for your given drivetrain.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Max. Trailer Hitch
Class
Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty
3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)

Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Max. Trailer Hitch
Class
Industry Standards
Class III - Heavy Duty
5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy
10,000 lbs (4 540 kg)
Duty
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum
Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given
drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on
your vehicle.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

514 STARTING AND OPERATING

1.4L Turbo Engine

Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight
Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer
weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
Engine/Transmission

Frontal Area

Trailer towing is not recommended.

Max. GTW (Gross Trailer
Wt.)
1,000 lbs (450 kg)

Max. Tongue Wt. (See
Note)
150 lbs (50 kg)

2.0L and 2.4L Auto/
22 sq ft (2.04 sq m)
Man
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo
and should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard. Refer to “Tire
Safety Information” in “Starting and Operating” for further information.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 515

Trailer And Tongue Weight
Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the GTW
on the tow hitch of your vehicle. Loads balanced over the
wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway
severely from side-to-side which will cause loss of control of vehicle and trailer. Failure to load trailers heavier
in front is the cause of many trailer collisions.
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
your bumper or trailer hitch.

5
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
• The tongue weight of the trailer.

• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle.
• The weight of the driver and all passengers.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

516 STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options, or dealer-installed options,
must be considered as part of the total load on your
vehicle. Refer to the “Tire and Loading Information
Placard” in “Tire Safety Information” for the maximum
combined weight of occupants and cargo for your vehicle.
Towing Requirements

CAUTION!
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle
or other parts could be damaged.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps
the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at
the heavier loads.

To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain components, the following guidelines are recom- Perform the maintenance listed in the Maintenance
Schedule. Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further
mended:
information. When towing a trailer, never exceed the
GAWR or GCWR ratings.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 517

WARNING!

WARNING! (Continued)

Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these
guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as
possible:
• Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have a collision.
• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
cause a loss of control, poor performance or damage to the brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering, suspension, chassis structure or tires.

• Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to
the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch.
Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow
enough slack for turning corners.
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on
the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic
transmission in PARK. With a manual transmission, shift the transmission into REVERSE. Always
block or %chock% the trailer wheels.
• GCWR must not be exceeded.

(Continued)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

(Continued)

518 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING! (Continued)
• Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:

“Tires – General Information” in “Starting and Operating” for proper tire inflation procedures.
• Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures before trailer usage.
• Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General
Information” in “Starting and Operating” for the
proper inspection procedure.

1. GVWR
2. GTW
3. GAWR

• When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting and Operating” for proper tire
replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a higher
Towing Requirements — Tires
load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle’s
GVWR and GAWR limits.
• Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized.

• Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 519

Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes

CAUTION!

• Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
personal injury.
• An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
• Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lbs (450 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
2,000 lbs (907 kg).

If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (450 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.

WARNING!
• Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake system and cause it to fail. You might not have brakes
when you need them and could have a collision.
• Towing any trailer will increase your stopping distance. When towing, you should allow for additional
space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front
of you. Failure to do so could result in a collision.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

520 STARTING AND OPERATING

Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four-pin and
seven-pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer
harness and connector.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s
wiring harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle,
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector. 1 — Female Pins
Refer to the following illustrations.
2 — Male Pin
3 — Ground

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

4 — Park
5 — Left Stop/Turn
6 — Right Stop/Turn

STARTING AND OPERATING 521

Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping
and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy
traffic.
Manual Transmission — If Equipped
If using a manual transmission vehicle for trailer towing,
all starts must be in first gear to avoid excessive clutch
slippage.
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
1
2
3
4

—
—
—
—

Battery
Backup Lamps
Right Stop/Turn
Electric Brakes

5 — Ground
6 — Left Stop/Turn
7 — Running Lamps

The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. However, if frequent shifting occurs while in DRIVE, use the
AutoStick® shift control to manually select a lower gear.
NOTE: Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle
under heavy loading conditions, will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup. This action will also
provide better engine braking.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

522 STARTING AND OPERATING

If you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45 minutes • When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
of continuous operation, then change the transmission
you can get back to cruising speed.
fluid and filter as specified for severe usage (police, fleet,
taxi, or frequent trailer towing). Refer to the #Maintenance
• Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
Schedule# for the proper maintenance intervals.
maximize fuel efficiency.
AutoStick®
Cooling System
When using the AutoStick® shift control, select the
To reduce potential for engine and transmission overhighest gear that allows for adequate performance and
heating, take the following actions:
avoids frequent downshifts. For example, choose #4# if
the desired speed can be maintained. Choose #3# or #2# if City Driving
needed to maintain the desired speed.
When stopped for short periods, shift the transmission
To prevent excess heat generation, avoid continuous driving into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.
at high RPM. Reduce vehicle speed as necessary to avoid
Highway Driving
extended driving at high RPM. Return to a higher gear or
vehicle speed when grade and road conditions allow.
Reduce speed.
Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped

Air Conditioning

• Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.

Turn off temporarily.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 523

RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle

Wheels OFF the
Ground

Manual Transmission

Flat Tow

None

Dolly Tow

Front

Transmission in
NEUTRAL
NOT ALLOWED

1.4L Turbo Engine
With Automatic
Transmission
(DDCT)
Transmission in
NEUTRAL
NOT ALLOWED

Rear

NOT ALLOWED

All

Towing Condition

On Trailer

2.0L/2.4L Engine
With Automatic
Transmission
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
OK

NOTE: When recreationally towing your vehicle, always follow applicable state and provincial laws. Contact
state and provincial Highway Safety offices for additional details.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

524 STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE: Vehicles equipped with a manual transmission
or a DDCT transmission (1.4L turbo engine) may be
recreationally towed (flat towed) at any legal highway
speed, for any distance, if the transmission is in NEUTRAL. For vehicles with DDCT transmission (1.4L turbo
automatic), refer to #Shift Lever Override# in #What to Do
in Emergencies# for instructions on shifting the transmission into NEUTRAL when the ignition is OFF. If the
ignition is left in the ACC position, it may be helpful to
disconnect the negative battery cable (and secure it away
from the battery post), to avoid draining the battery.

CAUTION!
• DO NOT flat tow any 2.0L or 2.4L engine vehicle
equipped with an automatic transmission. Damage
to the drivetrain will result. If these vehicles require towing, make sure all the wheels are OFF the
ground.
• Do not dolly tow this vehicle. Use of a towing dolly
can cause significant damage to your vehicle. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission damage.
Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
! HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS . . . . . . . . . . .527 ! JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING . . . . . . . . . .539
! IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . . . . . . . . . . . .527
! WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .528

▫ Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .540
▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .542

▫ Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .528

▫ Jacking And Changing A Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . .543

! TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . .530

▫ Road Tire Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .548

▫ Tire Service Kit Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .530 ! JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . .551
▫ Tire Service Kit Components And Operation . .530

▫ Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . .551

▫ Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions. . . . . . . . . .531

▫ Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .553

▫ Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit . . . . . . . . .534 ! FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . .555
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

526 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

! SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556
! TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . .559

▫ Manual Transmission Or 1.4L Turbo Automatic
(DDCT) Transmission. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .561

▫ 2.0L / 2.4L Automatic Transmission. . . . . . . . .560

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 527

HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS

IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS

The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
center of the instrument panel.
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning • On the highways — slow down.
flashers. When the switch is activated, all direc- • In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission in
tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming
NEUTRAL, but do not increase the engine idle speed.
traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a second time to
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.
an impending overheat condition:
This is an emergency warning system and it should not
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your • If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the • You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even
to high. This allows the heater core to act as a
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers
from the engine cooling system.
may wear down your battery.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

528 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS

CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H,”
pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with
the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops
back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on
the “H,” turn the engine off immediately and call for
service.

Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure
that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any
time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the
vehicle the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a
properly calibrated torque wrench.
Torque Specifications
Lug Nut/Bolt Torque

**Lug Nut/
Bolt Size

100 Ft-Lbs (135 N·m)

M12 x 1.25

WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.

Lug Nut/
Bolt
Socket
Size
19 mm

**Use only Chrysler recommended lug nuts/bolts and
clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting
the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 529

Wheel Mounting Surface

Torque Patterns

Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolt torque to be
nut/bolt has been tightened twice.
sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated
against the wheel.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

530 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

Tire Service Kit Components And Operation

WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED
Small punctures up to ¼” (6 mm) in the tire tread can be
sealed with Tire Service Kit. Foreign objects (e.g., screws
or nails) should not be removed from the tire. Tire Service
Kit can be used in outside temperatures down to approximately -4°F (-20°C).
This kit will provide a temporary tire seal, allowing you
to drive your vehicle up to 100 miles (160 km) with a
maximum speed of 55 mph (90 km/h).

Tire Service Kit Components
1
2
3
4

—
—
—
—

Sealant Bottle
Deflation Button
Pressure Gauge
Power Button

Tire Service Kit Storage
The Tire Service Kit is located in the trunk.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

5 — Mode Select Knob
6 — Sealant Hose (Clear)
7 — Air Pump Hose (Black)
8 — Power Plug (located on the bottom side of the Tire Service Kit)

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 531

Using The Power Button

Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses
Your Tire Service Kit is equipped with the following
symbols to indicate the air or sealant mode.
Selecting Air Mode

Push and release the Power Button (4) once to
turn On the Tire Service Kit. Push and release
the Power Button (4) again to turn Off the Tire
Service Kit.

Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to
this position for air pump operation only. Use Using The Deflation Button
the Black Air Pump Hose (7) when selecting
Press the Deflation Button (2) to reduce the air
this mode.
pressure in the tire if it becomes over-inflated.
Selecting Sealant Mode

Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions
turn to this position to inject the Tire • Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle (1) and
Service Kit Sealant and to inflate the
Sealant Hose (6) prior to the expiration date (printed at
tire. Use the Sealant Hose (clear hose)
the lower right hand corner on the bottle label) to
(6) when selecting this mode.
assure optimum operation of the system. Refer to
“Sealing a Tire with Tire Service Kit” section (F)
“Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement”.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

532 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

from the vehicle or tire and wheel components. Once
the sealant dries, it can easily be peeled off and
properly discarded.
• For optimum performance, make sure the valve stem
on the wheel is free of debris before connecting the Tire
Service Kit.
• You can use the Tire Service Kit air pump to inflate
bicycle tires. The kit also comes with two needles,
located in the Accessory Storage Compartment (on the
bottom of the air pump) for inflating sport balls, rafts,
or similar inflatable items. However, use only the Air
Tire Service Kit Expiration Date Location
Pump Hose (7) and make sure the Mode Select Knob
• The Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) are a one
(5) is in the Air Mode when inflating such items to
tire application use and need to be replaced after each
avoid injecting sealant into them. The Tire Service Kit
use. Always replace these components immediately at
Sealant is only intended to seal punctures less than ¼”
your original equipment vehicle dealer.
(6 mm) diameter in the tread of your vehicle.
• When the Tire Service Kit sealant is in a liquid form, • Do not lift or carry the Tire Service Kit by the hoses.
clean water, and a damp cloth will remove the material
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 533

WARNING!

WARNING! (Continued)

• Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the
vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the
road to avoid the danger of being hit when using
the Tire Service Kit.
• Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle
under the following circumstances:
– If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately
1/4” (6 mm) or larger.
– If the tire has any sidewall damage.
– If the tire has any damage from driving with
extremely low tire pressure.
– If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat
tire.
– If the wheel has any damage.
– If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or
the wheel.

• Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames or
heat source.
• A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants
of the vehicle. Always stow the Tire Service Kit in
the place provided. Failure to follow these warnings can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to
you, your passengers, and others around you.
• Take care not to allow the contents of Tire Service
Kit to come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing.
Tire Service Kit is harmful if inhaled, swallowed,
or absorbed through the skin. It causes skin, eye,
and respiratory irritation. Flush immediately with
plenty of water if there is any contact with eyes or
skin. Change clothing as soon as possible, if there
is any contact with clothing.

(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

(Continued)

534 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

WARNING! (Continued)
• Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains latex. In
case of an allergic reaction or rash, consult a physician immediately. Keep Tire Service Kit out of
reach of children. If swallowed, rinse mouth immediately with plenty of water and drink plenty of
water. Do not induce vomiting! Consult a physician
immediately.

on the ground. This will provide the best positioning
of the kit when injecting the sealant into the deflated
tire and running the air pump. Move the vehicle as
necessary to place the valve stem in this position
before proceeding.
3. Place the transmission in PARK (auto transmission) or
in Gear (manual transmission) and turn Off the ignition.
4. Set the parking brake.

Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit
(A) Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle’s
Hazard Warning flashers.

(B) Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the
Sealant Mode position.

2. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) and then remove the cap
2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the
from the fitting at the end of the hose.
deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the ground.
This will allow the Tire Service Kit Hoses (6) and (7) to 3. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground next to the
deflated tire.
reach the valve stem and keep the Tire Service Kit flat
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 535

4. Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw NOTE: Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the
the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose (6) onto the tire.
valve stem.
If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within 0 – 10
5. Uncoil the Power Plug (8) and insert the plug into the seconds through the Sealant Hose (6):
vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
1. Press the Power Button (4) to turn Off the Tire Service
NOTE: Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or
nails) from the tire.
(C) Injecting Tire Service Kit Sealant Into The
Deflated Tire:
• Always start the engine before turning ON the Tire
Service Kit.

Kit. Disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the valve
stem. Make sure the valve stem is free of debris.
Reconnect the Sealant Hose (6) to the valve stem.
Check that the Mode Select Knob (5) is in the Sealant
Mode position and not Air Mode. Press the Power
Button (4) to turn On the Tire Service Kit.

2. Connect the Power Plug (8) to a different 12 Volt
power outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle, if
NOTE: Manual transmission vehicles must have the
available. Make sure the engine is running before
parking brake engaged and the shift lever in NEUTRAL.
turning ON the Tire Service Kit.
• After pressing the Power Button (4), the sealant (white
fluid) will flow from the Sealant Bottle (1) through the 3. The Sealant Bottle (1) may be empty due to previous
use. Call for assistance.
Sealant Hose (6) and into the tire.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

536 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

NOTE: If the Mode Select Knob (5) is on Air Mode and If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar)
the pump is operating, air will dispense from the Air pressure within 15 minutes:
Pump Hose (7) only, not the Sealant Hose (6).
• The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive
the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the
Sealant Hose (6):
NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, press the Defla1. Continue to operate the pump until sealant is no longer tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recomflowing through hose (typically takes 30 - 70 seconds). mended inflation pressure before continuing.
As the sealant flows through the Sealant Hose (6), the
If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at
Pressure Gauge (3) can read as high as 70 psi (4.8 Bar).
least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes:
The Pressure Gauge (3) will decrease quickly from
approximately 70 psi (4.8 Bar) to the actual tire pressure 1. Press the Power Button (4) to turn off the Tire Service
Kit.
when the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty.
2. The pump will start to inject air into the tire immedi- 2. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the top of the
ately after the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty. Continue to
Sealant Bottle (1) and place the sticker on the instruoperate the pump and inflate the tire to the pressure
ment panel.
indicated on the tire pressure label on the driver-side
3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the
latch pillar (recommended pressure). Check the tire
valve stem, reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of the
pressure by looking at the Pressure Gauge (3).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 537

hose, and place the Tire Service Kit in the vehicle storage
location. Quickly proceed to (D) “Drive Vehicle.”

CAUTION!
• The metal end fitting from Power Plug (8) may get
hot after use, so it should be handled carefully.
• Failure to reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end
of the Sealant Hose (6) can result in sealant contacting your skin, clothing, and the vehicle’s interior. It can also result in sealant contacting internal
Tire Service Kit components which may cause
permanent damage to the kit.

WARNING!
Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire repair.
Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced after
using Tire Service Kit. Do not exceed 55 mph (90
km/h) until the tire is repaired or replaced. Failure to
follow this warning can result in injuries that are
serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others
around you.
(E) After Driving:
Pull over to a safe location. Refer to “Whenever You Stop
to Use Tire Service Kit” before continuing.

(D) Drive Vehicle:

1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the Air
Mode position.
Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating the tire,
drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) or 10 minutes to ensure 2. Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug into the
distribution of the Tire Service Kit Sealant within the tire.
vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
Do not exceed 55 mph (90 km/h).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

538 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

3. Uncoil the Air Pump Hose (7) (black in color) and 2. Disconnect the Tire Service Kit from the valve stem,
screw the fitting at the end of hose (7) onto the valve
reinstall the cap on the valve stem and unplug from 12
Volt outlet.
stem.
4. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure 3. Place the Tire Service Kit in its proper storage area in
Gauge (3).
the vehicle.
4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at the
earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or tire
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive
service center.
the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
5. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the instrument
If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 Bar) or higher:
panel after the tire has been repaired.
1. Press the Power Button (4) to turn on Tire Service Kit
6. Replace the Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6)
and inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire
assembly at your authorized dealer as soon as posand loading information label on the driver-side door
sible. Refer to (F) “Sealant Bottle and Hose Replaceopening.
ment”.
NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, press the DeflaNOTE: When having the tire serviced, advise the authotion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recomrized dealer or service center that the tire has been sealed
mended inflation pressure before continuing.
using the Tire Service Kit.
If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar):

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 539

6. Verify that the cap is installed on the fitting at the end
of the Sealant Hose (6) and return the hose to its
storage area (located on the bottom of the air pump).

(F) Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement:
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) (clear in color).

2. Locate the round Sealant Bottle release button in the
7. Return the Tire Service Kit to its storage location in the
recessed area under the sealant bottle.
vehicle.
3. Press the Sealant Bottle release button. The Sealant
Bottle (1) will pop up. Remove the bottle and dispose JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
of it accordingly.
4. Clean any remaining sealant from the Tire Service Kit
housing.
5. Position the new Sealant Bottle (1) in the housing so
that the Sealant Hose (6) aligns with the hose slot in
the front of the housing. Press the bottle into the
housing. An audible click will be heard indicating the
bottle is locked into place.

WARNING!

• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

(Continued)

540 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage — If Equipped

WARNING! (Continued)
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is
on a jack.
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be used to
lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle
should be jacked on a firm level surface only.
Avoid ice or slippery areas.

The jack and spare tire are both stowed under an access
cover in the trunk. Follow these steps to access the jack
and spare tire.
1. Open the trunk.
2. Lift the access cover using the pull strap.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 541

Pull Strap

Jack Location

3. Remove the fastener securing the jack and spare tire.

4. Remove the scissors jack and wheel bolt wrench from
the spare wheel as an assembly. Turn the jack screw to
the left to loosen the wheel bolt wrench, and remove
the wrench from the jack assembly.
5. Remove the spare tire.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

542 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.

WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire
repaired or replaced immediately.

3. Set the parking brake.
4. Place the shift lever into PARK.
5. Turn OFF the ignition.

6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally
opposite of the jacking position. For
Preparations For Jacking
example, if changing the right front
tire, block the left rear wheel.
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible. Avoid icy or slippery
NOTE: Passengers should not remain
areas.
in the vehicle when the vehicle is
being jacked.

WARNING!

Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off
the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack
or changing the wheel.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 543

Jacking And Changing A Tire

WARNING! (Continued)

WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
• Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in
REVERSE.
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.

• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.

(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Jack Warning Label

544 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and wheel bolt wrench.

CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.

NOTE: The jack handle attaches to the side of the jack
with two attachment points. When the jack is partially
expanded, the tension between the two attachment
points holds the jack handle in place.

Jacking Locations

Removing Jack Handle From Jack
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 545

2. If equipped with aluminum wheels where the center
cap covers the wheel bolts, use the wheel bolt wrench
to pry the center cap off carefully before raising the
vehicle.
3. Before raising the vehicle, use the wheel bolt wrench
to loosen, but not remove, the wheel bolts on the
wheel with the flat tire. Turn the wheel bolts counterclockwise one turn while the wheel is still on the
ground.
4. Place the jack underneath the notched lift area that is
closest to the flat tire. Turn the jack screw clockwise to
firmly engage the jack saddle with the lift area of the
sill flange, centering the jack saddle between the
locating notches on the sill flange.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Front Jacking Location

546 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
6. Remove the wheel bolts and tire.
7. Mount the spare tire.

CAUTION!
Rear Jacking Location

5. Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the flat tire
and install the spare tire.

Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem
facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the
spare tire is mounted incorrectly.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 547

NOTE:
• For vehicles so equipped, do not attempt to install a
center cap or wheel cover on the compact spare.
• Refer to “Compact Spare Tire” and to “Limited-Use
Spare” under “Tires — General Information” in
“Starting and Operating” for additional warnings,
cautions, and information about the spare tire, its
use, and operation.

Mounting Spare Tire

8. Install the wheel bolts with the threaded end of the
wheel bolt toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the
wheel bolts.

WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not fully tighten the wheel bolts until the vehicle
has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

548 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

9. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.

WARNING!

10. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on the A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased hard stop could endanger the occupants of the veleverage. Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern hicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
until each wheel bolt has been tightened twice. Refer the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire
to “Torque Specifications” in this section for proper repaired or replaced immediately.
lug bolt torque. If in doubt about the correct tight- Road Tire Installation
ness, have them checked with a torque wrench by
Vehicles Equipped With Wheel Covers
your authorized dealer or at a service station.
11. Lower the jack until it is free. Remove the wheel 1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
blocks. Reassemble the lug wrench to the jack assem- 2. To ease the installation process for steel wheels with
bly and stow it in the spare tire area. Secure the
wheel covers, install two wheel bolts on the wheel
assembly using the means provided. Release the
which are on each side of the valve stem. Install the
parking brake before driving the vehicle.
wheel bolts with the threaded end of the bolt toward
the wheel. Lightly tighten the wheel bolts.
12. Stow the jack, tools and flat tire.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 549

snapping the cover over the two wheel bolts. Do not
use a hammer or excessive force to install the cover.
4. Install the remaining wheel bolts with the threaded
end of the wheel bolt toward the wheel. Lightly
tighten the wheel bolts.

WARNING!

Tire And Wheel Cover Or Center Cap
1 — Valve Stem
2 — Valve Notch
3 — Wheel bolt

4 — Wheel Cover
5 — Road Wheel

To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
5. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.

6. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
3. Align the valve notch in the wheel cover with the
leverage. Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern until
valve stem on the wheel. Install the cover by hand,
each wheel bolt has been tightened twice. Refer to
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

550 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

“Torque Specifications” in this section for proper lug
bolt torque. If in doubt about the correct tightness,
have them checked with a torque wrench by your
authorized dealer or service station.

WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.

7. Lower the jack until it is free. Remove the wheel
blocks. Reassemble the lug wrench to the jack assembly and stow it in the spare tire area. Secure the 3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
assembly using the means provided. Release the parkhandle counterclockwise.
ing brake before driving the vehicle.
4. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on the
8. After 25 miles (40 km) check the wheel bolt torque
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
with a torque wrench to ensure that all wheel bolts are
leverage. Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern until
properly seated against the wheel.
each wheel bolt has been tightened twice. Refer to
“Torque Specifications” in this section for the proper
Road Tire Installation
lug bolt torque. If in doubt about the correct tightness,
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
have them checked with a torque wrench by your
authorized dealer or service station.
2. Install the remaining wheel bolts with the threaded
end of the wheel bolt toward the wheel. Lightly
tighten the wheel bolts.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 551

5. Lower the jack until it is free. Remove the wheel
blocks. Reassemble the lug wrench to the jack assembly and stow it in the spare tire area. Secure the
assembly using the means provided. Release the parking brake before driving the vehicle.
6. After 25 miles (40 km) check the wheel bolt torque
with a torque wrench to ensure that all wheel bolts are
properly seated against the wheel.
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES

CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.

WARNING!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.
It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.

If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jumpstarted using a set of jumper cables and a battery in Preparations For Jump-Start
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster
pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly The battery in your vehicle is located in the front of the
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully. engine compartment, behind the left headlight assembly.
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack NOTE: The positive battery post is covered with a
follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and protective cap. Lift up on the cap to gain access to the
positive battery post.
precautions.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

552 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

WARNING!

Positive Battery Post

• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent
electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission
into PARK (manual transmission in NEUTRAL) and
turn the ignition to LOCK.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical accessories.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 553

3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.

WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
Jump-Starting Procedure

CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.

WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump-starting procedure could
result in personal injury or property damage due to
battery explosion.

3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to a good engine ground (exposed metal part of
the discharged vehicle’s engine) away from the battery
and the fuel injection system.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

554 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables
in the reverse sequence:

WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-)
post of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and
could result in personal injury. Only use the specific
ground point, do not use any other exposed metal
parts.

Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable
from the engine ground of the vehicle with the discharged battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.

5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then 3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged
from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable from the positive (+) post of the vehicle with the
discharged battery.
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle
you should have the battery and charging system inspected at your authorized dealer.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 555

CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets
draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough without engine operation,
the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to
degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from
starting.

pressing the accelerator. Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that will maintain the rocking
motion, without spinning the wheels or racing the engine.
NOTE: 1.4L Turbo automatic transmission vehicles cannot be rocked in this manner, because the transmission
will not allow shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE while
the wheels are turning.

CAUTION!

FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it
can often be moved by a rocking motion. Turn your
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
front wheels. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE
and REVERSE (with automatic transmission) or 2nd Gear
and REVERSE (with manual transmission) while gently

Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to
transmission overheating and failure. Allow the engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at
least one minute after every five rocking-motion
cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce
the risk of clutch or transmission failure during
prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

556 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

NOTE: Press the #ESC Off# switch, to place the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system in “partial off” mode,
before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake
Control” in “Starting And Operating” for further information. Once the vehicle has been freed, press the #ESC
Off# switch again to restore #ESC On# mode.

CAUTION!
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between DRIVE/2nd gear and REVERSE, do not spin
the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission shifting occurring).

WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or
even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE
If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be
moved out of the PARK position, you can use the
following procedure to temporarily move the shift lever:
1. Turn the engine OFF.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 557

3. Remove the rubber storage tray liner from the center 4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
console, then lift up the front of the shift lever bezel,
5. Insert a small screwdriver or similar tool down into
carefully disengage the bezel from the shift lever
the access slot at the front of the shift lever assembly,
housing, and slide it up to the top of the shift lever.
and push and hold the white override release lever
down.

Shift Lever Bezel
Override Release Tab
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

558 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

6. Move the shift lever to the NEUTRAL position.

7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
8. Reinstall the shift lever bezel (use care to avoid
pinching the wiring), and the rubber storage tray liner.

Shift Lever

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 559

TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
NOTE: This section describes procedures for towing a
disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service.
Towing Condition

Wheels OFF The
Ground

Flat Tow

NONE

2.0L / 2.4L AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
NOT ALLOWED

Dolly Tow

Rear
Front
ALL

NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
OK

Flatbed

MANUAL TRANSMISSION
Transmission in
NEUTRAL
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
BEST METHOD

1.4L TURBO AUTOMATIC (DDCT)
TRANSMISSION
Transmission in
NEUTRAL
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
BEST METHOD

Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding
equipment designed for this purpose, following equip- vehicles under tow must be observed.
ment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is
mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

560 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

2.0L / 2.4L Automatic Transmission

CAUTION!
• DO NOT use sling-type equipment when towing.
Vehicle damage may occur.
• When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do not
attach to front or rear suspension components.
Damage to your vehicle may result from improper
towing.
• The manufacturer does not recommend towing this
vehicle using a tow dolly. Vehicle damage may
occur.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defroster, etc.)
while being towed, the key must be in the ON/RUN
position, not the ACC position.

This vehicle must be towed with all four wheels OFF
the ground using a flatbed.

CAUTION!
• DO NOT flat tow any 2.0L or 2.4L vehicle equipped
with an automatic transmission. Damage to the
drivetrain will result. If these vehicles require
towing, make sure all the wheels are OFF the
ground.
• Do not dolly tow this vehicle. Use of a towing dolly
can cause significant damage to your vehicle. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission damage.
Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 561

If the key fob is unavailable, or the vehicle’s battery is
discharged, refer to “Shift Lever Override” in this section
for instructions on shifting the automatic transmission
out of PARK for loading onto a flatbed truck.
Manual Transmission Or 1.4L Turbo Automatic
(DDCT) Transmission
• The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle
with all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
• Manual transmission and 1.4L turbo automatic (DDCT)
transmission vehicles can also be flat towed (all four
wheels on the ground) with the transmission in NEUTRAL. For vehicles with DDCT transmission (1.4L turbo
automatic), refer to #Shift Lever Override# in this section
for instructions on shifting the transmission into NEUTRAL when the ignition is OFF. If the ignition is left in
the ACC position, it may be helpful to disconnect the

negative battery cable (and secure it away from the
battery post), to avoid draining the battery.

CAUTION!
• DO NOT flat tow any disabled vehicle if condition
is related to the clutch, transmission or driveline.
Additional damage to the drivetrain could result.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe engine, transmission,
or drivetrain damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
! ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 1.4L TURBO . . . .565

▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .572

! ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.0L . . . . . . . . . .566

▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .575

! ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.4L . . . . . . . . . .567

▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .575

! ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II . .568

▫ Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .576

▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . .568

▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .576

! EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .569

▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .577

! REPLACEMENT PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .570
! DEALER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .571
! MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . .571

▫ A/C Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .578
▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .580
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .581
▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .581

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

564 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .582 ! VEHICLE STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .609
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .585 ! REPLACEMENT BULBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .609
▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .591 ! BULB REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .611
▫ Automatic Transmission — If Equipped . . . . .593

▫ Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .611

▫ Manual Transmission — If Equipped . . . . . . .595

▫ Backup Lamps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612

▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .595

▫ License Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .613

! FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .602

! FLUID CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .615

▫ Interior Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .602

! FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE
PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .616

▫ Underhood Fuses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .604

▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .616

▫ Body Control Module (BCM) Fuses . . . . . . . . .607

▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .619

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 565

ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 1.4L TURBO

7
1
2
3
4

—
—
—
—

Engine Coolant Reservoir
Engine Oil Level Indicator
Engine Oil Fill
Brake Fluid Reservoir

5
6
7
8

— Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
— Washer Fluid Reservoir
— Battery
— Air Cleaner Filter

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

566 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.0L

1
2
3
4

—
—
—
—

Engine Coolant Reservoir
Engine Oil Fill
Brake Fluid Reservoir
Power Distribution Center (Fuses)

5
6
7
8

— Washer Fluid Reservoir
— Battery
— Engine Oil Level Indicator
— Air Cleaner Filter

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 567

ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.4L

7
1
2
3
4

—
—
—
—

Engine Coolant Reservoir
Engine Oil Fill
Brake Fluid Reservoir
Power Distribution Center (Fuses)

5
6
7
8

— Washer Fluid Reservoir
— Battery
— Engine Oil Level Indicator
— Air Cleaner Filter

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

568 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light” (MIL). It
will also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.

CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and driveability.
The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
tests can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
After fuel is added, the vehicle diagnostic system can
determine if the fuel filler cap is possibly loose or
improperly installed. A “gASCAP” message will be displayed in the instrument cluster. Tighten the gas cap until
a #clicking# sound is heard. This is an indication that the
gas cap is properly tightened. Press the trip odometer
RESET button to turn off the message. If the problem

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 569

persists, the message will appear the next time the
vehicle is started. This might indicate a damaged cap. If
the problem is detected twice in a row, the system will
turn on the MIL. Resolving the problem will turn the MIL
light off.

Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replacement. If the OBD II system should be determined not
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.

Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which
you can use prior to going to the test station. To check if
your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must do the
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass following:
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
not crank or start the engine.
For states that require an Inspection and Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not start this test over.
on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II 2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON
system is ready for testing.
position, you will see the MIL symbol come on as part
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS

of a normal bulb check.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

570 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
happen:
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
• The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your
running.
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
not proceed to the I/M station.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
• The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the
engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II system
is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.

Use of genuine MOPAR® parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to ensure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-MOPAR® parts for mainteIf your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your nance and repairs will not be covered by the New Vehicle
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was Limited Warranty.
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 571

DEALER SERVICE

MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES

Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.

The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.

NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could result in civil
penalties being assessed against you.

WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a service
job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.

Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
“Maintenance Schedule”, there are other components
which may require servicing or replacement in the future.

CAUTION!
• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or perform repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
components or negatively impact vehicle performance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
examined by an authorized dealer or qualified
repair center.
(Continued)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

572 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION! (Continued)
• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of your
vehicle and also allow extended maintenance intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in these components as the chemicals can damage your engine,
transmission, power steering or air conditioning.
Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed because of
component malfunction, use only the specified
fluid for the flushing procedure.
Engine Oil

fully warmed engine is shut off. Do not check oil level
before starting the engine after it has sat overnight.
Checking engine oil level when the engine is cold will
give you an incorrect reading.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground and
only when the engine is hot, will improve the accuracy of
the oil level readings. Maintain the oil level between the
range markings on the dipstick. The range markings will
consist of a crosshatch zone which depicts the MIN at the
low end of the range and MAX at the high end of the
range. Adding 1 qt (1L) of oil when the reading is at the
low end of the indicated range will result in the oil level
at the full end of the indicator range.

Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a

CAUTION!
Do not overfill the engine. Overfilling the engine
will cause oil aeration, which can lead to loss of oil

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

(Continued)

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 573

CAUTION! (Continued)
pressure and an increase in oil temperature. This
could damage your engine. Also, be sure the oil fill
cap is replaced and tightened after adding oil.

manufacturer recommends engine oils that are API Certified Grade SN or better and meet the requirements of
Chrysler Material Standard MS-12991.
Engine Oil Selection — 2.0L And 2.4L Engine

For best performance and maximum protection for all
engines under all types of operating conditions, the
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is manufacturer recommends engine oils that are API Certime to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance. tified Grade SN or better and meet the requirements of
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for further informa- Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395.
tion.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 1.4L Turbo
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change in- Engine
tervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve MOPAR® SAE 5W-40 synthetic engine oil or equivalent
months, whichever occurs first.
Pennzoil® or Shell Helix® is recommended for all operChange Engine Oil

ating temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy. Your engine
For best performance and maximum protection for all
oil filler cap also states the recommended engine oil
engines under all types of operating conditions, the
viscosity grade for your engine.
Engine Oil Selection — 1.4L Turbo Engine

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

574 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi- Materials Added To Engine Oil
fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num- The manufacturer strongly recommends against the adber should not be used.
dition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 2.0L And 2.4L the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental addiEngine
tives.
MOPAR® SAE 0W-20 engine oil or equivalent Pennzoil®
or Shell Helix® is recommended for all operating tem- Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
peratures. This engine oil improves low temperature Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
starting and vehicle fuel economy. Your engine oil filler oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
cap also states the recommended engine oil viscosity indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
grade for your engine.
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi- station or governmental agency for advice on how and
fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num- where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
your area.
ber should not be used.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 575

Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
at every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil
filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality
of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high
quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. MOPAR® engine oil filters are a high quality oil
filter and are recommended.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter

WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection

Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
maintenance intervals.
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR® engine air
cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recommended.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

576 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Tires

WARNING!

Checking For Tire Wear
Once a month, check the tire inflation pressures and look
for unusual wear or damage. Rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator
system turns on.
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required.

• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water. Refer to
“Jump-Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
(Continued)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 577

Air Conditioner Maintenance

WARNING! (Continued)
• The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that
should not be disconnected and should only be
replaced with a battery of the same type (vented).

CAUTION!
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive
(+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery. Do not
use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.

For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.

WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,
for further warranty information.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

578 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

A/C Air Filter

CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling HFO 1234yf
HFO 1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product
with a low GWP (Global Warming Potential). However,
the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by authorized dealer or other service
facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.

Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.

WARNING!
Do not remove the A/C air filter while the blower is
operating or personal injury may result.
The A/C air filter is located in the fresh air inlet on the
lower right of center console. Perform the following
procedure to replace the filter:
1. Remove the passenger side console closeout. (located
on the right side of the center console).

NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil, and refrigerants.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 579

Passenger Side Console Closeout

Filter Cover Retaining Tab

2. Disengage the retaining tab that secures the filter 3. Remove the A/C air filter by pulling it straight out of
cover to the HVAC housing, and remove the cover.
the housing. Take note of the air filter position indicators.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

580 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!
The A/C air filter is identified with an arrow to
indicate airflow direction through the filter. Failure
to properly install the filter will result in the need to
replace it more often.
5. Install the passenger side console closeout.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
sealers, stop leak products, seal conditioners, compressor
oil, or refrigerants.
Air Conditioning Filter Removal

Body Lubrication

4. Install the A/C air filter with the air filter position
indicators pointing in the same direction as removal.
When installing the filter cover, make sure the retaining tab fully engages the cover.

Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should
be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease,
such as MOPAR® Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy
operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 581

the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned
should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after
lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed.
Particular attention should also be given to hood latching
components to ensure proper function. When performing
other underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.

Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.

The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies dependyear, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
ing on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR®
performance of blades may be present with chattering,
Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions
are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necesWindshield Wiper Blades
sary.
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a Adding Washer Fluid
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulaThe washer fluid reservoir is located in the engine
tions of salt or road film.
compartment, and the fluid level should be checked at
regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield
washer solvent only (not radiator antifreeze).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

582 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some
washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe
clean the wiper blades, this will help blade performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
rating information can be found on most washer fluid
containers.

WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.

Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the
exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 583

WARNING!

CAUTION!

• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing
CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
information.
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials might
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn.

• The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the
effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control
device and may seriously reduce engine performance and cause serious damage to the engine.
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.
In the event of engine malfunction, particularly
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

584 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con- To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damverter will not require maintenance. However, it is im- age:
portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure • Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
damage.
motion.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control • Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
vehicle.
against you.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications, should be obtained immediately.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 585

Coolant Checks

Cooling System

WARNING!
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition
switch to the OFF position. The fan is temperature
controlled and can start at any time the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
• You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had
time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system
pressure cap when the radiator is hot.

Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
rusty in appearance, the system should be drained,
flushed and refilled with fresh engine coolant (antifreeze). Check the front of the A/C condenser for any
accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently
spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the
face of the condenser.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE: Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead
to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
needed to be added to the system please contact your
local authorized dealer.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

586 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains visible
sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and flush with
OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to MS-12106).
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.

CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, the cooling system will
need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
OAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106), by an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
(Continued)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 587

CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.

you use the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS-12106) throughout the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze)
that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-12106. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
• We recommend using MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology) that meets the requirements of Chrysler
Material Standard MS-12106.

• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material StanYour vehicle has been built with an improved engine
dard MS-12106 and distilled water. Use higher concencoolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS-12106) that
trations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below
allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine cool−34° F (−37° C) are anticipated.
ant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000
miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reduc- • Use only high purity water such as distilled or deioning this extended maintenance period, it is important that
ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
Adding Coolant

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

588 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water • Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recomwill reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
mended and can result in cooling system damage. If
engine cooling system.
HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency,
have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to mainOAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106) as soon as
tain the proper level of protection against freezing acpossible.
cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where
Cooling System Pressure Cap
the vehicle is operated.
NOTE:

The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze).

• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
needed to be added to the system please contact your
local authorized dealer.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 589

WARNING!
• Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add
engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is
overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool
an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to
build up in the cooling system. To prevent scalding
or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while the
system is hot or under pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result.
Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant

engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in
puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek
emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground
spills immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant expansion bottle provides a quick visual
method for determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the engine off and cold, the level of the
engine coolant (antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the “MAX” and “MIN” lines marked on the bottle.
As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once a
month.

Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
with your local authorities to determine the disposal maintain the proper level, it should be added to the
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by ani- coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
mals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

590 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
for leaks.
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is nor- • Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106)
mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporyour engine which contains aluminum components.
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
• Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow
Points To Remember

hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be • Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.

• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in • Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (antiONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
freeze) needs to be added, the contents of the coolant
result in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze)
expansion bottle must also be protected against freezperformance, poor gas mileage, and increased emising.
sions.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 591

Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before
removing the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
fluid level up to the requirements described on the brake
system components should be inspected periodically.
fluid reservoir. Fluid level can be expected to fall as the
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
brake pads wear. The brake fluid level should be checked
maintenance intervals.
when the pads are replaced. However, low fluid level
may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed.
Brake System

WARNING!

NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a manual transmission, the brake fluid reservoir supplies fluid to both
the brake system and the clutch release system. The two
systems are separated in the reservoir, and a leak in one
system will not affect the other system. The manual
transmission clutch release system should not require
fluid replacement during the life of the vehicle. If the
brake fluid reservoir is low and the brake system does
Brake Master Cylinder
not indicate any leaks or other problems, it may be a
The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked result of a leak in the hydraulic clutch release system. See
when performing under hood services, or immediately if your local authorized dealer for service.
the brake system warning light is on.
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or
riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

592 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.

WARNING!
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
can severely damage your brake system and/or
impair its performance. The proper type of brake
fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the
original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder
reservoir.
(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has
been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master
cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake
fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the
air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may
cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
(Continued)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 593

WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
This could result in a collision.

only the manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this
section for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain
the transmission fluid at the correct level using the
recommended fluid.

CAUTION!

CAUTION!
Use of improper brake fluids will affect overall
clutch system performance. Improper brake fluids
may damage the clutch system resulting in loss of
clutch function and the ability to shift the transmission.

Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration
in transmission shift quality, and will require more
frequent fluid and filter changes. Refer to “Fluids,
Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this section for
fluid specifications.
No chemical flushes should be used in any transmission;
only the approved lubricant should be used.

Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

594 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Special Additives

Fluid Level Check

The manufacturer strongly recommends against using The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not
any special additives in the transmission.
require adjustment under normal operating conditions.
Routine fluid level checks are not required, therefore the
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
transmission has no dipstick. Your authorized dealer can
product and its performance may be impaired by supplecheck your transmission fluid level using special service
mental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additools. If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunctives to the transmission. The only exception to this
tion, visit your authorized dealer immediately to have
policy is the use of special dyes for diagnosing fluid
the fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle with an
leaks. Avoid using transmission sealers as they may
improper fluid level can cause severe transmission damadversely affect seals.
age.

CAUTION!

Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission components. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.

If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your authorized dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper
tools to adjust the fluid level accurately.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 595

Fluid and Filter Changes

Fluid Level Check

Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the
life of the vehicle. However, if the vehicle is used for
frequent trailer towing, police, fleet, taxi, etc., change the
fluid as indicated in the Maintenance Schedule. In addition, change the fluid (and filter, if equipped) if the fluid
becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is disassembled for any reason.

The transmission is designed to be fill for life. The oil
does not need to be check unless there is an oil leak.
Should the transmission be leaking oil, the transmission
should be serviced to correct the condition.

Manual Transmission — If Equipped

Frequency Of Fluid Change
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life of
the vehicle. Fluid changes are not necessary unless lubricant has become contaminated with water.

Lubricant Selection

NOTE: If contaminated with water, the fluid should be
Use only the manufacturers recommended transmission changed immediately.
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

596 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

passable in snow and ice, and chemicals that are sprayed
on trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are
highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside
parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants, road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated,
extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and
underbody protection.

• Insects, tree sap and tar.

• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.

• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.

Washing

• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle in
the shade using MOPAR® Car Wash, or a mild car wash
soap, and rinse the panels completely with clear water.

The following maintenance recommendations will enable
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumuyou to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR® Super Kleen Bug
resistance built into your vehicle.
and Tar Remover to remove.
What Causes Corrosion?
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR®
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
The most common causes are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
• Stone and gravel impact.

• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 597

CAUTION!
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder that will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa)
can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
Special Care

• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The
cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of
the owner.
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.

• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive • If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month.
• Use MOPAR® Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as
possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
match the color of your vehicle.
of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and
open.

Wheel And Wheel Trim Care

• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint, • All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly
considered the responsibility of the owner.
with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

598 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

• To remove heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use
MOPAR® Wheel Cleaner.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor or
Black Satin Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel cleaners,
abrasives or polishing compounds. They will permanently damage this finish and such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. USE ONLY
MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used
on a regular basis this is all that is required to maintain
this finish.

CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
or metal polishes. Do not use oven cleaner. These
products may damage the wheel’s protective finish.
Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions
(Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)
or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel’s protective finish. Only MOPAR® Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent is recommended.
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure — If
Equipped
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following manner:
• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
with a clean, dry towel.
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.

• For tough stains, apply MOPAR® Total Clean or
equivalent, or a mild soap solution to a clean, damp
cloth and remove the stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to
remove soap residue.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 599

Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of
and MOPAR® Total Clean or equivalent. Care should be
protectants on Stain Repel products.
taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any
liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids,
Interior Care
Use MOPAR® Fabric Cleaner or equivalent to clean solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean
fabric upholstery and MOPAR® Carpet Cleaner or your leather upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original condition.
equivalent for carpeting.
• For grease stains, apply MOPAR® Multi-Purpose
Cleaner or equivalent to a clean, damp cloth and
remove the stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove
soap residue.

Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with a damp
cloth, or MOPAR® Satin Select or equivalent. Do not use
harsh cleaners or Armor All®. Use MOPAR® Total Clean
or equivalent to clean vinyl upholstery.
MOPAR® Total Clean or equivalent is specifically recommended for leather upholstery.

WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

600 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

quarter window equipped with the radio antenna. Do
not use scrapers or other sharp instruments that may
Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and
scratch the elements.
less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
directly on the mirror.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
Instrument Panel Cover
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol- The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface which
minimizes reflections on the windshield. Do not use
lowed by rinsing.
protectants or other products which may cause undesirDo not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
able reflections. Use soap and warm water to restore the
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
low glare surface.
Glass Surfaces
Cleaning Headlights

All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with MOPAR® Glass Cleaner or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 601

Instrument Panel Bezels

Seat Belt Maintenance

CAUTION!
When installing hanging air fresheners in your vehicle, read the installation instructions carefully.
Some air fresheners will damage the finish of
painted or decorated parts if allowed to directly
contact any surface.

Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use MOPAR® Total Clean, a
mild soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do not remove
the belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft
cloth.

Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses

Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are buckles do not work properly.
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
WARNING!
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft rag or micro-fiber towel. A mild
soap solution may be used, but do not use high
alcohol content or abrasive cleaners. If soap is used,
wipe clean with a clean damp rag.

A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do

2. Dry with a soft cloth.

(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

602 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)

not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.).

injury, fire and/or property damage.
• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition
is off and that all the other services are switched off
and/or disengaged.
• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an authorized dealer.
• If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, gearbox system) or steering system
blows, contact an authorized dealer.

FUSES

WARNING!
• When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appropriate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as
the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another
fuse of higher amp rating. Never replace a blown
fuse with metal wires or any other material. Failure
to use proper fuses may result in serious personal

Interior Fuses
The interior fuses are located on the drivers side under
the instrument panel.

(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 603

Cavity
F1
F2

Cartridge Fuse
–
–

Mini Fuse
20 Amp Yellow
20 Amp Yellow

–

10 Amp Red

F4
F5

–
–

15 Amp Blue
10 Amp Red

F18
F20

–
–

15 Amp Blue
10 Amp Red

F21
F22
F23

–
–
–

10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
20 Amp Yellow
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Description
Front Heated Seats – If Equipped
Rear Heated Seats, Heated Steering Wheel – If
Equipped
Park Assist Module, Rear Camera, Left and
Right Blind Spot Sensor, Compass – If
Equipped
Instrument Cluster
HVAC, Humidity Sensor, In-Car Temperature
Sensor, Inside Mirror Assembly
Radio
Steering Column Control Module, Switch
Bank
Diagnostic Port
Universal Garage Door Opener, EOM
Sunroof

604 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Cavity
F24
F25
F26
F27

Cartridge Fuse
–
–
–
–

Mini Fuse
5 Amp Tan
5 Amp Tan
5 Amp Tan
10 Amp Red

Description
Run/Accessory Relay
Transmission Control Module #4
Stop Lamp Switch
Pneumatic Lumbar Support

Underhood Fuses
The Power Distribution Center is located on the right side
of the engine compartment, behind the battery.

Power Distribution Center
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 605

Cavity
F01
F02
F03
F04
F05
F06
F07
F09
F10
F11
F14
F15
F16
F17
F18

Maxi Fuse
70 Amp Tan
60 Amp Blue
30 Amp Green
40 Amp Orange
40 Amp Orange
30 Amp Green
40 Amp Orange
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

Mini Fuse
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
5 Amp Tan
10 Amp Red
20 Amp Yellow
15 Amp Blue
15 Amp Blue
15 Amp Blue
15 Amp Blue
20 Amp Yellow
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Description
Body Control Module #1
Body Control Module #2
Output For Starter Relay #1
ESC Pump Motor
Transmission Control Module #1
Body Control Module #3
EBL RLY Coil, Blower Motor RLY Coil
Radiator Fan
ORC
Run/Start, Engine Control Module
Transmission Control Module #2
Transmission Control Module #3
Engine Control Module, Ignition Coils
Brake System Module
Engine Control Module

606 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Cavity
F19
F20
F21
F22
F23
F24
F30
F81
F82
F83
F84
F85

Maxi Fuse
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
60 Amp Blue
30 Amp Green
40 Amp Orange
–
–

Mini Fuse
10 Amp Red
30 Amp Green
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
25 Amp Clear
20 Amp Yellow
20 Amp Yellow
–
–
–
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red

F86

–

20 Amp Yellow

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Description
A/C Compressor Clutch
Rear Defroster (EBL)
Fuel Pump
Occupant Restraint Controller
Brake System Module
Engine Control Module, Fuel Injectors
Power Outlet (Console)
Interior PDC Battery Feed, Power Seats
Amplifier
HVAC Blower Motor
Cigar Lighter
Sunroof, LRSM, Power Outlet (Console),
UCI/AUX Port, Cigar Lighter
–

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 607

Cavity
F87

Maxi Fuse
–

Mini Fuse
10 Amp Red

F88

–

10 Amp Red

Description
Wastegate, Purge Solenoid, OBD Vent
Valve, Oxygen Sensor Heaters
Heated Outside Mirrors

Body Control Module (BCM) Fuses
Cavity
F12
F13
F31
F32
F33
F34
F36
F37
F38

Cartridge Fuse
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

Mini Fuse
–
15 Amp Blue
–
10 Amp Red
25 Amp Clear
25 Amp Clear
15 Amp Blue
10 Amp Red
20 Amp Yellow
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Description
Spare
Left Headlamp
Spare
Interior Lighting/Decklid/Liftgate Release
Window Motor – Driver
Window Motor – Passenger
Intrusion Module
Instrument Panel Cluster
Door Locks

608 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Cavity
F42
F43
F47
F48
F49
F50
F51

Cartridge Fuse
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

Mini Fuse
–
20 Amp Yellow
5 Amp Tan
20 Amp Yellow
7.5 Amp Brown
7.5 Amp Brown
7.5 Amp Brown

F53
F89
F90
F91
F92
F93

–
–
–
–
–
–

7.5 Amp Brown
5 Amp Tan
7.5 Amp Brown
7.5 Amp Brown
7.5 Amp Brown
15 Amp Blue

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Description
Spare
Windshield Washer Pump
Transmission Control Module (Tcm)
Spare
Stop Lamp Switch
Pneumatic Lumbar Support
Cd/Hands-Free Module – Bluetooth/
Radio Display
Driver Window Switch/Power Mirrors
Trunk Lamp
Front Fog Lamps – Right
Front Fog Lamps – Left
High Beams (Shutters)
Right Headlamp

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 609

VEHICLE STORAGE
If you will not be using your vehicle for more than 21 days,
you may want to take steps to preserve your battery.

adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
of compressor damage when the system is started again.

NOTE: When the vehicle has not been started or driven
for at least 35 days, an Extended Park Start Procedure is
• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service required to start the vehicle. Refer to “Starting Procedures”
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the
fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure
REPLACEMENT BULBS
• Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.

Interior Bulbs
Bulb Number
W5W
W5W

Dome Lamp
Overhead Console Lamp

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

610 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Number
HIR2
D3S **
7442NALL
194
H11
LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer) *
LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer) *
7440
168

Low Beam/High Beam (Bi-Halogen Headlamp)
Low Beam/High Beam (Bi-Xenon Headlamp)
Front Park/Turn Signal Lamp
Sidemarker Lamp
Front Fog Lamp
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
Rear Tail/Stop/Turn Signal Lamp
Backup Lamp
License Lamp

* Lamp is not serviceable. It is a LED lamp. To replace the this, you should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb
LED, the entire assembly must be replaced.
yourself. If a headlamp bulb fails, take your vehicle to an
authorized dealer for service.
** The headlamps are a type of high-voltage discharge
tube. High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the
headlamp switch off and the key removed. Because of
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 611

BULB REPLACEMENT

High Intensity Discharge Headlamps (HID)

NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmospheric conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric
conditions change to allow the condensation to change
back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually
accelerate the clearing process.

The headlamps are a type of high voltage discharge tube.
High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the
headlamp switch off and the key removed. Because of
this, you should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb
yourself. If a headlamp bulb fails, take your vehicle to an
authorized dealer for service.

Headlamps

WARNING!

Halogen Headlamps
Can be serviced by removing the cap from the backside
of the headlamp. Remove the HIR2 bulb from the connector and replacing the bulb. Reinstall bulb and cap.

A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb sockets of
HID headlamps when the headlamp switch is turned
ON. It may cause serious electrical shock or electrocution if not serviced properly. See your authorized
dealer for service.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

612 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Backup Lamps
1. Open trunk.
2. Remove trim cover.

Bulb Socket

4. Replace bulb.
Trim Cover

3. Twist the bulb socket one quarter turn counter clockwise to remove.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 613

License Lamp
1. Remove the screws securing the lamp to the rear
fascia.
2. Remove the bulb and socket assembly.
3. Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and
install the replacement bulb.

Backup Bulb

5. Twist the bulb socket one quarter turn clockwise to
install.
6. Install trim cover.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

614 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

4. Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly.
5. Reattach the lamp to the rear fascia, and then install
the screws.

1 — License Lamp Bulb
2 — Socket

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 615

FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S.
Fuel (Approximate)
Fuel (1.4L Engines)
13.2 Gallons
Fuel (2.0L/2.4L Engines)
14.2 Gallons
Fuel (2.4L GT models only)
15.8 Gallons
Engine Oil With Filter
1.4L Turbo Engine (SAE 5W-40 Synthetic, API Certified)
4 Quarts
2.0L Engine (SAE 0W-20, API Certified)
5 Quarts
2.4L Engine (SAE 0W-20, API Certified)
5.5 Quarts
Cooling System*
1.4L Turbo Engine (MOPAR® OAT Antifreeze/Engine Cool5.8 Quarts
ant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
2.0L and 2.4L Engine (MOPAR® OAT Antifreeze/Engine
7.2 Quarts
Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
* Includes heater and pressurized coolant bottle filled to MAX level.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Metric
50 Liters
54 Liters
60 Liters
3.8 Liters
4.7 Liters
5.2 Liters
5.5 Liters
6.8 Liters

616 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component
Engine Coolant

Engine Oil – 1.4L Turbo Engine

Engine Oil – 2.0L and 2.4L Engine

Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000
Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent meeting
the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-12106.
We recommend you use SAE 5W-40 API Certified Synthetic Engine Oil,
meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-12991 such as
MOPAR®, Pennzoil®, and Shell Helix®. Refer to your engine oil filler cap
for correct SAE grade. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE
grade.
We recommend you use SAE 0W-20 API Certified Engine Oil, meeting the
requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395 such as MOPAR®,
Pennzoil®, and Shell Helix®. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct
SAE grade.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 617

Component
Engine Oil Filter
Spark Plugs
Fuel Selection – 1.4L Turbo Engine
Fuel Selection – 2.0L and 2.4L Engine

Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use MOPAR® Engine Oil Filter or equivalent.
We recommend you use MOPAR® Spark Plugs.
91 Octane Recommended – 87 Octane Acceptable.
87 Octane.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

618 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!

CAUTION! (Continued)

• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, the cooling system will
need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
OAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106), by an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.

• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.

(Continued)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 619

Chassis
Component
Automatic Transmission (1.4L
Turbo Engine) – If Equipped

Automatic Transmission (2.0L And
2.4L Engine) – If Equipped
Manual Transmission – If
Equipped
Brake Master Cylinder

Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Gear Oil: Use only MOPAR® C Series Manual & Dual Dry Clutch Transmission Fluid or equivalent.
Control system: Use only MOPAR® C Series DDCT SAE 75W Hydraulic
Fluid or equivalent.
Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of
your transmission.
Use only MOPAR® SP-IV Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent.
Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of
your transmission
We recommend you use MOPAR® C Series Manual & Dual Dry Clutch
Transmission Fluid.
We recommend you use MOPAR® DOT 3, SAE J1703. If DOT 3, SAE
J1703 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
▫ Required Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .623 N
C
E

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
! MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . .622

S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

622 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
referring to the steps described under “Electronic Vehicle
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
Information Center (EVIC)/Driver Information Display
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
(DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
further information.
scheduled maintenance.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change interBased on engine operation conditions, the oil change
vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve months,
indicator message will illuminate. This means that serwhichever comes first.
vice is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions
such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or Severe Duty All Models
cold ambient temperatures, and E85 fuel usage will
Change Engine Oil at 4000 miles (6,500 km) if the vehicle
influence when the “Change Oil” message is displayed.
is operated in a dusty and off road environment. This
Severe Operating Conditions can cause the change oil
type of vehicle use is considered Severe Duty.
message to illuminate as early as 3,500 miles (5,600 km)
since last reset. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as • Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
Check engine oil level.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE

Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator Check windshield washer fluid level.
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 623 M

Check the tire inflation pressures and look for unusual
wear or damage.
Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, and brake
master cylinder as needed.
Check function of all interior and exterior lights.
Required Maintenance
Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following
pages for required maintenance.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil
Change Indicator System:
• Change engine oil and filter.
• Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator
system turns on.

At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil
Change Indicator System:
• Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as
required.
• Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses
and park brake.
• Inspect engine cooling system protection and
hoses.
• Inspect exhaust system.
• Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or
off-road conditions.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

Additional Inspections
Inspect CV joint boots.
Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends and replace
as necessary.
Inspect brake linings, parking brake function.
Additional Maintenance
Replace the cabin/air conditioning filter.
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
Replace the spark plugs (1.4L Turbo Engine).**

112,000

128,000

144,000

X
X
X

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

X
X

150,000

96,000

240,000

80,000

140,000

64,000

224,000

48,000
X

130,000

90,000
9

208,000

80,000
8

120,000

70,000
7

192,000

60,000
6

110,000

50,000
5

176,000

40,000
4

100,000

30,000
3

160,000

20,000

S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

2
32,000

M 624 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I Maintenance Chart
N
T
Mileage Or Time Passed (Whichever Comes
E
First)
N
A
N
Or Years:
C
E
Or Kilometers:

X
X

80,000

96,000

112,000

128,000

144,000

150,000

64,000

15
240,000

48,000

Replace the spark plugs (2.0L and 2.4L Engine).**
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or
150,000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes first.
Change the transmission fluid (manual, or 1.4L
turbo automatic) if using your vehicle for any of the
following: trailer towing, heavy loading, taxi, police,
delivery service (commercial service), off-road, desert operation or more than 50% of your driving is at
sustained speeds during hot weather, above 90°F
(32°C).

140,000

224,000

90,000

130,000

80,000

208,000

70,000

120,000

60,000

192,000

50,000

110,000

40,000

176,000

30,000

100,000

20,000

Or Years:
Or Kilometers:

160,000

Mileage Or Time Passed (Whichever Comes
First)

32,000

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 625 M

A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

112,000

128,000

144,000

150,000

96,000

15
240,000

80,000

140,000

64,000

224,000

48,000

Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter
(2.0L, 2.4L engines only) if you frequently drive: on
rough or unpaved roads, on mountain roads, on
short trips, in heavy city traffic during hot weather,
or while towing a trailer, or if you use the vehicle for
police, taxi, or in a commercial fleet.
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary.
Replace the timing belt (1.4L Turbo Engine).

130,000

90,000
9

208,000

80,000
8

120,000

70,000
7

192,000

60,000
6

110,000

50,000
5

176,000

40,000
4

100,000

30,000
3

160,000

20,000
2
32,000

M 626 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I
Mileage Or Time Passed (Whichever Comes
N
First)
T
E
N
Or Years:
A
Or
Kilometers:
N
C
E

X
X

** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only,
yearly intervals do not apply.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 627 M

WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and
effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.

A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
! SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .631

▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .633

▫ Prepare For The Appointment. . . . . . . . . . . . .631

▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .633

▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .631 ! WARRANTY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .634
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . .631 ! MOPAR® PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .635
! IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .631 ! REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . . . . . . . . . . . .635
▫ Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center. . . . . . .632
▫ Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . . . .632
▫ In Mexico Contact:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .633

▫ In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .635
▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .635
! PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . . . . . . . . . . . .636

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

630 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

! DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .637
▫ Treadwear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .637

▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .637
▫ Temperature Grades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .638

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 631

SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment

Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
for an appointment.

If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have
the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
current problem.
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
Prepare A List
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the with our products and services.
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
service advisor know.
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

632 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and • Authorized dealer name
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
correctly and in a timely manner.
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer service manager first. Most matters can be re- Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center
solved with this process.
P.O. Box 21–8004
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer.
Phone: (800) 423–6343
They want to know if you need assistance.
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the con- Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
cern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer P.O. Box 1621
center.
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cenPhone: (800) 465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French
ter should include the following information:
• Owner’s name and address

• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 633

Mexico, D. F.

Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.

In Mexico City: 5081-7568

Service Contract

Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300

You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
have any questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800)
465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French).

In Mexico Contact:
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109

Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

634 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.

WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only),
some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State
of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or
other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids
contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth defects,
or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
DVD, for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group
LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 635

campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized
MOPAR® fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
dealer, and the manufacturer.
available from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424– 9153),
operating at its best.
or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: AdminREPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
istrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West
Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
other information about motor vehicle safety from
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could http://www.safercar.gov.
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety In Canada
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
manufacturer.
should contact the Customer Service Department immeIf NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in defect to the Canadian government should contact Transa group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy port Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and
Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety/
MOPAR® PARTS

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

636 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

Diagnostic Procedure Manuals

PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.

Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals
make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and
features. They show exactly how to find and correct
problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshootNOTE: A street address is required when ordering
ing and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
and a complete list of all tools and equipment.
Service Manuals
Owner’s Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the inforThese Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
mation that students and professional technicians need in
assistance of service and engineering specialists to acdiagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintainquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC vehicles.
ing, servicing, and repairing Chrysler Group LLC veIncluded are starting, operating, emergency and maintehicles. A complete working knowledge of the vehicle,
system, and/or components is written in straightforward nance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities
and safety tips.
language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 637

Call toll free at:

Treadwear

• 1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)

The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate.

• 1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
Or

Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.

Traction Grades

The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perforrequirements in addition to these grades.
mance.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

638 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor

Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel, than the minimum required by law.

WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

INDEX

10
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

640 INDEX

About Your Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . .587
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .505
Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .581
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503
Air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Air Bag
Advance Front Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
Air Bag Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Air bag Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Air Bag Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
Driver Knee Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
Enhanced Accident Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
Front Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Front Passenger Knee Air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
If A Deployment Occurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Knee Impact Bolsters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77

Lighter Weight Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Maintaining Your Air Bag System . . . . . . . . . . . .86
Occupant Classification Module (OCM) . . . . . . . .68
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Air bag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Air bag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
Air bag Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . .575
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .577
Air Conditioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390
Air Conditioning Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390
Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .577
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390
Air Pressure, Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478
Alarm
Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Rearming The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

INDEX 641

Tamper Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Vehicle Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Alarm Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315
Alarm, Panic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Alarm System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .586
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .615
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .589
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453
Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .595
Assistance Towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
Assist, Hill Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458
Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237

Automatic High Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . .402
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .594
Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .595
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .594
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .593
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .594
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
Auto Unlock, Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Auto Up Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .576
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . . . .27
Belts, Seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Bluetooth®
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or
Audio Device After Pairing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

642 INDEX

Connect Or Disconnect Link Between the
Uconnect® Phone And Mobile Phone . . . .
Pair (Link) Uconnect® Phone To A Mobile
Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake Control System, Electronic . . . . . . . . .
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake, Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brightness, Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . .192
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.172
.580
.471
.455
.452
.619
.448
.450
.450
.453
.591
.312
.424
.244
.609
.114

Camera, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271
Capacities, Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . .615
Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .615
Caps, Filler
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .505
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .566
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .588
Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295
Cargo Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295
Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .596
CD (Compact Disc) Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379
Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488
Change Oil Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330
Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539
Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) . .318
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

INDEX 643

Checks, Safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
Child Restraints
Booster Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
Child Seat Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt . . . . . . .102
Infants And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children . . . . . . .95
Older Children And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . .91
Seating Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501
Cleaning
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .597
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367
Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .591
Clutch Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .591

Coin Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . .
Compact Disc (CD) Player . . . . . . . . .
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Computer, Trip/Travel. . . . . . . . . . . .
Connector
UCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI)
Console, Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Console, Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) .
Cooling System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . .
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . . .
Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . . . .
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

.
.
.
.
.

.293
.389
.379
.483
.326

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.380
.380
.293
.273
.633
.615
.588
.585
.587
.585
.589
.585
.589

644 INDEX

Points to Remember . . . . . . . . .
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) .
Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . .
Cruise Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.590
.588
.588
.586
.595
.320
.291
.631

Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
Daytime Brightness, Interior Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . .246
Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
Dealer Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .571
Deck Lid, Emergency Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Deck Lid, Power Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Defroster, Rear Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247
Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .568

Dimmer Switch, Headlight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
Dipsticks
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .594
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .589
Door Locks
Child-Protection Door Lock — Rear Doors . . . . . .37
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Door Opener, Garage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
Driving
Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow Standing
Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

INDEX 645

Electrical Power Outlets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287
Electric Rear Window Defrost. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298
Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455
Electronic Stability Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .461
Traction Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . .253
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) . . . . . . . . . . . . .461
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . . . . .271
Emergency Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448
Emergency Deck Lid Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Emergency, In Case of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .551
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527

Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .559
Emergency Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . .569
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .566
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .575
Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .572
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .565
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .585
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .551
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .572
Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .566
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .573
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527
Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . . .83

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

646 INDEX

Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501
Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Exterior Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Exterior Lighting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236
Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
Filler Location Fuel . . . . . .
Filters
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . .
Air Conditioning . . . . .
Automatic Transmission
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Oil Disposal . . .
Flashers
Hazard Warning . . . . . .
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.575
.405
.595
.575
.574

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114

Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . .
Floor Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fluid Level Checks
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . .
Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

.
.
.
.
.
.

.243
.415
.293
.619
.615
.114

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.594
.616
.616
.241
.232
.555
.500
.505
.503
.615
.501
.501

INDEX 647

Filler Cap (Gas Cap) .
Filler Door (Gas Cap)
Gasoline . . . . . . . . . .
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . .
Light . . . . . . . . . . . .
Materials Added . . . .
Methanol . . . . . . . . .
Octane Rating . . . . . .
Requirements . . . . . .
Specifications . . . . . .
Tank Capacity . . . . . .
Fueling . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel System Caution . . .
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®)
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . .
Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.

.505
.315
.500
.314
.316
.503
.501
.500
.500
.616
.615
.505
.507
.602

Gasoline, Reformulated . . . .
Gauges
Coolant Temperature . . . .
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Speedometer . . . . . . . . .
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . .
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gear Select Lever Override .
General Information . . . . . .
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . .
Gross Axle Weight Rating . .
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating.
GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.310
.314
.314
.308
.418
.556
.166
.600
.511
.508
.508

Hands-Free Phone (Uconnect®) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
.275 Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow
.505
Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446
.501
.500 Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

648 INDEX

Headlights
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch . . . . . .
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch .
Hill Start Assist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hitches
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Holder, Coin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.237
.600
.238
.243
.240
.238
.243
.236
.238
.230
.124
.390
.416
.243
.458

HomeLink® (Garage Door Opener) . . . . . . . . . . . .275

Ignition
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Courtesy Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Front Courtesy Overhead Console . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter . . . . . . .23
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Information Center, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321
Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305
Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .601
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .599
Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244
. . .513 Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers). . . . . . . . . . . . .247
. . .293 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

INDEX 649

Keyless Enter-N-Go. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412
iPod®/USB/MP3 Control
Bluetooth® Streaming Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175 Keyless Enter-N-Go™
Enter The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .543
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .540
Lock The Vehicle’s Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539
Passive Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .551
Passive Entry Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Key Fob
Unlock From The Driver’s Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Arm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Unlock From The Passenger Side . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 Keyless Go. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . . . .27 Key, Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . . . .27 Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23 Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Unlatch The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 Lane Change and Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

650 INDEX

Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
Lap/Shoulder Belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500
Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .486
Light Bulbs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315
Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .611
Cruise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator . . . . .464
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114

Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236
Headlights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
Headlights On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238
Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312
High Beam/Low Beam Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236
Intensity Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244
License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .613
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . .318
Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness) . . . . . . . . . . .246

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

INDEX 651

Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .611
Service Engine Soon (Malfunction Indicator) . . . .318
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . .308
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
Vanity Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . . .308
Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .508
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Auto Unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37

Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .580
Lug Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .528
Maintenance Free Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine).
Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Frequency of Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . .
Lubricant Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shift Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Master Cylinder (Brakes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mini-Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.576
.571
.622
.318
.636
.417
.595
.595
.595
.418
.591
.501
.326
.121

652 INDEX

Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Exterior Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491
MOPAR® Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .570
MTBE/ETBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501
Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500
Odometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316

Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330
Oil Change Indicator, Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .572
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .615
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .573
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .572
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .574
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .575
Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .574
Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .574
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .573
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .573
Oil Filter, Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .575
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .568
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink®) . . . . . . . . . . . .275
Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .568
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Overhead Console. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

INDEX 653

Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .595
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Parking Brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448
Parking On Hill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448
ParkSense® System, Rear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258
Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Phone, Cellular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
Phone, Hands-Free (Uconnect®) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
Phone (Pairing). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
Phone (Uconnect®) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . . . .472
Power
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450
Deck Lid Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35

Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . .287
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Preparation for Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .542
Pretensioners
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap)
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rain Sensitive Wiper System . . . . . .
Rear Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Cupholder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear ParkSense System . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Seat, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . .

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.479
.588
.389
.249
.271
.291
.258
.232
.298
.298

654 INDEX

Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523
Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .578
Reminder, Lights On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
Reminder, Seat Belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Remote Control
Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
Arm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
FCC General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Keyless Enter-N-Go™™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . . . .27
Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . . . .27
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Unlatch The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25

Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . .387
Remote Starting
Enter Remote Start Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Exit Remote Start Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Remote Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Remote Starting System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Remote Trunk Release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .609
Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Replacement Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .570
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .635
Restraint, Head. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Rocking Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

INDEX 655

Safety Checks Inside Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .635
Safety, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .622
Seat Belt
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . . . . .57
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) . . . . . . . . . . .60
Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Seat Belt Pretensioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Seat Belt System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49

Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .601
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Adjustable Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . . . .57
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
Seatback Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
Tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

656 INDEX

Security Alarm
Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Rearming The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Tamper Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Selection of Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .573
SENTRY KEY®
FCC General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Sentry Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .631
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .633
Service Engine Soon Light (Malfunction Indicator) . .318
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .636
Setting the Clock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367
Shifting
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417
Shift Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556

Short Message Service (SMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Side View Mirror Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Signals, Turn. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481
Spare Tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483
Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .616
Specifications
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .573
Speed Control (Cruise Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253
Speedometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412
Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

INDEX 657

Steering
Column Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
Column Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251
Wheel, Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252
Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251
Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .387
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . .387
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .609
Storage, Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404
Stuck, Freeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555
Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284
Sun Visor Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag . . . . . . . . . .63
Sway Control, Trailer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457
System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30

Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . .
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) .
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . .
Text Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Time Delay, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire and Loading Information Placard . .
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire Rotation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Aging (Life of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . .
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . .
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tachometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.251
.402
.310
.164
.251
.238
.471
.465
.576
.114
.486
.476
.488
.539
.483
.476
.479
.478
.539

658 INDEX

Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . .
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . .
Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . .
Tire Service Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . .
To Open Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.486
.471
.491
.308
.637
.479
.487
.490
.465
.466
.481
.540
.485
.485
.465
.530
.515
.234
.510

24-Hour Towing Assistance . . . . .
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing Assistance. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing Vehicle Behind a Motorhome
Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . .
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . .
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Minimum Requirements . . . . . . .
Trailer and Tongue Weight . . . . . .
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer Towing Guide. . . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.150
.559
.514
.523
.514
.150
.523
.445
.456
.457
.510
.522
.513
.516
.515
.520
.514
.514

INDEX 659

Transmission
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .595
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .619
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .593
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417
Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . .27
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®). . . .275
Transmitter Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) . . .27
Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . .23
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316
Trunk Lid (Deck Lid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Trunk Release, Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Trunk Release Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242

Uconnect®
Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
Phone Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
Things You Should Know About Your
Uconnect® Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192
Uconnect® Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Uconnect® Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351
Uconnect® 130 With Satellite Radio
Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374
Uconnect® (Hands-Free Phone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
Uconnect® Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
Uconnect® Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Uconnect® Voice Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .637
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . . .380
Universal Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275
UCI Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380 Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

660 INDEX

Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57 Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .596
Water
Driving Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446
Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .508 Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .597
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .597
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473 Wind Buffeting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404
Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Auto Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Voice Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
Reset Auto-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Voice Recognition System (VR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527 Windshield Defroster. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Description) . . .308 Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246
Warnings and Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .581
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .634 Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246
Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .581
Washer
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .581 Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247
Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248 Wipers, Rain Sensitive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.

The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Chrysler Group LLC
15Y532-126-AA
15PFD41-126-AB

First Edition
Second
Edition
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Printed
in U.S.A.
Printed
in U.S.A

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.3
Linearized                      : No
Has XFA                         : No
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 5.6-c015 81.157285, 2014/12/12-00:43:15
Publication Type                :  Owners_Manual
Xpp File Process Date           :  August 8, 2014
Jobnumber                       :  1650888
Operator                        :  schancey
Job Path                        :  Owners_Manual/1650888-en-2015_DODGE_DART_OM_USA.15PFD41-126-AB/Owners_Manual_v3
Checkintocm                     :  Yes
Language                        :  en
Modify Date                     : 2015:06:03 09:49:17-05:00
Create Date                     : 2014:09:16 16:14:28Z
Metadata Date                   : 2015:06:03 09:49:17-05:00
Creator Tool                    : XPP
Keywords                        : 1650888
Producer                        : Mac OS X 10.9.4 Quartz PDFContext
Format                          : application/pdf
Subject                         : 1650888
Description                     : 15PFD41-126-AB
Title                           : 2015 Dodge Dart Owner's Manual
Creator                         : 2nd Edition
Instance ID                     : uuid:ec4dc75c-93d3-4c55-a1ab-a26f389b35ef
Document ID                     : uuid:e1f53e87-7492-48c4-9b4b-900c812d7822
Page Count                      : 664
Apple Keywords                  : 1650888
Author                          : 2nd Edition
CHECKINTOCM                     :  Yes
JOBNUMBER                       :  1650888
LANGUAGE                        :  en

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

2015 Dodge Dart Owner's Manual

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation